BVH2414GB

DISOCONT® Tersus MULTISTREAM
Instruction Manual
BV-H2414 GB
PASS - A service you can count on. Fast, comprehensive and anywhere in the world.
Quality and reliability are the cornerstones of our company’s philosophy. That is why we consider a comprehensive service concept
simply par for the course, from strict quality control, installation and commissioning through to seamless support across the entire life
cycle of our products.
With over 30 service stations and over 180 service specialists, you can count on us to be there whenever and wherever you need us.
During business hours, our service specialists from all business areas are ready to analyze problems and find the reasons for failures.
You can find the Schenck Process location nearest to you on our website www.schenckprocess.com.
If you are looking for individualized and tailor-made service solutions, Then our modular PASS service system is just right for you. It
includes the entire range of services from simple inspections all the way down to a complete service programme. Further information
can be found at www.schenckprocess.com.
Heavy Advisory Service about Spare Parts, Maintenance

Cement, Gypsum, Sand & Gravel, Steel and NF-Metals and Components
Coal-Fired Power Plants and related Industry T: +49 6151 1531-3328
T: +49 6151 1531-3138 aftermarket@schenckprocess.com
F: +49 6151-1531-1423
Logistical and Industrial Scales

Railways and Roads
T: +49 6151 1531-2448
F: +49 6151 1531-1423
24h Hotline: +49 172 650 1700

service@schenckprocess.com
Light
Chemistry, plastics, foodstuffs and phar maceuticals
T: +49 6151 1531-3138
F: +49 6151 1531-1423
24h Hotline: +49 171 225 1195
service@schenckprocess.com
Individual phone consulting - fee required

(Mo. - Fr., 8.00 – 17.00 CET)
© by Schenck Process GmbH, Pallaswiesenstraße 100, 64293 Darmstadt, Germany

Phone: +49 6151 1531-0 ; www.schenckprocess.com
All rights reserved. This documentation or excerpts thereof may not be reproduced in any form without prior written permission by
Schenck Process GmbH. Subject to change without prior notice.
Note: The original manual is in German. This is a translation.
(9007199753939851 V2, 19/11/2014)

Table of Contents
Table of Contents
1 About This Manual ............................................................................................................... 1
2 Safety notes .......................................................................................................................... 3

2.1 Signal Words ..................................................................................................................... 4
2.1.1 Signal Words for Safety Warnings ............................................................................ 4
2.1.2 Signal Words for Application Notes ........................................................................... 5
2.2 Five Safety Rules of Electrical Engineering ...................................................................... 6
2.3 Damaged/Defective Electrical Components ...................................................................... 6
3 General Diagram ................................................................................................................... 7

3.1 What is the DISOCONT Tersus?....................................................................................... 7
3.2 Some Definitions................................................................................................................ 8
3.3 Measuring principle ........................................................................................................... 9
3.4 Automatic control ............................................................................................................... 9
3.5 Control operating modes ..................................................................................................................... 10
3.6 Batching ............................................................................................................................................... 10
3.7 Additional Bin Weighers....................................................................................................................... 11
4 Operation ............................................................................................................................. 13
4.1 Behavior after Connecting the Power .................................................................................................. 13
4.2 Operating and Control Access............................................................................................................. 13
4.2.1 Connecting an operating panel (VHM) with a scale controller (VCU) ......................................... 14
4.2.1.1 Connection via Ethernet .......................................................................................... 14
4.2.1.2 Connection via Bluetooth ........................................................................................ 15
4.2.1.3 Connection via RS485 ............................................................................................ 15
4.2.2 Connecting EasyServe (PC) with the scales controller (VCU)................................ 16
4.2.2.1 Connection via Ethernet .......................................................................................... 16
4.2.2.2 Connection via Wireless LAN .................................................................................. 16
4.2.2.3 Connection via Bluetooth ........................................................................................ 16
4.2.2.4 Connection via RS232 ............................................................................................ 17
4.2.3 Connecting the web browser (PC) with the scales controller (VCU) .......................................... 17
4.3 VHM Operator Panel (optional) ........................................................................................................... 20
4.3.1 Display and Operation Fields .................................................................................. 21
4.3.1.1 Name of the Device ................................................................................................. 21
4.3.1.2 Event Messages ...................................................................................................... 22
4.3.1.3 Selecting an Operating Page .................................................................................. 22
4.3.1.4 On/Off Operation ..................................................................................................... 23
4.3.1.5 Detail Selection ....................................................................................................... 23
4.3.1.6 Values and Graphics ............................................................................................... 23
4.3.1.7 Command and Edit Keys ........................................................................................ 23
4.3.1.8 Symbol for Running Operation ................................................................................ 23
4.3.2 Operating Fields and Function Calls ....................................................................... 24
4.3.3 Authorization for Control Commands ...................................................................... 25
4.3.3.1 Modes of Operation: Normal Operation and Keyboard Operation .............................................. 25
4.3.3.2 Restrictions for Operating Panel with Ethernet Connection and Connection Monitoring............ 26
4.3.3.3 Access to Special Functions ................................................................................... 26
4.3.4 Basic Operating Functions ...................................................................................... 27
4.3.4.1 Switch Feeding On/Off ............................................................................................ 27
4.3.4.2 Set setpoint ............................................................................................................. 28
4.3.4.3 Relative Setpoint ..................................................................................................... 28
DISOCONT® Tersus MULTISTREAM, Instruction Manual BV-H2414GB, V2

Schenck Process Group -i-
Table of Contents
4.3.4.4 Resetting (zero setting) the totalizing counter ..............................................................................29

4.3.4.5 Acknowledging Event Messages .................................................................................................29
4.3.4.6 Displaying Selected Values .........................................................................................................30
4.3.4.7 Storing Counter States .................................................................................................................30
4.3.5 Special Operating Functions ........................................................................................................30
4.3.5.1 Trend ............................................................................................................................................31
4.3.5.2 Keyboard operation ......................................................................................................................33
4.3.5.3 VHM/Scale System Information and Cleaning the Screen ..........................................................34
4.3.5.4 Displaying the most recent events (errors) ..................................................................................34
4.3.5.5 Display Stored Counter Readings ................................................................................................34
4.3.5.6 Display the Most Recent Parameter Alterations ..........................................................................35
4.3.5.7 Bin Weigher: Display and Operation ............................................................................................35
4.3.6 Service Functions .........................................................................................................................36
4.3.6.1 Display Parameter Alterations......................................................................................................36
4.3.6.2 Reading and Setting Parameters .................................................................................................36
4.3.6.3 Setting the Clock ..........................................................................................................................37
4.3.6.4 Reset to Factory Settings .............................................................................................................37
4.3.6.5 Simulation Mode ..........................................................................................................................38
4.3.6.6 Access to calibration functions .....................................................................................................38
4.3.6.7 Begin Data Logging......................................................................................................................39
4.3.7 Configuring the VHM Operating Panel.........................................................................................40
4.3.7.1 Login for Privileged Users (Login/Logout)....................................................................................40
4.3.7.2 Selection and Display of the Scales (Feeder) ..............................................................................40
4.3.7.3 Connecting to a Scales (Con.Scale) ............................................................................................40
4.3.7.4 Selecting Asian Character Fonts .................................................................................................41
4.3.7.5 Setting the Address (VHM addr.) .................................................................................................41
4.3.7.6 Set the Homepage (Config) .........................................................................................................41
4.3.7.7 Setting the Display .......................................................................................................................42
4.3.7.8 Accessing the Configuration ........................................................................................................43
4.3.7.9 Calibrating Touch Screen Entry ...................................................................................................43
4.3.7.10 Configuring the Communication Path (Com) ...............................................................................44
4.3.7.11 VHM System Information and Cleaning the Screen ....................................................................44
4.4 Calibration programs ............................................................................................................................45
4.4.1 Taring the flowthrough measurement ..........................................................................................45
4.4.2 Flowthrough measurement zero setting .......................................................................................46
4.4.3 Weight check flowthrough meter..................................................................................................46
4.4.4 Taring the bin weigher..................................................................................................................47
4.4.5 Bin weight control .........................................................................................................................48
4.4.6 Optimizing Hopper Fill Level Regulation ......................................................................................49
4.4.7 Linearizing the measurement .......................................................................................................49
4.4.8 Automatic control measurement unit (KME) ................................................................................50
4.4.8.1 Types of control measurement ....................................................................................................50
4.4.8.2 Operating the control measurement (KME) .................................................................................53
5 Startup ..................................................................................................................................................... 55
5.1 Assembling the Electrical Components ................................................................................................55
5.2 Electrical Connections ..........................................................................................................................55
5.3 Test that the Control is Functioning ......................................................................................................55
5.4 Entering Basic parameters ...................................................................................................................55
5.5 Adjusting the flow rate regulation .........................................................................................................56
5.6 Check with bulk solids ..........................................................................................................................57
5.7 Calibrating bin weighing .......................................................................................................................58
6 Maintenance and Recalibration ............................................................................................................ 59
BV-H2414GB, V2 DISOCONT® Tersus MULTISTREAM, Instruction Manual

- iv - Schenck Process Group
Table of Contents
7 Parameters .............................................................................................................................................. 61
7.1 Abbreviations ....................................................................................................................................... 62
7.2 Configuring the Interfaces ................................................................................................................... 62
7.3 Configuring Event Messages............................................................................................................... 64
7.4 Parameter List ..................................................................................................................................... 65
7.4.1 Parameter Overview ................................................................................................................... 65
7.4.2 Parameter Details ....................................................................................................................... 84
7.4.2.1 Parameter Block 01 - Hardware Modules ................................................................................... 84
7.4.2.2 Parameter Block 02 - Dialog Behaviour ...................................................................................... 86
7.4.2.3 Parameter Block 03 - Device Definition ...................................................................................... 89
7.4.2.4 Parameter Block 04 - Control Sources ....................................................................................... 91
7.4.2.5 Parameter Block 05 - Rated Data ............................................................................................... 92
7.4.2.6 Parameter Block 06 - Feeder control .......................................................................................... 93
7.4.2.7 Parameter Block 07 - Feeder Monitoring .................................................................................... 93
7.4.2.8 Parameter Block 08 - Filters ....................................................................................................... 97
7.4.2.9 Parameter Block 09 - Limit Values .............................................................................................. 97
7.4.2.10 Parameter Block 10 - Calibration Data ....................................................................................... 98
7.4.2.11 Parameter Block 11 - Rate controller .......................................................................................... 99
7.4.2.12 Parameter Block 12 - Analog Outputs ...................................................................................... 103
7.4.2.13 Parameter Block 13 - Digital Inputs .......................................................................................... 105
7.4.2.14 Parameter Block 14 - Digital Outputs ........................................................................................ 108
7.4.2.15 Parameter Block 15 - Batch Mode ............................................................................................ 110
7.4.2.16 Parameter Block 16 - Maintenance interval .............................................................................. 113
7.4.2.17 Parameter Block 17 - Communication EasyServe .................................................................... 114
7.4.2.18 Parameter Block 18 - Communication Fieldbus........................................................................ 114
7.4.2.19 Parameter Block 19 - Fixed mode configuration ....................................................................... 118
7.4.2.20 Parameter Block 20 - Ethernet .................................................................................................. 120
7.4.2.21 Parameter Block 21 - PLC Outputs ........................................................................................... 120
7.4.2.22 Parameter Block 22 - Bin Weigher............................................................................................ 121
7.4.2.23 Parameter Block 23 - Bin Level Controller ................................................................................ 127
7.4.2.24 Parameter Block 24 - Check System ........................................................................................ 133
7.4.2.25 Parameter Block 25 - Moisture ................................................................................................. 140
7.4.2.26 Parameter Block 26 - Additional device .................................................................................... 143
7.4.2.27 Parameter Block 27 - Dead Time.............................................................................................. 144
7.4.2.28 Parameter Block 28 - Interlocking ............................................................................................. 145
7.4.2.29 Parameter Block 29 - FCB analog outputs ............................................................................... 147
7.4.2.30 Parameter Block 30 - FCB digital outputs ................................................................................. 150
7.4.2.31 Parameter Block 31 - Data Logging .......................................................................................... 152
7.4.2.32 Parameter Block 32 - Configuration HMI Values ...................................................................... 153
7.4.2.33 Parameter Block 33 - Linearization ........................................................................................... 154
7.4.2.34 Parameter Block 34 - Flow Gate ............................................................................................... 156
7.4.2.35 Parameter Block 35 - Local Mode (Speed) ............................................................................... 157
7.4.2.36 Parameter Block 36 - Local Mode (Gate) ................................................................................. 163
8 Event Messages.................................................................................................................................... 167

8.1 Events Details .................................................................................................................................... 167
8.1.1 Event Group: Calibration ........................................................................................................... 167
8.1.2 Event Group: Check Measurement ........................................................................................... 168
8.1.3 Event Group: Controller ............................................................................................................ 170
8.1.4 Event Group: Electrical System ................................................................................................ 172
8.1.5 Event Group: Interlock .............................................................................................................. 173
8.1.6 Event Group: Material Flow....................................................................................................... 174
8.1.7 Event Group: MAX .................................................................................................................... 175
8.1.8 Event Group: MIN ..................................................................................................................... 176

Schenck Process Group - iii -
Table of Contents
8.1.9 Event Group: Sequence Monitoring .......................................................................................... 176

8.1.10 Event Group: System Message ................................................................................................ 177
9 Appendix ............................................................................................................................................... 179

9.1 Setpoint and switch-on sources ......................................................................................................... 179
9.2 Measuring the flow rate (measure) .................................................................................................... 182
9.3 Flow rate regulation ........................................................................................................................... 183
9.3.1 Constant controller .................................................................................................................... 183
9.3.2 Step controller ........................................................................................................................... 188
9.4 Batch Operation Control .................................................................................................................... 191
9.5 Local operation .................................................................................................................................. 193
9.5.1 Controlling with VLG ................................................................................................................. 193
9.5.2 Controlling with VMO ................................................................................................................ 194
9.5.2.1 Local operation logic for rotating drives and valves .................................................................. 197
9.5.2.2 The logic for position-controlled feed gates .............................................................................. 200
9.6 Bin weigher: Scaling and Limit .......................................................................................................... 202
9.7 Continuous bin fill level control .......................................................................................................... 203
9.8 Bin fill level regulation via feed gate .................................................................................................. 205
9.9 Details and flow chart control measurement (KME) .......................................................................... 207
9.10 Adjusting linearization ........................................................................................................................ 208
9.11 Links in the Parameter Block 'Interlocking' ........................................................................................ 209
9.12 Using alternative signals (such as analog or fieldbus) for DMS inputs ............................................. 211
9.13 PLC Functionality (Optional) .............................................................................................................. 213
9.13.1 Handling the Function Blocks.................................................................................................... 214
9.13.2 Function Blocks for Binary Signals............................................................................................ 215
9.13.3 Function Blocks for Analog Signals .......................................................................................... 216
9.14 Pulse Output for External Totalizing Counters .................................................................................. 218
9.15 Checking the Weight Measurement Instrumentation......................................................................... 219
Index ...................................................................................................................................................... 220

- iv - Schenck Process Group
About This Manual
1 About This Manual

This operating manual for the »DISOCONT® Tersus multi-component feeder MULTISTREAM« system is
intended both for the operating personnel and for the service technicians. It describes the functionality of the
software VIF 20170-nnn*).
*)
nnn = software version; see chapter »Parameter List [➙65]«
The following or more recent software releases must be installed in some of the components used
to ensure that a DISOCONT Tersus system will operate correctly with this software version:
▪ VHM 20170-009 ← Operator panel VHM
▪ VPC 20150-024 ← Service tool 'Schenck Process EasyServe' (EasyServe for short)
The DISOCONT Tersus system will hereinafter for reasons of simplicity also be referred to as weighing ter-
minal, weighing electronics, scale controller, scale, controller or device.
DISOCONT is a registered trademark of Schenck Process GmbH, Darmstadt.
Provision of the Manual

The manual is available in different formats:
▪ A printed version
▪ An electronic document in the platform-independent ADOBE format (file ending: *.PDF)
▪ As online help in the Microsoft Windows HTMLHelp format (file ending: *.CHM)
Further documentation
The following documents are referred to in the text:
BV-H2406 DISOCONT® Tersus – System manual

BV-H2448 DISOCONT® Tersus – Data communication
BV-H2488 Local operator panel VMO - Operating manual
BV-H2185 Schenck Process EasyServe – Operating manual
BV-H2510 DISOCONT® Tersus - Function blocks – Programming manual
BV-H2461 DISOPLAN VPL 20430 – Operating manual

Schenck Process Group -v-
Safety notes
2 Safety notes
To avoid personal injury and material damage, follow the safety regulations stated below.
Additionally you should also observe:
▪ Safety information given in order-specific documentation
▪ Safety information relating to mechanical components
▪ Instructions and safety instructions for parts manufactured by third-party suppliers or parts that are not
part of Schenck Process scope of delivery.
When performing installation, commissioning and service work, observe all applicable local regulations.
Intended Use
The supplied system is to be used exclusively for the specified task. Any other use which exceeds this shall
not be considered part of the intended use.
The supplied system may be part of a more complex system. The system operator bears overall responsibil-
ity for the operating safety of the system.
Potential Sources of Danger

Dangers may arise from the machine or from facilities that for example are used in the plant for transport or
feeding if control tasks are taken on by the system.
To avoid dangers the system must correctly be used, operated, monitored and serviced by trained person-
nel. Bear in mind that the system may be part of a more complex plant. It may therefore be necessary to take
more extensive protective measures before working on the plant.
The plant operator is responsible for the safe operation of the plant.
Personnel
Preparation, assembly, commissioning, operation, maintenance and servicing may only be carried out by
qualified personnel.
All persons working on the system are required to observe the safety hints and know the parts of the tech-
nical documentation relevant to their work.
The operating company is responsible for instructing his operators to observe all regulations and instructions
given.
Parameter Changes
The measuring system's functionality is determined by parameters. Only personnel familiar with the device's
mode of operation may alter these parameters (e.g. after training by Schenck Process). Incorrectly set pa-
rameters may cause injury or material damage. if control units are connected. Furthermore they may also
cause considerable disruption to weigh operations.
Password
Passwords safeguard the parameters against unauthorized changes. The measuring system operator has to
ensure that the password is handled responsibly.

Schenck Process Group -3-
Safety notes
Acknowledging Event Messages

Error messages may be acknowledged only after cause of fault has been remedied.
Ensure that any connected peripheral devices are functioning correctly before acknowledging an event. Any
connected control systems in particular must be in safe state.
Maintenance and Repair

▪ All warning and instruction signs on the scales must be observed.
▪ The measuring system has to be shut down before working on mechanical equipment or peripheral sys-
tems (control systems in particular). Steps must be taken to ensure the measuring system cannot be
started inadvertently.
▪ Disconnect the power supply before performing work on the electrical equipment (pull the plug!).
▪ The devices may be operated only in the housings supplied as there would otherwise be a danger of
coming into contact with live parts.
Moisture and Humidity

All of the scale components (particularly electrical components) should be protected from moisture and hu-
midity when the housing is open such as during service work. Beyond this, the housing's protection classes
should be complied with.
Design Modifications
If you modify the system or expand it using parts not supplied by Schenck Process, Schenck Process cannot
assume liability for any such modifications. This especially applies to modifications which could affect the
operating safety of the system.
Replacing Components
Spare parts must meet the technical specifications indicated by Schenck Process. To ensure this require-
ment is met, only genuine Schenck Process spare parts should be used. When using other spare parts, the
warranty will be void.
Keeping the Technical Documentation

Keep the technical documentation safe. Hand the technical documentation over to the buyer if the equipment
should be sold on.
2.1 Signal Words
2.1.1 Signal Words for Safety Warnings

Potential dangers will always exist when working with technical devices. Dangers will arise if the machine is
▪ incorrectly installed,
▪ started up incorrectly,
▪ operated by untrained personnel, or
▪ serviced by unqualified personnel.

-4- Schenck Process Group
Safety notes
The following signal words in this manual indicate dangers that may arise when handling this machine:
Danger
The signal word DANGER identifies a danger with a high degree of risk that, if not prevented, will cause
grievous injury or death. Follow all instructions to prevent this danger from arising.
Warning
The signal word WARNING identifies a danger with a moderate degree of risk that, if not prevented, may
cause grievous injury or death. Follow all instructions to prevent this danger from arising.
Caution
The signal word CAUTION identifies a danger with a low degree of risk that, if not prevented, may cause a
minor or moderate injury. Follow all instructions to prevent this danger from arising.
Representation of safety instructions
Fig. 1: Components Safety Instruction
1 Symbol 2 Signal word
3 Type and source of danger 4 Possible consequences if the danger is not pre-
vented.
5 Possible measures for preventing the danger.
2.1.2 Signal Words for Application Notes
Always Observe
The signal words ALWAYS OBSERVE identify situations in which material or environmental damage could
occur.
Example:
STRICTLY OBSERVE
Welding on load-bearing parts

Safety notes
TIP
The signal word TIP highlights information that can be utilized to treat the product economically and at
an optimal level of efficiency.
Example:
HINT
Take note of the measures listed below to rectify malfunctions.
2.2 Five Safety Rules of Electrical Engineering
These fives safety rules must be followed in the order shown before work is begun on electrical systems.
Once the work is finished, they are to be applied in reverse order.
DANGER
Electric shock from live components
There is a danger of life from an electric shock.
– Take all possible precautions to ensure safety before work is begun on
live components. Observe, among other things, the following:
1. Disconnect the components.
2. Secure against restart.
3. Ensure that the components have been de-energized.
4. For voltages above 1 kV: Ground and short-circuit cables.
5. Cover or shield adjacent, live components.
2.3 Damaged/Defective Electrical Components
DANGER
Live damaged or defective components
Danger of life from electric shocks.
1. Have trained personnel ensure that all live components are undamaged
and in proper working order.
2. Have trained personnel replace damaged or defective electrical compo-
nents.

General Diagram
3 General Diagram
The basic functions of the DISOCONT Tersus in combination with a feeder or measuring equipment will be
explained in this chapter.
3.1 What is the DISOCONT Tersus?

DISOCONT Tersus is a versatile modular electronic system for weighing and feeding technology.
Its components are:
▪ VCU control unit ('scale controller')
▪ VHM local operator panel
▪ Input/output expansion modules
The DISOCONT Tersus was designed for continuous measurement and control tasks or for discontinuous
batching.
All weighing-related functions and process functions for measuring and feeding bulk solids are performed by
the DISOCONT Tersus system.
The DISOCONT Tersus is customizable and very flexible in terms of its physical layout and interconnection.
DISOCONT Tersus can be used in the following areas with specific software for weighing and feeding job
applications:
▪ Steel
▪ Cement production
▪ Chemicals
▪ Foodstuffs industry
▪ Power plants
It supports the following plant systems in connection with the right mechanical equipment:
▪ Belt scale
▪ Weighfeeders
▪ Loss-in-weight feeders
▪ Filling plants
▪ Feeders with a weighing discharge screw (MultiFlex)
▪ Mass flow rate measuring devices and mass flow rate feeders that operate on the basis of the Coriolis
principle (MULTICOR®) or the principle of inertia (MULTISTREAM®)
DISOCONT, MULTICOR and MULTISTREAM are registered trademarks of

Schenck Process GmbH, Darmstadt.

General Diagram
3.2 Some Definitions

The following table shows a list of basic definitions.
Abbreviation Meaning Explanation Dimension Example
I Actual feed rate Material quantity per unit of time Weight/Time kg/h, t/h
I0 Maximum Flow Rate Io Maximum gravimetric feed rate the scales has Weight/Time kg/h
been designed for. Defined in the P03.02
parameter.
P Feed rate setpoint The preset feed rate that the actual value is Weight/Time kg/h, t/h
controlled against.
Z Totalized amount of The material quantity conveyed calculated Weight kg, t

material from the integral of the feed rate over the feed
time.
Q Measuring load Force generated by deflecting the bulk solids. Mass with the kg
same force of
weight
Y Controller actuating Conveyor element setpoint Amperage mA

variable
Xd Deviation The difference between the setpoint and the Percent %

actual value with reference to the rated value
Tab. 1 : Definition for formula symbols
The abbreviations for input and output channels for use in parameterization can be found in chapter Abbre-
viations.

General Diagram
3.3 Measuring principle

A free flowing stream of bulk solids is diverted in its direction with a solids flow meter. The force required for
diverting is measured and is a measure of the feed rate.
The amount of force is calculated from the theorem of conservation of momentum in physics where the bulk
solids' angle of entry and exit as well as the entry and exit velocity are applied.
The type of diversion and the way the force is recorded depend on the equipment's design type. Here are
two examples:
Fig. 2: The MULTISTREAM measuring principle
Depending upon the type of construction, various installation conditions should be observed that can be
found in any manual of mechanics.
With feed units the measured mass flow (≜ actual feed rate I) in the control electronics is additionally com-
pared with a preset setpoint P and the PF feeder is controlled so that I = P.
3.4 Automatic control

The weighing electronics equipment can control the material feed into the measuring equipment provided
that the regulation has been activated per parameter P03.01. The controller is turned off with pure measuring
systems.
Principle
The setpoint and actual feed rate are compared and the difference is fed to a controller. This changes the
feed rate of the PF material feeder until the actual value is equal to the setpoint.
Material feeder
Speed-regulated PF feeders (such as feed screws and starfeeders) require an external power stage. An
external position controller or a switching mechanism for the OPEN and CLOSE directions is needed with
position-controlled feeders (such as flow gates). The equipment supplies the control signal either proportion-
al to the desired volumetric flow or the control commands for opening and closing a motor position-controlled
feeder.

General Diagram
3.5 Control operating modes

The controller can be operated in various modes if the flow rate is regulated by the control. The controller is
turned off per parameter P03.01 Control with pure measuring systems.
The feed unit can be operated in the following modes of operation.

▪ Gravimetric Operation (regulated)
The actual feed rate is regulated to the preset specified feed rate. The maximum possible setpoint corre-
sponds to the value Maximum Flow Rate Io (P03.02). An event message is generated if the input value is
too large.
▪ Volumetric Operation (unregulated)
The conveyor element is set proportional to the feed rate setpoint. Measurement of the actual feed rate
has no effect on the conveyor element adjustment. Under nominal conditions the feed rate approximately
corresponds to the preset specified value.
This setpoint is limited to a value three times that of the nominal feed rate. An event message will be
generated if this limit is exceeded.
▪ Volumetric Synchronous Operation (unregulated)
This mode of operation is a special form of volumetric operation. It ensures a seamless transition when
switching from gravimetric to volumetric operation.
3.6 Batching
In batch mode a preset quantity of material is discharged and the feeding is subsequently switched off. Once
the batch setpoint has been reached the batch operation is complete. A subsequent start command to the
feeder will begin a new charge.
Batch filling can be carried out in all modes and variants of operation.
The general procedure for batch operation is shown in the following figure:
Fig. 3: Feeding
The segments shown in the figure mean the following:

0: Start the batch with a preset batch setpoint in units of weight.
1: Interrupt batch operation by switching off the discharge element.
2: Resume the interrupted batch by switching on the feeder.
3: Automatic reduction of the flow rate towards the end of the batch.
4: End automatically once the predetermined batch quantity has been reached.

- 10 - Schenck Process Group
General Diagram
3.7 Additional Bin Weighers

DISOCONT Tersus can also capture the weight of a bin (called additional containers for the sake of simplifi-
cation). This bin can also be used for controlling and correcting continuous measurement.
This additional bin weigher operates completely independently of the continuous scales. It is used to display
the hopper weight, register and monitor threshold levels and regulate the fill level.
It is often used to record the weight of the bin that is upstream of the continuous measuring or feeding unit in
the route.
The bin weigher is switched on by parameter P22.01 Bin Weigher Active = YES.

Schenck Process Group - 11 -
Operation
4 Operation
The DISOCONT Tersus and an attached feed scale be operated in one of several ways:
▪ Normal Operation:
– Operation by means of a local control unit VHM (or several). The features of the different versions
of the control unit can be found in system manual BV-H2406.
The screens with operating dialogs are also available via the web interface for a browser.
– Operation by means of a higher-order system control, with which the control commands are either
communicated conventionally by means of binary and analog signals or by means of a fieldbus (e.g.
PROFIBUS).
▪ Operation for service work:
– Operation by means of a VHM operator panel with a wireless connection
– Operation using the software tool EasyServe on a PC/notebook with a cable or wireless access
– Local operation by means of an optional service operating level and the VLG/VMO operating units
specifically for work on mechanical components. The special characteristics of this operating unit can
be found in the system manual BV-H2406.
4.1 Behavior after Connecting the Power

Once the power has been connected the control unit VCU of the DISOCONT Tersus starts up automatically
and begins with a self-test. The system states are indicated by LEDs on the device. The meaning of the indi-
cators can be found in system manual BV-H2406.
Once power is switched on, an (optionally-connected) VHM operator panel starts up with a display test. Sub-
sequently it will establish communication to the most recent VCU to which it was connected before power
was switched off.
The device version number is then displayed for several seconds and is then replaced by the application-
dependent scales control screen 'HOME'.
Notes:
▪ The following are retained during a power failure:
– Parameter settings
– Setpoints
– Status of all internal counters
– Counting pulses not yet output to external counters
– Date and time
– All important process values
▪ A specific start command is always required to begin feeding.
4.2 Operating and Control Access

The DISCONT Tersus can be operated by the following means, although not all of the options listed are
usually implemented in one and the same system:

Operation
Operating source Normal Operation for User interface

Operation service work Model
VHM operator panel X X Touch screen

(permanently installed)
VHM operator panel X Touch screen

(mobile per cable or wireless)
VMO local operator panel for drive x X Membrane keyboard and display
('service operator panel')
NOTE: not supported by VBC software
System host computer via fieldbus X (X) Plant host computer
Web browser via PC X VHM with PC keyboard
Service tool X EasyServe
Tab. 2 : Operating access
▪ Feeding can be started using the operator panel. The drives will be started and material can
flow. Before turning it on the operator must ensure that doing so cannot result in any dam-
age.
▪ Dangerous conditions may arise if communications are interrupted when operating via a
non-permanent line (pluggable cable, wireless). Therefore such methods of control should
be reserved for service work only.
4.2.1 Connecting an operating panel (VHM) with a scale controller (VCU)

After a loss of power at the operator panel the panel will try automatically to reconnect to the scales with
which it was communicating before the power failure after a settable period of time. During this time a differ-
ent scales can be selected by again calling up the Feeder operating page using the [Feeder] button.
If a connection has been established and you wish to activate communication with a different scales you
must first end the existing connection. This can be done after logging on as a user with privileged access
using the [Sel. Scale] key.
An error message will be displayed on the screen if a connection is lost. The operator panel will return to its
configuration dialog if this connection cannot be re-established even after several attempts.
The procedure for selecting scales depends on the communication medium and is described in the following
chapters.
4.2.1.1 Connection via Ethernet
Conditions: VHM operator panel and VCU control unit must be connected to the same Ether-
net subnet. The hardware requirements are described in the BV-H2406 system
manual.
The channel 'Ethernet' must be selected in the operator panel configuration dia-
log.

Operation
Once the first connection has been made, the operator panel will search the network for VCU control units
and shows its findings on the Feeder operating page. The button (key) for a displayed scale is used to select
that scales and establish communication.
4.2.1.2 Connection via Bluetooth
Conditions: A Bluetooth adapter must be connected to both the VHM operator panel and the
VCU control unit. The scale must be within transmission range. The hardware
requirements are described in the BV-H2406 system manual.
The channel 'Bluetooth' must be selected in the operator panel configuration dia-
log.
Once the communication path has been selected, the operator panel will search for Bluetooth adapters with-
in range. Other Bluetooth adapters can be found and displayed along with controllers (VCU). The results are
shown on the 'Feeder' operating page.
A complete search for Bluetooth adapters can take several seconds. A progress indicator is dis-
played during the search. It also shows Bluetooth adapters to which no connection can be made
because either they are not DISOCONT Tersus controllers or they already have a different data
connection.
The scale is selected and the data connection established using the button for that scale. This also may take
several seconds. During this time the status of the connection will be displayed in the header.
A connection can be established to a scale only if the scales is not already connected to another
Bluetooth adapter. It may be necessary to end the other connection first. The operating panel
continuously will attempt to establish a connection if there is already another connection.
Bluetooth can be used to communicate only with the scale to whose Bluetooth adapter a connection has
been established. The Ethernet target address may not be altered in the VHM operator panel.
4.2.1.3 Connection via RS485
Conditions: VHM operator panel and VCU control unit must be connected to the same RS485
network. The hardware requirements are described in the BV-H2406 system
manual.
The RS485 channel has to be selected in the configuration of the operating panel.
Subsequently the operator panel will ask on the Feeder operating page for the address with which it is to
communicate. The respective address is set in the VCU in parameters P01.11 VHM RS485 Address. Ensure
that each address occurs only once at the databus.
The system performs a check of the communication path once the address has been entered. A green
marker beside the address number indicates whether communication can be established at the address
entered. Otherwise the marker will be red.
Communication with the scale can be established with the key [Con.Scale].
Note: The operator panel is the master at the bus. Therefore only one operator panel may be con-
nected to the bus at any one time.

Operation
4.2.2 Connecting EasyServe (PC) with the scales controller (VCU)
4.2.2.1 Connection via Ethernet

It is preferable to use Ethernet if the connection is established by cable.
Condition: The PC with the service tool EasyServe is connected to the scale's network with
an Ethernet cable.
Either use a non-coded socket of the VCU for this connection or a special cable
(yellow) when using the red-coded socket.
The EasyServe address must be in the same Ethernet subnet as the address of the scale. If necessary you
can adapt the address in the EasyServe scanner dialog. A scale can also be addressed using a router if the
network has already been configured. Then the address of the scale is entered manually and not using the
scanner dialog. In this case the PC must have an IP address in the subnet to which it is directly connected.
The easiest way to make a selection is with the EasyServe menu item 'Connection | Ethernet (Scanner)'.
This shows all of the scales available in the network. The connection parameters of the scale can be
adapted here and a connection established to the scales.
If the scale is connected to a different subnet the selection is made manually using menu item
'Connection | Ethernet (manually) ...' and entering the IP address of the scale.
Note: The scale will only allow one connection to EasyServe at any one time. A second request via
Ethernet will be rejected. Do not make a parallel request via RS232.
4.2.2.2 Connection via Wireless LAN

The best way to establish a wireless PC connection to a scale is by using Wireless LAN.
Conditions: The scale is connected to a Wireless LAN modem via Ethernet. The Wireless
LAN modem has been configured as an access point. Its Ethernet address is in
the same subnet as the addresses of the scale. The PC also has a Wireless LAN
modem. The IP address of the PC is in the same subnet as that of the scale.
In general the Wireless LAN modem is configured before use via browser. This configuration is described in
the modem's user manual.
The Wireless LAN at the PC is activated and the Wireless LAN Access Point selected using the usual meth-
ods. Once a connection has been established to the Access Point all of the functions can be implemented at
the PC as they would via an Ethernet cable connection.
4.2.2.3 Connection via Bluetooth

It is more time-consuming to establish a connection via Bluetooth than by Wireless LAN. The only scale that
can be accessed is the one to whose Bluetooth adapter the connection was established.
Condition: Scale and PC are equipped with Bluetooth adapters.

Operation
Establishing a connection:
1. Start the Bluetooth adapter configuration program in the PC.
2. Select the desired scale from the list of adapters displayed.
Note: If the name in the scale was changed you will need to restart the PC in order to display the
changed name.
3. Begin establishing a connection with the Bluetooth adapter. Password: 7353
4. The PC user must enter a Personal Area Network (PAN) once the connection to the Bluetooth adapter
has been established.
5. If the connection is made by cable the scale will have the IP address set in the respective parameter, e.g.
192.168.240.30. i.e. it will have the subnet address 192.168.240 and within that the address 30.
If the connection is made by Bluetooth the scale will have a different address, in this example the ad-
dress 192.168.239.30. The subnet address is therefore 1 lower than the address set in the parameter.
6. Now the scale can be selected using the scanner or by direct address input. Other scales in the network
cannot be addressed.
4.2.2.4 Connection via RS232

The RS232 interface is used to make a connection in special cases only, e.g. when no connection can be
made via Ethernet. If there is a power failure at a device while software is being loaded it may be necessary
to establish a connection via RS232 to re-load the software.
Condition: The serial interface (COM) of the PC is connected to socket X97 of the VCU by
cable. For details see system manual BV-H2406.
Use EasyServe menu item 'Connection | Serial' to make a connection.
Only 38400 Baud, 8-N-1 is permissible as the transmission format. Select the COM port available at the PC
and the address of the scale. The address is stored in parameter P17.01 Own Address of the scale.
Notes: ▪ A software update via RS232 interface can take up to 20 minutes. Other functions run
slower than if the connection were made via Ethernet.
▪ Simultaneous EasyServe access via Ethernet and RS232 is not permissible and can gen-
erate erroneous data.
4.2.3 Connecting the web browser (PC) with the scales controller (VCU)
The scales controller is equipped with a web server that provides an operating interface using a browser
program. The user interface in the browser corresponds largely to the display on the VHM operator panel.
The option of selecting a different scales and the configuration dialogs for the operator panel itself are the
only functions is does not provide. The keyboard and mouse are used for operation so that the input key-
board is not shown on the screen.
The mode of operation is intended for service work only.
Conditions:
▪ The PC is connected to the VCU via Ethernet.

Operation
▪ Java™ Platform SE 7 *) or higher has been installed on the PC

*)
Temporary file storage may not be activated in Java settings since this can cause erroneous status
messages.
Ways to Establish a Connection:

▪ Directly from within the browser program:
– Start any browser program and enter the IP address of the VCU into the address line (e. g.
http://192.168.240.1)
▪ Browser program via the service tool EasyServe:
– If a connection to the scale has not yet been established: Call up
menu item Connection and Ethernet (Scanner) or execute Ethernet (manually) ...
– Execute menu item 'Tools | Start | Browse Controller' or press function key [F8]
→ the standard browser program will be started.
The web server homepage will then open; it first will show only a navigation bar (available in English only):
The following image shows the general structure of the navigation bar. Its contents depend on
the scales type and may differ slightly from scales to scales.
You can access various data lists and information about the scale controls via the call-up of special functions
of the rubrics 'Log Files', 'Internal Trend Files', 'Identification & Maintenance' und 'Fieldbus Configura-
tion'. More information is contained in the table at the end of this section.

Operation
Call-up Scales Control Screen

The entries in the HMI column open the user interface for the scales control system in different scaling.
A warning regarding a missing certificate may appear depending on the Java version in-
stalled on the PC. In this case, the link under 'Install Certificate' must be clicked upon. This
will open a dialog in which the certificate can be installed on the PC from the 'Trusted Root
Certification Authorities' section.
After successfully creating the connection, you can also see the scales' user interface with activated 'HOME'
control screen in additional to the navigation bar:
See Available Data Lists

The functions available in the individual rubrics depend on the scales type.
Function Purpose
Events Most recent stored events (alarms, warnings, etc.)

Refer to section ›Displaying the most recent events and errors‹
Parameter changes Memory of the most recent changes in parameters

Refer to section ›Display the Most Recent Parameter Alterations.‹

Operation
Function Purpose
Command log Stores a list of certain commands, e.g. start/stop

Refer to section ›Displaying the most recent events and errors‹
Totalizer hourly The table of totalizing integrators/counters saved every hour. The
values are also available at the VHM operator panel.
The minute when data is saved is set after the full hour in Hourly Total Time.
Totalizer daily The table of totalizing integrators/counters saved every day

The time at which the save was performed from 00:00 h onwards is set in Daily Total
Time.
Totalizer Table of totalizing integrators/counters saved at the command
DataLogger 1 Table of the measured values recorded. The sampling interval can be set using
DataLogger 2 P31.03. As many as 10 process variables can be recorded and they are selected
using P31.04 ⋯ P31.13. Recording begins when the [Mode] button on the operating
page is activated.
If one memory area is full, recording will continue in a different memory area once
any contents of that memory area are deleted.
Refer to section ›Begin Data Logging‹
Identification & maintenance Information on the versions of built-in printed circuit boards and software installed
Information on the interfaces used
Fieldbus configuration Files for configuring the fieldbus connection in the system host computer (GSD and
EDS, etc.)
Tab. 3 : Data lists and information from the scale control system
The memory depth of the data lists is at least 500 entries per recording memory zone in DataLogger 1000.
All entries are made with an entry time stamp. The entries in the tables are updated only when they are
called up. The values can be exported into a PC file for analysis with standard programs using select-copy-
paste.
4.3 VHM Operator Panel (optional)

The DISOCONT Tersus system may also be equipped with an optional VHM operator panel with a touch
screen. The buttons (keys) displayed are dynamic buttons that change depending on the status of the sys-
tem and are directly pressed on the screen. A touch pen or other object with a small contact area (stylus)
such as a finger or glove can be used.
The following figure shows the structure of the user interface (display and operating areas) when it is in
communication with a VCU control unit.

Operation
Fig. 4: VHM operator panel: user interface layout
1 Header (e.g. for name of the device being con- 5 Select details and operating keys
trolled)
2 Event messages 6 Process and measured Values, graphics
3 Select operating page 7 Command and edit keys
4 ON/OFF keys 8 Symbol indicating running operation
The [HOME] key is used to select the start page for scale operation ('User Interface Homepage').
Notes:
VHM ⇎ VCU ▪ The operator panel will be in 'Configuration Mode' as long as there is NO connec-
tion to a scale (see section 'Configuring the VHM Operating Panel'). In this state the
'Select Operating Page' area (3) will display the keys [Feeder] to select a scale and
[Con. Scale] to connect to that scale.
Also refer to section ›Operating and Control Access‹.
▪ Communication with a scale must be interrupted if you wish to make adjustments to
the display such as brightness or adjusting the touch-sensitive screen. You can use
the [Sel. Scale] button to call up the adjustment dialogs for the operator panel.
4.3.1 Display and Operation Fields
4.3.1.1 Name of the Device

The name of the scale with which the operator panel currently is communicating is shown in the header (1).
The name is set as a parameter (P02.03) in the device.

Operation
4.3.1.2 Event Messages

The system performs various tests. An event will be identified if there are any deviations from normal operat-
ing conditions. Parameters are used to determine the reaction of the system to any such deviation. The
event appears in the field for event messages (2).
Example: IL06 (W1) Event: Not Ready for Start
The variables stand for the following:
IL06 Explicit, language-independent identifier for the event
W1 Class*) of the event
Event: Not Ready for Start Explanatory text
*)
Following event classes can appear:
Class System status Display
A ALARM: Serious error. Text against a red back-

Conveyor drives had to be switched off; ground.
This message must be acknowledged before it can be cleared and the Blinking: not acknowledged
drives restarted. Static: acknowledged
W1 WARNING 1: Irregular operation. Text against a yellow back-

This could indicate a serious error. ground.
The event did not stop material conveying. Acknowledge the message to Blinking: not acknowledged
clear it.
Static: acknowledged
W2 WARNING 2: Irregular operation.
This could indicate a serious error.
The event did not stop material conveying. The message will be cleared
automatically once the event is no longer pending.
4.3.1.3 Selecting an Operating Page

The keys in the 'Select Operating Page' area (3) offer the following:
Button Operating page/function User
[HOME] Homepage for scale operation; operation and display for System operating personnel
normal operation
[Trend] Shows the transient behavior of process signals System operating personnel
Service personnel
[Values] Process and measured values System operating personnel

Service personnel
[Setup] Special displays and operation for setup, diagnostics and Service personnel
service
[Login] Access for privileged operation Service personnel
[Help] Displays program versions; System operating personnel

Cleaning the monitor display Service personnel
[Sel. Scale] Connect to a different scale Service personnel

Operation
Some functions are not available to users without access privileges. Furthermore, access to
some functions can be blocked by parameter.
4.3.1.4 On/Off Operation

The feeder drive can be switched on and off with these keys (4) if permitted by the mode of operation and
the parameterization.
WARNING
A switch-on command sets the motors in motion!
There is the danger of injury if persons are in the area of the drives. Bulk
solids can be transported and cover the following equipment.
The switch-off command is not an emergency-off, but rather is normal oper-
ational shutdown.
4.3.1.5 Detail Selection

These keys (5) are used to select the mode of viewing an operating page. The often-used [Quit] key for ac-
knowledging event messages is available in most display modes. Depending on the current operating page
the arrow keys [➨] can be used to display further information.
The key assignment depends on the current operating page. Access to individual functions can be limited
when setting up the system to privileged user groups.
4.3.1.6 Values and Graphics

Depending on the operating page selected, the current process and measured values, identifiers for the op-
erating status and graphical representations of the mechanics and the signals are shown here (6).
Input fields, e.g. for a setpoint or parameter value, are shown 'recessed'.
4.3.1.7 Command and Edit Keys

Further keys for special functions may be visible in this area (7). They vary from page to page and depend-
ing on the detailed information selected. The function of these keys is described in the respective function
section.
4.3.1.8 Symbol for Running Operation

The run icon (8) in the top left corner shows the status of the main drive. A rotating rectangle will be dis-
played when device is switched on. This symbol is visible in all views.

Operation
4.3.2 Operating Fields and Function Calls

The following table lists the location of the most important displays and operating functions.
Work area Detail selec- Function Display and operation

tion
HOME Initial screen Normal operation for continuous feeding or batching. Input of the setpoint feed rate and
batch setpoint, if necessary.
Mode Rate Control Switch between gravimetric and volumetric operation.

Chuyển đổi giữa hoạt động trọng lực và thể tích.
Batching Only if batch operation is activated by parameter: select and de-

select batch operation.
Discharge Select and deselect discharge operation for the feed hopper.
Chọn và bỏ chọn thao tác xả cho phễu nạp.
Filling Start and stop manual filling of the feed hopper.
Data Logging Start and end logging of process data. Clear the memory.
Keyboard Mode Select and deselect keyboard mode.

Caution: under certain circumstances system control com-
mands may no longer work in keyboard mode.
Select Material Select the material-dependent data set that corresponds to the
bulk material used
Batching Only if batch mode is selected: display for batch operation. Input the batch setpoint.
Totals Display of the totalizing integrators. Reset the measured amount.
Ack Event Acknowledges identified events.

Caution: the cause of the event must be corrected before the event is acknowl-
edged.
Trend Initial screen Shows the transient behavior of the configured signal. The keys <<, <, >, >>, Z - and Z
+ are used to select the section to be displayed.
Settings Configuration of the running signals to be displayed as per separate specifications.
Values Act. Values Tabular display of selected measured values. The values are selected by parameter.
Total Log Shows a list of the counter readings logged either hourly or daily. The counter readings
can also be read via the web server.
Logbook Shows the logged events and operating commands.
Param Log Shows the logged parameter changes.
Totals Shows the current state of the totalizing counter. Counters 1 and 2 can be reset with
the Reset keys

Operation
Work area Detail selec- Function Display and operation

tion
Setup Initial screen Parallel display of two selectable process values.
Parameter Selection Displays a selection of parameters.

For privileged users: change the parameter values.
All Read access for all parameters.

For privileged users: change the parameter values. A description
of the operation can be found in a separate section.
Calibration For privileged users: open and operate the system setup and control programs as per
separate specifications.
Set Time Displays the time. Events are logged with the time of occurrence.
For privileged users: set the time.
Custom For privileged users: load the application-specific parameter set.
Factory For privileged users: load the parameter set with the factory settings.
Simulation For privileged users: start simulation of the external circuit for test run.
Login For privileged users: login to and logoff from the control. Permit access to configuration. The default
password can be found in the description of the parameters for P02.12 and P02.13.
Logout
Help Initial screen Displays the controller and operator panel program versions.
Clean: Deactivates the touchscreen for cleaning purposes. Normal mode will be returned to in
20 s.
Sel. Scale Exit the current screen showing the currently connected scales and establish a data connection to a
different scales. Thoát khỏi màn hình hiện tại hiển thị các thang đo hiện được kết nối và thiết lập
kết nối dữ liệu tới các thang đo khác
Tab. 4 : Work areas and functions
NOTE: Certain functions are available only to privileged users. The specific user must log on using the key-
word-protected function 'Login' in order to access them. The keyword entered is compared with a variable
key (P02.12 and P02.13) stored in the controller.
Protected functions will show up gray for non-privileged users.
4.3.3 Authorization for Control Commands

There are many ways to restrict the entry of control commands to certain users only. The system supports
setting special conditions using a range of methods.
4.3.3.1 Modes of Operation: Normal Operation and Keyboard Operation

The scales are usually operated in normal operation during production. The input points (control sources)
for the operational use in normal operation are specified by parameters. The scales can be turned on and
setpoints altered from these sources only.

Operation
Parameters Name and signal
P04.01 Feeder Start
P04.02 Feedrate Setpoint
P15.02 Batch Setpoint Source
Tab. 5 : Source parameters that have an effect in normal operation
Sources for operation under normal conditions can be set for entry at the scales operating panel during
service work. This mode is called keyboard mode. The VHM operating panel and the analog operating
software that can be started via a web browser from the scales control homepage are considered to be op-
erating panels. In keyboard mode, the controls can also be activated via the service tool EasyServe.
4.3.3.2 Restrictions for Operating Panel with Ethernet Connection and Connection Moni-
toring
The system can be configured so that normal operation is accessible only to devices with IP addresses that
have been specified by parameters. The corresponding parameters can be found in the parameter group
'Dialog Behaviour' (P02.04 … P02.10).
Operation via the service tool EasyServe is not affected by the parameter setting.
The connection to the operating devices with specified addresses can be monitored so that the scales can
be returned to a safe state in case of a malfunction.
4.3.3.3 Access to Special Functions

Parameters can be used to restrict access to special functions. The following alternatives can be selected by
these parameters grouped according to control command:
'active' Command not restricted. This command is always available on the scale operat-
ing panel.
'not active' This command is never allowed. The key for it is not shown on the operating
panel so that the command cannot be executed.
'Password' This command is accessible only after logging on with password 1. Password 1
is variable and can be changed using P02.12.
This password is primarily intended for service access. This password is always
used for basic system settings.
'2nd Password' This command is accessible only after logging on with password 2. Password 2
is variable and can be changed using P02.13.
Parameters for setting access rights can be found in parameter group Dialog Behaviour. If the user has not
logged on with enough privileges for the function desired, the operating button appears as non-active (grey)
with a star in the lower right-hand corner.
The operating company is responsible for ensuring that passwords are only known to the personnel who are
supposed to receive authorization for their control command. The control functions are released once the
user has used the [Login] key to log on and enter the password. The privileged user should log off from the

Operation
system using the pushbutton [Logout] after the end of the work. The unit returns by itself into the non-
privileged operating mode after the time set on the operating panel (refer to chapter »Setting the Display
[➙42]«) .
However, the control commands can always be executed via the service tool EasyServe re-
gardless of the parameter settings.
4.3.4 Basic Operating Functions

This section describes functions for normal operation.
The access to some operating functions may be restricted during device setup. They then either are no
longer accessible or are password protected. This section describes the complete and unrestricted scope of
operation.
4.3.4.1 Switch Feeding On/Off
Turning on Feeding
▪ Condition:
– No event message of the 'Alarm' class may be pending.
– The all-clear must be given by discharging devices, in as far as any are connected. Event 'IL01Event:
Run Disabled' will be registered if no all-clear is given.
– The VHM operator panel must be cleared for switching ON. This applies to keyboard operation, how-
ever in normal operation this applies only if the operator panel has been selected as the source of
operation (parameter P04.01 Feeder Start = 'OP').
▪ Switching feeding on:
– Press the [ON] key
▪ Display during running feed:
– Running arrow in the graphical display.
– ON appears in the graphical display.
– A moving symbol appears in the upper left border.
Switching feeding off

▪ Switching feeding off:
– Press the [OFF] key
The scale will be switched off. Feed rate measurement will cease after the time set in parame-
ter P06.02 has elapsed.
▪ Display when feed stopped:
– OFF appears in the graphical display.
– Moving displays are turned off.

Operation
4.3.4.2 Set setpoint

Condition
▪ OP Mode has been selected
or
▪ Normal Mode has been selected and P04.02 Feedrate Setpoint = 'OP'
Entering the Setpoint

1. Call up the 'HOME' operating page
Note: The current setpoint will be displayed in an entry field if it can be altered.
2. Touching the entry field → The current setpoint will appear together with its unit of measurement and a
numerical keypad beneath it.
3. Enter the new value
Note: you do not need to clear the entry field using the [C] key before entering the new value or use the
arrow keys to move to the entry field. Entering a new number automatically will clear the entry field.
4. Confirm entry by pressing [OK] or exit by pressing [EXIT].
HINT
Limiting the entry
The setpoint is limited to the nominal feed rate in P03.02 in gravimetric op-
eration and to the threefold value of the nominal value in volumetric opera-
tion.
4.3.4.3 Relative Setpoint

With the relative setpoint Pr, an externally set setpoint Pe can be expressed as a percent. This function is
used to enter a portion of additives, with the command variable being measured.
Operation: P04.07 Source Relative Setpoint = 'AI' or 'OP'
The effective setpoint for the control is calculated using the following formula:
P = Pe × Pr / 100 % P = effective setpoint

Pe = external setpoint
Pr = relative setpoint
It is entered the same way as an absolute setpoint (see »Set setpoint [➙28]«).
HINT
Limiting the entry
The setpoint is limited to the nominal feed rate in P03.02 in gravimetric op-
eration and to the threefold value of the nominal value in volumetric opera-
tion.

Operation
4.3.4.4 Resetting (zero setting) the totalizing counter

The DISOCONT Tersus has three totalizing counters that sum up the measured quantity of bulk solids. Of
these, counters 1 and 2 can be reset but not counter 3. The counters do not have an overflow.
How to reset a totalizing counter

Condition: the function has been cleared for use by the operator by means of parameter (P02.14 and
P02.15). If the reset has not been cleared the respective key will be shown in gray.
Sequence:
▪ Select the [Values] operating page and then press the [Totals] key. The states of counters 1 to 3 will be
shown in the display window with the keys [01: Reset] and [02: Reset] for resetting counters 1 and 2 be-
neath them.
▪ The dialog box 'Reset totalizer #1' will appear after pressing the respective key for counter 1. You can
clear the counter with [Reset] and abort the function with [Back].
HINT
Other ways to reset the counters
The system can also be configured to allow the counters to be reset by
means of an electrical signal. It is still possible to reset the counters from
the system host computer via the fieldbus interface. All reset commands
function independent of one another.
4.3.4.5 Acknowledging Event Messages

All of the important functions are monitored. If an error occurs an event message will be generated, which
will be shown in the event field (2). If several events occur the event with the highest priority will be dis-
played.
The order of the priorities is: Alarm (A), Warning 1 (W1), Warning 2 (W2).
Display earlier events

To display earlier events select the [Values] operating page and then press the [Logbook] or
[Event Log Values]key. Events are listed in the upper half of the display area (6). Earlier events
can be called up using the navigation keys [↸][⇧ ][⇩ ].
The list of events can also be viewed via web server and can be exported for an external evalu-
ation.
How to Acknowledge an Event Message
DANGER
Event messages indicate unusual and/or dangerous states.
For reasons of safety, the causes of any errors must be corrected before an
event message is acknowledged.

Operation
To acknowledge an event message press the [Ack Event] key, available on many screens e.g. on 'HOME'.
Once acknowledged, any blinking messages continuously will be displayed. When the cause of the error has
been corrected the event will be cleared from the message line but can be displayed again using [Logbook]
or [Event Log Values].
A troubleshooting list can be found in chapter Event Messages.
4.3.4.6 Displaying Selected Values

Up to 10 selected values can be displayed at the push of a button for quick information.
Condition:
The IDs of the parameters to be displayed have to be entered into the parameters of the block Configuration
HMI Values:
P32.01 HMI Value 01
to
P32.10 HMI Value 10
Procedure for displaying the values table

Call up the 'Values' operating page → The table is displayed directly.
If other information is already displayed on the control screen ' Values', the values table can be
displayed at any time using the key [Act. Values].
4.3.4.7 Storing Counter States

The states of the totalizing counters can be stored to a file. Its content can be viewed via the web interface
(see section ›The web server in the scales controller (VCU)‹).
How to store
Condition: - none –
Sequence:
▪ Select the [Values] operating page and then press the [Totals] key. The states of counters 1 to 3 will be
shown in the display window.
▪ The respective dialog box will appear after you press the key [Totalizer in File]. You can store the file with
the [Print] key and end the function without storing with [Cancel].
4.3.5 Special Operating Functions

This section describes functions for normal operation used in special cases. If not otherwise displayed it will
be assumed that the 'HOME' operating page already has been selected (see section »Selecting an Operat-
ing Page [➙22]«).

Operation
4.3.5.1 Trend
The trend is a graphical depiction on the VHM operator panel of the course of process values over time. The
trend function in the VHM is intended to offer permanent and simple trend depiction.
TIP: Trend depiction with EasyServe

The options available with the service tool EasyServe make it much easier to configure
trend depictions and to export measuring data.
NOTE: Trend configuration, trend depiction and stored values from previous weighings will
be deleted if the operator panel suffers a power failure or if it connects to a different scale.
Trend display
Call up the [Trend] operating page (3). Any trend curves already configured will be displayed, otherwise the
window ('Grid') will be empty. Below it you will see the following keys:
Button Function
[<<] Open older values into the display window, large increments
[<] Open older values into the display window, small increments
[>] Open more recent values into the display window, small increments
[>>] Open more recent values into the display window, large increments
[Z - ] Increase time period shown
[Z + ] Decrease time period shown
[Settings] Enter the configuration dialog (see below)
Tab. 6 : Control keys
Configuring the trend display

To modify an existing trend curve or to configure a new one, press the [ Settings] key to call up the configura-
tion dialog:

Operation
Fig. 5: Trend configuration
1 List Active Trend Values 4 Process value attributes:

Entry and display
2 [Remove] key: remove the highlighted process 5 [Update] key: apply new setting/modification
value (trend curve) from the list
3 [Add] key: add the new process value (trend 6 [Back] key: confirm and exit the configuration
curve) to the list dialog
The list Active Trend Values (1) shows the process values currently selected for the trend display. This list
will be empty when called up for the first time.
Use the mouse to select a value from the list (1) to configure the display.
The following will be displayed for this value:
▪ The code number (ID)
▪ the limit values
▪ the color of the curve
Clicking the respective fields will open the corresponding adjustment dialog box.
Apply the modified settings with the [Update] key (5).
You can remove a value from the list (1) with the [Remove] key (2).
You can configure a new trend curve with the [Add] key (3).
The characteristic value of the process variable (ID) and the attributes of the curve are entered in line 4. Ap-
ply the settings with the [Add] (3) and [Back] (6) keys.
The new process value will now appear in the list (1).
Display the trend by confirming with the [Back] key (6).
Often-used IDs can be found in the following table. The complete list of all available IDs can be found in the
manual BV-H2448.
Process value ID Process variable Dimension
1872 Measured actual feed rate kg/h
1874 Totalizing counter 1 kg
1876 Totalizing counter 2 kg

Operation
Process value ID Process variable Dimension
1890 Surge hopper fill level kg
1894 Effective setpoint kg/h
1904 Deviation % of rated capacity
Tab. 7 : Meaning of the identifier (ID)
4.3.5.2 Keyboard operation

You can use the Keyboard mode function place the preselected operating sources for switching on/off, for
specifying the setpoint source and setpoint entry onto the keyboard of the VHM operator panel. The previous
sources will take effect if keyboard mode is deactivated. As operation using the service tool EasyServe cor-
responds to keyboard operation, this setting also affects operation via EasyServe.
The ON/OFF status of the scale, and the setpoint are kept when switching to keyboard from an
external source (e.g. serial fieldbus). The external signals apply when switching in the opposite
direction.
Switching Keyboard Mode On
OBSERVE
Machines can be started up from keyboard mode!
Keyboard mode is intended for test tasks only, it therefore is possible that
any plant control locking mechanisms may be deactivated.
1. Use password protection in order to avoid an unintended deactivation of

locking mechanisms.
Beginning on the scales operating page 'HOME' call up the operating page Set Mode using the [Mode] (5)
key and press the [➨] key to go to the second page. In the column Current Mode the current mode of opera-
tion will be shown beside the [Keyboard mode] key (Normal Mode or Keyboard Mode).
After pressing the [Keyboard mode] key a dialog box of the same name together with the keys [ON] and
[OFF] and beneath it the current mode of operation. Depending on this, you can now switch the keyboard
mode ON or OFF.
Display
The mode of operation selected has the following effects on the graphical display ' HOME':
Keys [ON] and [OFF] (4) and entry field Setpoint (6):
OP Mode always visible luôn luôn nhìn thấy
Normal Mode visible only when the operator panel has been selected as the operating source (parameter
P04.01 Feeder Start = 'OP') chỉ hiển thị khi bảng vận hành đã được chọn làm nguồn vận
hành (parameter P04.01 Feeder Start = 'OP')

Operation
4.3.5.3 VHM/Scale System Information and Cleaning the Screen
Information on the system

Press the [Help] key.
A window will open containing information on the software version and basic operator panel ' VHM' and scale
controller settings 'Scale' (VCU).
These data and if possible the EasyServe parameter file should be kept at hand if making an inquiry to
Schenck Process.
The serial number of the VCU control unit also appears in the EasyServe scanner. It can be used to identify
the VCU in the network if erroneous, non-unique IP addresses have been assigned.
'FCB Variant:' is the designation for the loaded variant of the function block links. 'FCB Variant: Empty' refers
to the state with no expanded functions, which is the state described in this manual.
Cleaning the screen

Press the [Clean:] key
The operator panel will switch into cleaning mode for a short time. The touch screen is deactivated during
this time, allowing it to be cleaned without making an inadvertent entry.
Follow the cleaning instructions!

'Clear screen with cleaning tissue until counter expired'
No acidic or strongly abrasive cleaning agents may be used for cleaning.
The screen is white, allowing dead pixels to be spotted.

A progress indicator in the form of a counter appears that counts downwards from 20 to 0. The operator
panel will then return to normal mode and the touch screen will be reactivated.
4.3.5.4 Displaying the most recent events (errors)

The permanently visible field 'Event Messages' (2) always shows the event with the highest priority.
To display older events or events of lower priority select the [Values] operating page and there press the
[Event Log Values] key. Events are listed in the upper half of the display area (6).
Earlier events can be called up using the navigation keys [↸][⇧ ][⇩ ].
The list of events is also available in the web browser, from where it can be conveniently
displayed or downloaded for evaluation. This list cannot be erased. The memory retains
at least the previous 500 entries (assuming that that many entries have already been
made).
4.3.5.5 Display Stored Counter Readings

The readings of the totalizing counters can be stored cyclically. The stored values are available both at the
operator panel and in list form in the web browser.
Select the [Values] operating page and then press the [Total Log] key to display on the operator panel.

Operation
Individual entries in the display can be called up using the navigation keys [↸][⇧ ][⇩ ].
This list cannot be erased. The memory retains at least the previous 500 entries (assuming that
that many entries have already been made).
4.3.5.6 Display the Most Recent Parameter Alterations.

Select the [Values] operating page and then press the [Param Log] key to show changes to parameters. The
parameters are listed in the display area (6).
Earlier changed can be called up using the navigation keys [↸][⇧ ][⇩ ].
The list of parameter changes can be viewed via the navigation bar of the web browser
using the entry 'Parameter changes'.
This list cannot be erased. The memory retains at least the previous 500 entries (assum-
ing that that many entries have already been made).
4.3.5.7 Bin Weigher: Display and Operation

The measured values of the additional bin weigher are displayed on a separate screen. This can only be
displayed when the bin weigher is activated by P22.01 Bin Weigher Active = YES.
To call up display:
Select the scale [HOME] operating page and then confirm with the [Surge Bin] key.
You can not only see the current bin weight, but also the limits set per parameter.
The parameters can be adapted right on the screen if you login with sufficient privileges.
Parameter No. Meaning
Bin Level MAX P22.18 Upper threshold of the permissible fill level. Generates an event if exceeded.
Control Level MAX P22.13 Fill level at which the filling will be stopped.
Control Level MIN P22.12 Filling is started if the fill level falls below this threshold.
Bin Level MIN P22.15 Lower threshold of the permissible fill level. Generates an event if level falls
below this level.
Tab. 8 : Bin weigher parameters
Key Effect
Auto The filling is regulated automatically by means of the threshold values Control Level MIN
and Control Level MAX set.
Manual Hopper filling is controlled by the operator using the keys [Start] and [Stop]. For reasons of
safety filling is automatically stopped if the limit Control Level MAX is exceeded.
Start Begin filling the hopper.

Operation
Key Effect
Stop End filling the hopper.
Tab. 9 : Operating keys for controlling hopper fill level
Refer to the section >Adjustment Programs< for information on adjusting the bin weigher
4.3.6 Service Functions

The functions described here are as a rule used only for system setup, troubleshooting or to alter the control
properties.
Some functions are accessible only to privileged users who have logged onto the controller.
4.3.6.1 Display Parameter Alterations

Changes made to parameters are archived in the system. Press the 'Values' key followed by 'Param Log' to
display the stored values. Previous values can then be scrolled into the display with the arrow keys.
4.3.6.2 Reading and Setting Parameters

The scale control system software has been designed such that no programming knowledge is required to
adapt the system to local conditions. All properties are defined by parameters. The meaning of the parame-
ters can be found in the detailed description in chapter »Parameters«.
The parameters are structured in blocks to give a better overview. The parameter designation is composed
as follows:
Pxx.yy <Text> where xx = Number of the parameter block

yy = Number of the parameter within the block
<Text> = Explanatory name of the parameter (language-dependent)
In specific cases individual parameters or whole parameter blocks may be masked out to
highlight the parameters that are important to an application. Hidden parameters can only
be displayed via EasyServe and released there for display on the VHM operator panel if
necessary. Hiding parameters may cause gaps in the numbering. Some parameters can be
write-protected. The write protection also can be set using EasyServe.
NOTE: The following description applies to a visible and write unprotected parameter ac-
cessed by a user with sufficient user privileges.
Calling up the parameter dialog: Open [Setup] operating page and press the [Parameter] key
Selecting a parameter
A parameter block is selected and displayed in the upper part of the display area (6) and individual parame-
ters within that block are selected and displayed in the lower part. Selection is made using the [⇧ ] and [⇩ ]
keys (arrow keys).

Operation
A parameter may directly be selected using the button to the left of the arrow keys if the block and parameter
number are known.
The current value of the selected parameter will appear in the display area (7).
Modifying a parameter
The [Edit] key will open the dialog to alter the parameter selected. The parameter designation will appear in
the upper part of the display area (6) and its current value in the lower part. Depending on the type of pa-
rameter, you can use the arrow keys either to scroll a new value into the display or key in a value for it. A
modified value is written disk-resident into the parameter using the [Save] key. Alternatively the modification
can be discarded with the [Exit] or [Back] keys. In the latter case the old parameter value will remain un-
changed.
4.3.6.3 Setting the Clock

DISOCONT Tersus has a buffered real-time clock. If the system is powered down the clock will continue to
run for approximately one week provided that the system previously had been operating for at least
30 hours. The clock buffer is maintenance-free.
The time is recorded in the process value logs.
How to set the clock:

Open [Setup] operating page and press the [Set Time] key
The values 'Actual Date/Time' will appear in the upper part of the display area (6). The entry field 'Set Date
and Time' will appear in the lower half of the display area.
Tapping the entry field will open the touchscreen keyboard. Set the cursor in the input field either by touching
the desired position or using the [⇦] and [⇨] keys.
The [OK] key completes the input and modifies the time setting. Use the [Back] key to exit the dialog without
changing the clock.
4.3.6.4 Reset to Factory Settings

DISOCONT Tersus has three independent parameter sets:
Parameter set Use Load procedure at the operating panel
Active parameter set Set controller behavior Individual parameter values can be altered (see
>»Reading and Setting Parameters [➙36]«<).
Backup set Pre-prepared parameter set for Open the [Setup] operating page and use the [➨]
certain applications or settings key to go to the second dialog page:
after commissioning
The [Custom] key will begin completely overwriting
the active parameter set.

Operation
Parameter set Use Load procedure at the operating panel
Factory settings Unalterable set of parameters for Open the [Setup] operating page and use the [➨]
the basic configuration key to go to the second dialog page:
The [Factory] key will begin completely overwriting
the active parameter set.
Tab. 10 : Parameter sets: use and activation
WARNING
Irretrievable loss of modified parameters
Loading the backup parameter set or the factory settings will overwrite all of
the parameters in the active parameter set. The overwrite cannot be re-
versed. We recommend you use the service tool EasyServe to save a copy
of the current parameter set to the PC before overwriting.
4.3.6.5 Simulation Mode

DISOCONT Tersus enables you to simulate important process values for training and test purposes within
the framework of commissioning without needing assemblies to be started or all sensors to have been con-
nected. Load and speed readings are simulated internally.
WARNING
Output signals are set in simulation mode. This allows externally con-
nected motors to start. The system will indicate that bulk material is
flowing.
The starting motors may represent a hazard. The on-signal can release
assemblies upstream of the feeder even though the feeder may not be pre-
pared to receive the bulk material.
Selecting simulation mode:

▪ Open the [Setup] operating page and use the [➨] key to go to the second page
▪ Press the [Simulation] key → A dialog box will appear depending on the situation:
– 'Simulation mode is not active' with activated [Start] key
or
– 'Simulation mode is active' with activated [Stop] key.
The symbol SIM will appear on the scale operating page 'HOME' to indicate simulation mode.
4.3.6.6 Access to calibration functions

The preferred manner of adapting the system to the special properties of the scales and bulk materials is by
using the adjustment functions provided. The adjustment assistant is used to change quickly the bulk materi-
al. An individual selection of the adjustment program is used to make the basic settings.

Operation
4.3.6.6.1 Using the Adjustment Programs

DISOCONT Tersus has a range of adjustment programs that facilitate commissioning and the change to a
different bulk material. All of these programs are operated in a uniform manner. The individual programs,
their requirements and results are summarized in chapter »Adjustment Functions«.
Call up: Open the [Setup] operating page and press the [Calibration] key
Use the arrow keys to select one of the programs in the upper part of the display area (6). Instructions on
operation will also appear here.
The lower part of the display area will show more instructions and the program results.
The keys in the display area beneath this (7) are used for operation.
Key Function
[Start] Run the selected program
[Apply] Transfer the results to the parameter and end the program
[Cancel] Discard the results and cancel the program.

Note: programs can be canceled at any time.
Tab. 11 : Operating keys for adjustment programs
4.3.6.7 Begin Data Logging

DISOCONT Tersus permits cyclical logging of process data for monitoring purposes.
The recorded process values can be viewed via the navigation bar of the web browser in the
rubric 'Internal Trend Files' using the entries 'Data Logger 1' and 'Data Logger 2'.
Condition:
▪ The log was configured by means of the parameter in block Data Logging.
Procedure for activating data logging

From the scale operating page [HOME], call up the dialog Set Mode using the key [Mode] (5) key and press
the [➨] key to go to the second page.
In the column Current Mode the current mode of operation will be shown beside the [Data Logging] key (Not
active or Activated).
The respective dialog box with the following keys will appear after you press the key [ Data Logging]:
[Start] The key is active if no data is currently being logged (state = Not active); press to begin.
[Stop] The key is active if data is currently being logged (state = Activated); press to stop.
[DEL] Delete logged data. This action can be performed at any time regardless of the state.

Operation
4.3.7 Configuring the VHM Operating Panel

The operator panel configuration is independent of the configuration of the scale. The panel has its own pa-
rameter set for this that is stored in the panel itself. These parameters are accessed by means of a special
dialog. The user guidance in the configuration dialog is always in English regardless of the language set for
scale operation.
4.3.7.1 Login for Privileged Users (Login/Logout)

Some of the operating panel settings are protected against unauthorized access. Access is permitted only
once the password ('7353') has been entered.
The password cannot be changed and is independent of the password settings in the scale.
A field for concealed password entry will appear when the [Login] * key is pressed. The touch screen key-
board and a field into which the password can be entered will appear once the field is touched.
Press the [OK] ** to confirm the password.
*
The [Con.Scale] key also will be visible.
**
The call key will now display [Logout] to indicate privileged operation.
4.3.7.2 Selection and Display of the Scales (Feeder)

The [Feeder] key shows a list of all available scales in the network. Press the corresponding key to select a
scale.
Key Function
☑ beside a list entry Select this scale
[Configure] Configure the scale by entering:

Name
IP address
Subnet mask
Gateway mask
Note: With this function you can set the IP address of a VCU without needing the service tool
EasyServe. The addresses of the VHM and the VCU are generally in the same subnet.
[Back] Changes will be discarded; return to the list.

[Save] Changes are stored.
Tab. 12 : Keys in the list of scales
4.3.7.3 Connecting to a Scales (Con.Scale)

Normal operation of the operator panel will begin once a connection to a scale has been established. When
the [Con.Scale] key is pressed and a wait time has elapsed the operator panel will attempt to communicate
via the configured channel with the address of a scale that was selected on the [Feeder] operating page.
The attempt will be repeated several times. If the scale cannot be contacted on the address, the program
changes to the scale selection [Feeder].
The connection attempt can be interrupted and the configuration dialog for the operator panel by pressing a
different key. The routine is also called up if the system is restarted after a power failure.

Operation
4.3.7.4 Selecting Asian Character Fonts

The preferred transfer format for the display characters is UTF-8 (Unicode Transformation Format). Howev-
er, the ideal rendering of some characters depends on the region in which the device is used. For Chinese
and Japanese characters, for example, the user must choose which font is preferable. The setting is perma-
nently stored in the operator panel.
Condition: VHM is in the 'Configuration dialog' state
Sequence:
▪ Press the [Login] key and login with the Password
▪ Press the [Help] key
▪ Press the [System] key
– Checkbox 'Characterset'':
Switch from 'ANSII' ⇔ 'UTF-8'
– Checkbox 'Preferred Asian Font': *
Switch from 'Chinese before Japanese' ⇔'Japanese before Chinese'
*
Characters not contained in the table will be taken from the font non-preferred font.
4.3.7.5 Setting the Address (VHM addr.)

Every device in the communication network must have a unique address. The VHM address is set using the
[VHM addr.] key. This key is only accessible after »logging in as privileged user [➙40]«.
Field Factory settings Meaning
Name: VHM-SPG Display in the header
IP: 192.168.240.21 Unique IP address in the scale controller subnet (VCU).

The last group of digits in the IP address is also the unit's address when communi-
cating through the local bus.
Subnet: 255.255.255.0 Subnet template
Gateway: 0.0.0.0 IP address of the gateway to other networks
Tab. 13 : Fields for setting the address
The settings will be applied once the [Save] key is pressed.
4.3.7.6 Set the Homepage (Config)

As with a web browser, the homepage of the scale's user interface must also be specified. The key is only
accessible after »logging in as privileged user [➙40]«.

Operation
Field/key Factory settings Function
'URL of start page': http://192.168.240.1/hmi/start.html Address of the scale's web server homepage.
A web browser on a PC can open the scale's
user interface at this address.
Under normal circumstances the scales are
selected on the 'Feeder' page. The start ad-
dress is entered automatically.
Communication will be automatically estab-
lished to the last address entered here once
power resumes after a power failure.
'Start timeout in seconds': 7 Length of time between the command to con-

nect to a scale being entered and the connec-
tion being started. This period can be used to
»access the operating panel configuration
[➙ 43]«.
[Save] Save the settings. The entries are discarded if

they are not saved before the page is left.
Tab. 14 : Setting the startup routine
4.3.7.7 Setting the Display

The [Display] key opens the 'Display Settings' dialog where the display behaviour can be set. This key is
only accessible after »logging in as privileged user [➙40]«.
Key Parameter Function Factory settings
[Inactivity Inactivity timeout Time in minutes since the most recent operation until 20 min
Timeout] (Range: 0 … 100) the screen brightness automatically is reduced.
The screen will return to normal brightness when
touched. This contact will not be interpreted as a con-
trol command for the scale.
Logout timeout Time in minutes since the most recent entry before a 600 min
(Range: 0 … 600) privileged user is automatically logged out of the sys-
tem for security reasons.
[Working Display brightness during operation.

Brightness] At full brightness the display has a life expectancy of approximately 5 years. Just dimming brightness a
little can increase service life to over 10 years.
[Sleeping Display brightness after a lengthy time with no contact.
Brightness] Note: You can set sleeping brightness to the same level as the operating brightness if you need to use
the display without making continual adjustments.
[Save] Save the changes made.

Changes are discarded without prompting if they were not saved beforehand.
Tab. 15 : Settings for the display

Operation
4.3.7.8 Accessing the Configuration

Once power is switched on the panel header will show the characters 'VHM-SPG' (factory settings). Open
the operator panel configuration dialog by pressing any key other than [Con.Scale].
Alternative: If the operator panel already displays the scale operating page HOME y ou can
call up the configuration dialog without interrupting the power supply as follows:
Press the [Sel. Scale] key
Answer the Exit scale ? prompt with YES ⇒

[Feeder] operating page is active:
All scales found will be listed
[Configure] key is shown
The different configuration methods are called up from the bar at the right-hand side of the display (3). Sev-
eral functions are password-protected and available only to users with privileged access.
Key Function Password

protected
[VHM addr.] Set the VHM IP address Yes
[Display] Set the display parameters Yes
[Feeder] Select the scale to which a connection is to be established
[Config] Detailed setting of the scale's web server homepage Yes
[Com] Setting the communication channel to the scale Yes
[Calibration] Calibration of touch screen entry
[Login] / [Logout] Log in/log out with password for privileged users
[Con.Scale] Shown once [Login] is touched

Tap [Con.Scale] to connect to a scale
[Help] Show specifications of the VHM (e.g. software version);

Show [Clean] key: see ›VHM System Information and Cleaning the Screen‹
Show [System] key once password has been entered: see ›Selecting Asian Charac-
ter Fonts‹
[Configure] see ›Selection and Display of the Scales (Feeder)‹

Note: do not confuse this key with the [Config] key
Tab. 16 : Keys in the VHM configuration dialog
4.3.7.9 Calibrating Touch Screen Entry

This function calibrates the touch screen with respect to the display. Calibration is required if a key is unin-
tentionally depressed when a neighboring key is touched or if a function can be activated only by pressing
the area next to the key on the screen.
Calibration sequence:
Once the [Start] key has been pressed you will be prompted to touch points on the screen marked with a
cross. The calibration will be automatically stored once this has been successfully performed. The procedure
is automatically repeated if mistakes are made during calibration.

Operation
The calibration function is always called up during the start procedure once the software is loaded into the
VHM.
A touch pen or other object with a small contact area such as a finger or glove can be used.
Calibration should be performed with an object similar to the one that will be used during normal
operation.
4.3.7.10 Configuring the Communication Path (Com)

The transmission medium is selected with the [Com] key. The key is only accessible after »logging in as
privileged user [➙40]«. The 'Communication' dialog box will appear with the entry field 'communicate via':
Field Factory Function Remarks

defaults
Ethernet x Communication via Ethernet inter- The complete IP address of the scale will be used
face and the RJ45 plug. when selected.
Bluetooth Communication via Bluetooth will All Bluetooth adapters within range will be shown in
be automatically activated if a Blue- the [Feeder] selection. Each scale must be
tooth adapter is connected (wire- equipped with its own adapter. Scales connected to
less interface for portable devices). each other via Ethernet can only communicate via
Bluetooth with the scale to whose adapter the
operating panel has been connected.
A subordinate IP connection is established in a
separate subnet. Therefore the IP subnet address
displayed in the VHM differs from the scale's sub-
net address stored in the parameter.
RS485 Communication via serial interface The last part of the scale's IP address (1 … 254)
will be used when selected. The IP address must
therefore also be set when using an interface of
this kind.
Tab. 17 : Alternatives
The page on which the scale is to be selected will be shown once the transmission route has been selected
and the corresponding key pressed. The scale stores its addresses in a parameter.
Details on possible alternative cablings of operator panel and scale are described in the system manual BV-
H2406.
4.3.7.11 VHM System Information and Cleaning the Screen
Information on the VHM operator panel

Press the [Help] key.
A window will open containing information on the software version and basic ' VHM' operator panel settings.
Cleaning the Screen

Press the [Clean] key

Operation
The operator panel will switch into cleaning mode for a short time. The touch screen is deactivated during
this time, allowing it to be cleaned without making an inadvertent entry.
Follow the cleaning instructions!

'Clear screen with cleaning tissue until counter expired'
No acidic or strongly abrasive cleaning agents may be used for cleaning.
The screen is white, allowing dead pixels to be spotted.

A progress indicator in the form of a counter appears that counts downwards from 20 to 0. The operator
panel will then return to normal mode and the touch screen will be reactivated.
4.4 Calibration programs

DISOCONT Tersus simplifies start-up with the aid of adjustment programs. They store their findings in pa-
rameters, thus adapting the control to the application. All of the parameters that result from the scale design
and the electrical connections must be set before calling up the adjustment programs.
In general the adjustment programs can be run by privileged users only who have logged in to the system as
such. The calibration functions can be called up both on the VHM operating panel and via the service tool
EasyServe. They may also be operated via the fieldbus in as far as one has been activated (P18.01 Protocol
Type).
4.4.1 Taring the flowthrough measurement

The 'TW: Tare' calibration program records the load on the load cell without flowing bulk solids through the
time (Factory: 30 s) that can be adjusted in P10.05. This value is used to correct the measuring results in
operation with bulk solids. The feed rate display fluctuates around zero after taring.
In contrast to the zero setting program, the zero setting range is not monitored or limited with taring. The tare
program deletes the findings of the zero setting program.
Chương trình hiệu chuẩn 'TW: Tare' ghi lại tải trên ô tải mà không chảy chất rắn khối lượng qua thời gian
(Nhà máy: 30 giây) có thể được điều chỉnh trong P10.05. Giá trị này được sử dụng để hiệu chỉnh các kết
quả đo trong hoạt động với chất rắn số lượng lớn. Hiển thị tốc độ thức ăn dao động xung quanh 0 sau khi
taring.
Ngược lại với chương trình cài đặt zero, phạm vi cài đặt zero không được theo dõi hoặc giới hạn với taring.
Chương trình bao bì xóa các kết quả của chương trình cài đặt zero.
Condition The flow meter must be switched off. This will close any material feeder present.
Batching operation may not be active.
Call up Call up the 'TW: Tare' calibration program
Program runtime The runtime is determined by P10.05
Display while running The program's remaining running time in % of the value in P10.05
The tare measured in percent of the value in P05.05
Display when finished The tare deviation with reference to the previous tare of P10.02 in % of P10.02
Recently determined tare in % of the load cell rated capacity (P05.05)
Changed parameter if New value of tare in P10.02

results are accepted The P10.03 parameters will be set to zero
Operation
Potential events and mes- 'Stop !': Switch off feeding (feeder) (refer to the conditions)
sages
'Aborted !': A condition was not met during the measurement and the calibration program
was ended.
'Batch active': Reject batching for calibration (refer to the conditions)
Tab. 18 : Details and procedure
4.4.2 Flowthrough measurement zero setting

The '>0< Zero Set' program calibrates the zero point of feed rate measurement just like the 'TW: Tare' pro-
gram. The results are ascertained relative to the basic adjustment and cannot be accepted if the deviation
from the basic adjustment is greater than the limit set in P10.04.
Condition The mass flow meter must be turned off. This will close any material feeder present.
Call up Call up the '>0< Zero Set' calibration program
Display while running >0< active: The program's remaining running time in % of the value in P10.05
The deviation of tare from the basic adjustment in % of the value in P05.05
Display when finished The tare deviation with reference to the previous tare of P10.02 in % of P10.02
Recently determined tare in % of the load cell rated capacity (P05.05)
Changed parameter if The new value of the tare correction in P10.03

results are accepted
sages
was ended.
4.4.3 Weight check flowthrough meter

The 'CW: Span Calibration' calibration program records the load on the load cell through the time
(Factory: 30 s) that can be set in P10.05 without flowing bulk solids, but with the calibration weight applied.
The result is compared to a preset setpoint and then displayed. This makes it possible to identify shunt forc-
es and sluggishness in the weighing mechanism. The precise position of the calibration weight with refer-
ence to the fulcrum is decisive in equipment that records the torque. The load Q m on the load cell is calculat-
ed from the load CW applied and the leverage a/b of the horizontal distances of Q m and CW from the ful-
crum.
This can only be manually corrected since the results depend on the care applied when placing the calibra-
tion weight which is why a plausibility check should always be made.

Operation
Note: Due to the design of some flow meters a calibration weight cannot be placed on them. In
these cases the 'CW: Span Calibration' control program will not supply any usable results. As
a substitute, the findings of the 'TW: Tare' calibration program can be evaluated in relation to
previously determined values. The reference values can be determined at start-up or without
a flow of bulk solids in an error-free state. We can conclude from deviations of less than 10 %
of the load cell rated capacity that there is material build-up in the meter. Deviations of more
than 10 % indicate defects in the load cell or in data acquisition.
Condition The flow meter must be switched off. This will close any material feeder present.
The calibration weight has to be keyed in with the value in P10.07 having an impact on the
load cell. It might be necessary to pay attention to the leverage.
Call up Call up the 'CW: Span Calibration' calibration program
Display while running The program's remaining running time in % of the value in P10.05
Set/Act: weight in P10.07/measured weight
Display when finished The measured calibration weight

Set/Act: weight in P10.07/measured weight
Parameters changed -
This can be corrected manually in P10.01:
P10.01 new = P10.01 old * Set/Act
sages
was ended.
4.4.4 Taring the bin weigher

The function is only available if the bin weigher is activated by P22.01.
The TB: Tare calibration program records the load on the weighing equipment for the empty bin. In operation
with bulk solids, this value is subtracted from the measured bin weight. When the bin is empty, the display of
the weight value fluctuates around zero after taring.
The details and sequence of the calibration program:
Condition The bin should be empty.

The bin filling may not be activated.
Call up Select and start the 'TB: Tare' calibration program
Program runtime 10 s

Operation
Display while running 'TB: active' : the program's remaining time

The current tare load in percent of P22.04
Display when finished Deviation in percent of the rated load cell load as per P22.04
Tare in percent of the rated load cell load as per P22.04
Changed parameter if New value of tare in P22.25

results are accepted
Potential events and mes- 'Aborted !':

sages The program was aborted. The parameters remain unchanged.
Tab. 21 : The details and process of taring for the bin weigher
4.4.5 Bin weight control

The function is only available if the bin weigher is activated by P22.01.
The CB: Weight Check calibration program is used for checking and adjusting the weighing equipment with
the aid of a known calibration weight. The mass of the calibration weight used should be keyed into P22.25
before program start.
This program can identify shunt forces, i.e. links between the weighed and static components that absorb
forces that cannot be measured by the load cell.
Condition The bin may not be filled or emptied.

The mass of the calibration weight was entered into P22.25.
Call up Select and start the 'CB: Weight Check' calibration program
Program runtime
Display while running First the current hopper weight is calculated.

Display of the time remaining and current weight.
Then the 'Checkweight Up/Down' prompt and value of the calibration weight appear.
Now apply or remove the calibration weight and press the <<Next>> button.
The display of the remaining period and the difference to the first weight value. The value
shown is negative if the calibration weight has been removed.
The second weight value is now taken and checked for plausibility.
Display when finished 'Set/Act' shows the quotient from the change in mass entered into P22.25 and the meas-
ured change in mass.
Changed parameter if Enter into P22.24

results are accepted P22.24new = P22.24old * 'Set/Act'
Potential events and mes- Aborted ! :

sages The program was finished. The parameters remain unchanged.
Tab. 22 : The details and procedure for checking the weight of the bin weigher

Operation
4.4.6 Optimizing Hopper Fill Level Regulation

This function is only available when weight calculation has been activated for the bin via P22.01 and the
level controller has been activated in P23.01.
The BIN: Controller Optimization bin controller optimization program automatically calculates the KP and TN
control parameters (P23.08 and P23.09) of the bin level controller from the conveying element constant of
the filling or emptying element in P23.06 and the dead time (transit time) from the conveying element to the
bin in P23.07.
Condition The conveying element constant of the filling or emptying element entered into P23.06.
The dead time (transit time) from the conveying element to the bin into P23.07
Call up Select and start the 'BIN: Controller Optimization' calibration program
Program runtime 10 s
Display while running CO: P-Component = recently calculated parameters P23.08

I-Component TN = recently calculated parameters P23.09
Changed parameter if Recently calculated values are entered into P23.08 and P23.09. The parameters are auto-
results are accepted matically accepted without taking further action.
Potential events and mes- Aborted !:

sages The program was ended. The parameters remain unchanged.
Feeder Constant:
Parameter P23.06 has an incorrect value (P23.06 = 0.0 (kg/h)/mA). The program was abor-
ted.
Tab. 23 : The details and process of improving bin level regulation
NOTE: The calculated values of the parameters in P23.08 and P23.09 can be further adapted
manually. The optimization program does not have any impact on the rest of the parameters
of the bin level controller (such as D portion, bypass and increase, etc.).
4.4.7 Linearizing the measurement

The measured value can have a non-linear dependancy on the real value depending upon the geometry of
diverting the flow of bulk solids and the inlet.
However, this correlation can be compensated for by linearizing in theLinearization block. The geometry
parameters relevant to the measurement have to be calibrated and »taring [➙45]« has to be carried out
before adjusting linearization. The sensitivity should have been calibrated via P10.01.
»Control measurements [➙57]« are made at varying flow rates Sk for linearization. The rate Sk can be calcu-
lated from the Unlin. Flow Rate service value in percent of the feed rate entered in P03.02. This value might
differ from the feed rate shown as the actual flow rate depending upon the parameter setting. Linear behav-
iour is set in the parameters (Ik = Sk) as the starting point.

Operation
The ratio of progress Zk of integrating the total and the actual quantity Kk should be calculated. The new
value of the parameter Ik_new at the linearization point k results from the value Ik_old that is active during the
measurement:
Ik_new = Ik_old * Kk / Zk
Also refer to: Adjusting linearization
4.4.8 Automatic control measurement unit (KME)

Đơn vị đo điều khiển tự động (KME)
Measuring units for mass flows are always subject to fault impacts that change over time. To correct them,
the quantity Mk calculated by continuous measurement over the testing period T 0 is compared with the quan-
tity Mr actually conveyed during this period. Calculating the actual quantity with a remote static scales makes
the procedure very time-consuming. In addition, the flow of bulk solids needed for continuous production is
interrupted in the process for control.
This check can automatically be performed using the control measurement system. This will allow automatic
correction of the continuous measurement.
The requirement for the functioning of this process is that measuring the actual quantity is encumbered with
a substantially smaller fault than continuous measurement. The errors in determining the actual quantity
consist of error E1 (when determining an initial weight value) and error E2 (when determining the second
weight value). In the worst-case scenario, the total error ET (when determining the actual quantity) may be
calculated as:
|ET| = |E1| + |E2|
The relative error er (when determining the actual test mass Mr) can be estimated at:
er = |ET| / Mr
This error er should not be any more than 1/5 of the admissible error of continuous measurement. This
means that a minimum control quantity can be calculated if error ET is known. The random share of errors E1
and E2 can be eliminated by carrying out the control several times while only partially correcting the fault.
The error of the continuous scales may contain constant shares, i.e. the tare error and errors dependant upon
the feed rate (the range errors). When correcting the continuous scale, the user has to decide what type of
error it is. It is necessary to distinguish the individual types of errors when operating at different feed rates.
Correct classification is less important if continuous measurement is carried out at approximately equal feed
rates. After all, it is not possible to give a general recommendation for classifying errors due to the different
bulk solids and local conditions.
DISOCONT Tersus is adapted to the technical design in a plant via P24.01 Type of Check System (selecting
the control strategy).
You can find the parameters for adjusting the control measurement unit in the Check System block of pa-
rameters. There are further explanations on the process of control in the appendix.
4.4.8.1 Types of control measurement
4.4.8.1.1 Single Unit Control Type

The bulk solids fed by the continuous feeder are drawn from a bin installed in front of the feeder in the flow of
bulk solids. The transit time for the bulk solids is short between the bin and feeder.

Operation
Fig. 6: Single Unit KME Model
Depending upon the design, the bin weight also takes in the weight of the mass flow meter and the mass
within the unit.
4.4.8.1.2 Separated Units Control Type

The bulk solids fed by the continuous feeder are drawn from a bin installed in front of the feeder in the flow of
bulk solids. The transit time for the bulk solids between the bin and feeder is long because additional
transport lines are interposed.
Fig. 7: Separated Units Control Type
Normally, the bin weight no longer takes in the bulk solids on the transport distance.
4.4.8.1.3 Filling System Control Type

The continually measured flow of bulk solids might be redirected through a shunt from the process into the
control bin where it is collected. The time for transporting the bulk solids between the continuous measuring
unit and bin can be long.

Operation
Fig. 8: Filling System KME Type
4.4.8.1.4 External Control Type

The control measurement is carried out through a separate unit if the bulk solids are withdrawn from one bin
by various different ways and collected by means of several continuous measuring units. We urgently rec-
ommend using the DISOCONT Master for this since the process of correction calls for a tight exchange of
data with the continuous scale.
The separate unit measures the bin weight and distributes the errors calculated over the continuous meas-
urements. The correction parameters of the continuous scales are correspondingly adjusted.
Fig. 9: External KME Type

Operation
4.4.8.2 Operating the control measurement (KME) Vận hành phép đo kiểm soát
The control measurement (KME) is a test that is carried out to calculate the error of the continuous scales
based upon the change in the weight of the bulk solids in a bin and automatically correct it wherever desired.
Phép đo kiểm soát (KME) là một thử nghiệm được thực hiện để tính toán sai số của các thang đo liên tục
dựa trên sự thay đổi trọng lượng của chất rắn khối trong thùng và tự động sửa nó bất cứ khi nào muốn.
Preconditions:
▪ The P24.01 Type of Check System parameter have to be unequal to NO.
▪ The P24.08 Check Start Tare parameter has to be on OP to be able to start from the operating panel or
EasyServe.
Proceed to start tare correction from the VHM operating panel:
Call up the KME page starting from the main page (HOME).
Testing and additive correction of the zero point are called up with the Check Start Tare button and testing
and multiplicative correction of the measuring unit can be called up by Check Start Span.
After start, control goes through the phases shown in Details and flow chart control measurement (KME).
These phases are shown in the operating panel.
The following process quantities are displayed during the measurement until starting the next measurement:
Điều kiện:
▪ Tham số Loại Hệ thống Kiểm tra P24.01 phải không bằng NO.
▪ Thông số P24.08 Kiểm tra Bắt đầu Kiểm tra phải có trên OP để có thể bắt đầu từ bảng điều hành hoặc EasyServe.
Tiến hành để bắt đầu hiệu chỉnh giá trị từ bảng điều hành VHM: Gọi trang KME bắt đầu từ trang chính (HOME).
Kiểm tra và hiệu chỉnh phụ gia của điểm 0 được gọi bằng nút Check Start Tare và kiểm tra và hiệu chỉnh nhân của đơn vị
đo có thể được gọi lên bởi Check Start Span.
Sau khi bắt đầu, điều khiển đi qua các giai đoạn được hiển thị trong Chi tiết và đo kiểm soát biểu đồ dòng chảy (KME).
Các giai đoạn này được hiển thị trong bảng điều hành.
Các đại lượng quy trình sau được hiển thị trong quá trình đo cho đến khi bắt đầu phép đo tiếp theo:
The quantity shown Unit Description
Contin. Result Z kg The quantity of bulk solids ascertained by the continuous scale
Check Result F/Z - The quotient of the change of bin weight and the quantity ascertained by the
continuous scale
Relative Tare Correc- % The correction ascertained in tare with reference to rated load
tion
Relative Span Correc- % The correction ascertained in calibration of span = the deviation in both
tion measurements with reference to the measured value (even after completing
the control)
Check Belt Length m Only with belt-supported systems: the progress in the conveyor belt during
control
Check Meas. Time s Only with non-belt-supported systems: the duration of the measurement
Check Quantity kg Preselected quantity of bulk solids for the control (P24.11). The parameter
can be changed here directly with the privilege of changing parameters .
Operation
Check Circuits - Only with belt-supported systems: preselected belt progress for the control
(parameters)
BIN: Fill Weight kg or t Current bin weight
Note:
If P24.02 Auto Correction = YES, the continuous scales is automatically corrected if the results of control are
within the boundaries defined via P24.27 to P24.30.Chú thích: Nếu P24.02 Tự động sửa = CÓ, các thang
đo liên tục sẽ tự động được sửa nếu kết quả kiểm soát nằm trong các ranh giới được xác định qua
P24.27 đến P24.30.

Operation
If automatic correction was not selected or if the results of control are outside of the specified boundaries,
the Apply function can be used to correct the continuous scale. The Cancel function ends control without
changing continuous scales adjustment. The result is maintained to the next control.
If tare is corrected, the correction is carried out through P10.03 Tare Correction and the results of a zone
correction is calculated into P10.01 Range Correction. The correction is documented in the log files.
You can find more detailed information in the »Types of control measurement [➙50]« section and a flow
chart in the appendix. Nếu hiệu chỉnh tự động không được chọn hoặc nếu kết quả kiểm soát nằm ngoài
ranh giới đã chỉ định, chức năng Áp dụng có thể được sử dụng để điều chỉnh thang đo liên tục. Chức
năng Hủy kết thúc kiểm soát mà không thay đổi điều chỉnh quy mô liên tục. Kết quả được duy trì để kiểm
soát tiếp theo. Nếu giá trị sửa chữa được hiệu chỉnh, việc hiệu chỉnh được thực hiện thông qua P10.03
Hiệu chỉnh giá trị và kết quả của việc hiệu chỉnh vùng được tính vào Hiệu chỉnh phạm vi P10.01. Sự điều
chỉnh được ghi lại trong các tệp nhật ký. Bạn có thể tìm thấy thông tin chi tiết hơn trong phần »Các loại
phép đo kiểm soát [➙50]« và biểu đồ dòng chảy trong phụ lục.

Startup
5 Startup
5.1 Assembling the Electrical Components

The subassemblies of a DISOCONT Tersus system come pre-assembled on delivery, e.g. attached to the
scales or installed in a control cabinet.
NOTE: If you have purchased components, please read the DISOCONT Tersus BV-H2406 system
manual where you will find information on the installation dimensions and architecture of the
DISOCONT Tersus system.
5.2 Electrical Connections

The electrical connection for the DISOCONT Tersus is described - depending on the scope of supply - in the
model circuit diagrams or in the system-specific circuit diagrams.
Further information on the electrical properties and interfaces of the subassemblies can be found in the
DISOCONT Tersus system manual BV-H2406.
5.3 Test that the Control is Functioning

Control of the mechanical components, the drives and the interconnection with the system controller can
best be checked with no bulk material in »simulation [➙38]« mode.
5.4 Entering Basic parameters

The scope of a delivery of electronic and mechanical parts will always include a data sheet. It contains all of
the important rated and calibration details. The values must be entered into the corresponding parameters
(»Reading and Setting Parameters [➙36]«).
Parameters often require no further adjustment, as the factory default parameter values permit scales opera-
tion in the most common applications.
Data Parameter Parameter

number name
Rated load cell capacities for torque recording P05.05 LC Rated Capacity
Characteristic value of load cell sensitivity P05.02 LC Characteristic Value
Nominal feeder feed rate P03.02 Maximum Flow Rate Io
Device constant P05.06 Device Constant
Tab. 24 : Basic parameters
It may be necessary to input other parameters for recording bin weight.

Startup
5.5 Adjusting the flow rate regulation

The volumetric discharge output of the feed unit (conveying to the feed rate measuring unit) should be ad-
justed to the application. Within certain limits the adjustment can also be made using the parameter settings
of the DISOCONT Tersus. However, the rough adjustment is initially made by means of the mechanical de-
sign and by the settings on the external output controller.
Fig. 10: Regulating the feeder
The adjustment depends on the type of conveyor element used and the matching output controller. We will
explain the basic procedure during commissioning using the example of a continually rotating feeder. The
procedure is identical for a feed gate continually controlled per the position setpoint with an external position
controller (mostly pneumatic). You can find the details in the relevant manuals of the external controller.
No. Operating sequence
1 Set the feed rate regulation to volumetric operation (not synchronous volumetric)
2 Select a value between 10 mA and 15 mA as a setpoint bypass P11.08 Bypass. We recommend leaving
the parameter value on factory settings.
3 Fill the bin with a sufficient quantity of bulk material. Bulk material is discharged during this calibration.
Ensure that the discharged material cannot cause malfunctions or damage in downstream processes.
4 »Feed rate setpoint = enter zero [➙28]«
»Switch on feeding [➙27]«
5 Select the controller actuating variable zero point in P11.04 and P11.06 so that the feeder just conveys no
more bulk solids.
6 »Key in the feed rate setpoint between 20 % and 100 % of the nominal feed rate [➙28]«
7 Adjust the external controller so that the measured feed rate just corresponds to the setpoint. Instructions
can be found in the manual of the external controller. If the appropriate adjustment cannot be made, there
might be reason to believe that the mechanical design of the feeder is not good.
If it is not possible to adjust the external parts, they can be adjusted with the bypass constant (P11.08).
Tab. 25 : Carrying out calibration

Startup
The control parameters in the factory settings already supply sufficiently good and stable control characteris-
tics at short running times from the feeder to the measuring point. Wherever necessary, the parameters can
be manually improved in the Rate controller block.
5.6 Check with bulk solids

Each test or calibration with calibration weights can only approximate the actual operating conditions. A high-
ly accurate continuous measurement can only be achieved by making several measurements with bulk ma-
terial and a subsequent correction. It is corrected with Range Correction P10.01. The following figure shows
an example of the arrangement for checking belt-based continuous throughput metering.
Fig. 11: Arrangement for verification with bulk material
The following items must be observed:

1. The route from the continuous measuring point to the collecting point for the material has to be clean.
2. If there are any diverters they may not convey any material.
3. If there are any feed screws or air slides between the continuous measuring point and the collecting
point, material should be conveyed for approximately ½ hour before making a check. This will allow the
usual material build-ups to form on the conveying elements.
4. Dedusting should be set to a minimum.
5. The bins or vehicles in which the material is transported onto a (legal-for-trade) commercial scales must
be cleaned and re-weighed (tared) before each filling. The commercial scales must be sufficiently accu-
rate to measure the MW quantity.
The new value P10.01new is calculated as follows from the prior value P10.01old from the MA counter pro-
gression of continuous measurement and the MW mass ascertained on the control scale:
P10.01new = P10.01old * MW / MA
For example:
Old value of P10.01 = 1
A material quantity of MW = 4.9 t is conveyed over a period of 15 minutes. The MA counter progression read
off the device is 5.0 t.
P10.01new = 1 * 4.9/5.0 = 0.98
The calculated value should be entered into P10.01.

Startup
5.7 Calibrating bin weighing

The prerequisite for precision measurement of the quantity of bulk solids in a bin is installing the bin free of
shunt forces. The weight of the bin may only be supported on the load cells. The connections should be led
to the bin horizontally and with supple compensators.
Compression forces can cause substantial measuring errors when determining the mass of bulk solids if the
compressive forces attack vertically on the bin. In particular, this danger exists on the input and output of the
bin. The compression forces should be compensated for if it is not possible to avoid variable pressures at
these points. It can be compensated for mechanically or electronically when recording pressure.
The parameters for the bin's load cells should be keyed into P22.02, P22.03 and P22.04. The data apply
correspondingly if a second weighed bin is supposed to be adjusted.
The »tare program [➙47]« should be called up if the bin is empty. The fill level's display should vary by zero
after taking on the findings. As a check, it is advisable to get the bin vibrating for a brief period of time and
then check the measured weight value. The deviation from zero is a measure of the likely measuring error.
The bin weigher is now calibrated when using calibrated load cells.
NOTES: ▪ If checking zero point stability has given rise to major errors, there are generally also er-
rors between the actual and displayed weight for bulk solids.
▪ The proportionality between the actual and displayed weight can be checked with the
calibration program CB: Weight Check and »corrected [➙48]«.
▪ The rated value for the bin fill level should be set into P22.09 for theoretical considera-
tions, the data sheet or an optic check with a full bin.
▪ If the bin fill level is regulated by turning a prefeeder on and off, the P22.12 and P22.13
parameters should be adjusted for filling control.
▪ Regulation should be »streamlined [➙49]« after keying in the parameters if the fill level is
created with a prefeeder continually controlled in its flow performance.

Startup
6 Maintenance and Recalibration

The electronic equipment of the DISOCONT Tersus system is maintenance free. It does not contain any
wear parts under the specified ambient conditions (refer to the BV-H2406 system manual). The MTBF (Mean
Time Between Failures) is longer than 10 years. This section describes possible measures that can be taken
to guarantee accuracy of the measuring system, including for the mechanical components.
Occasion Action Remarks
Periodically, e.g. every 3 months Turn off bulk solids conveying and tare Most errors in the measuring unit can
the measuring unit. be identified in changes in tare.
A substantial change in tare indicates
changed air currents or friction in the
measuring unit. It might make sense to
check the equipment for unacceptable
foreign particles and material build-up
of bulk solids in the instrument room.
If available: check the bin weight ac- The bin should be set vibrating for a
quisition. brief period of time. The weight values
shown before and after these vibra-
tions provide a measure for shunt
forces. This can also be checked with
an empty bin. The results of »taring
[➙58]« provide a measure of the bulk
solids remaining in the bin when emp-
tying.
Change in bulk material »Adjust the external output controller You may need to adjust the rated
[➙56]« output and possibly the fill limits for a
bin.
Periodically as per the operating in- Do the maintenance work listed in the The interval may depend on the bulk
structions of the mechanical measur- manual. solids.
ing equipment and other mechanical
parts of the unit
Tab. 26 : Suggested actions

Maintenance and Recalibration

Parameters
7 Parameters
The DISOCONT Tersus is adapted to each application via parameters. No special programming knowledge
is therefore necessary.
Fig. 12: Parameter sets
Parameter set Purpose Activation Preparation and modifica-

tion
Active parameter set Complete parameter set Always active Using EasyServe, the soft-
Regulation of measuring ware the VHM operator
and control functions panel or a web server
Factory settings Complete parameter set Copy into the active pa- Cannot be changed
Non-alterable basic set- rameter set using
ting EasyServe, the software the
»VHM operator panel
[➙37]« or a web server
Backup set Complete parameter set Copy into the active pa- Only using EasyServe in
Pre-setting for a group of rameter set using expert mode
applications or a setting EasyServe, the software the
stored during commission- »VHM operator panel
ing [➙37]« or a web server
Tab. 27 : Using parameter sets in the DISOCONT Tersus
Note: parameters not required for an application can be faded out or declared 'read only' using EasyServe in
expert mode. EasyServe compiles a list of visible parameters that form an integral part of the system docu-
mentation. They, together with this manual, make up the relevant documentation of the control system for an
application. The parameter list in the operating manual contains all of the parameters, regardless of their
actual use in an application.
In addition to the parameter set stored in the scales, we recommend that after commissioning you keep a
copy of the parameter set in a mass storage medium using EasyServe.

Parameters
The parameters are arranged into blocks to for clarity. A parameter is uniquely identified by its block and
number within that block in the respective scales software version:
P01.03: block of parameters 1 → Parameter 3
Note: Each parameter also has a unique number (ID) with which it can be addressed over the serial inter-
face. This number can be seen as a tooltip in EasyServe when passing over the parameter and can be out-
put in the parameter printout.
Gaps can appear between block numbers and parameters within the blocks.
In rare cases, the number of a parameter may change.
7.1 Abbreviations
Source Description
FB Fieldbus
OP Operator panel
DI Digital input
DO Digital output
AI Analog input
AO Analog output
LS Logical signal for using internally available signals
Event Event. The reaction to the occurrence of an event can be configured.
W1 Warning 1 (requires acknowledgement)
W2 Warning 2 (does not require acknowledgement)
ALARM Alarm (requires acknowledgement)
IGNORE Ignore: do not show any event message, but switch the corresponding contact outputs
LC Load cell
I Feed rate
v Belt speed
VCU VCU 20100 system unit of DISOCONT Tersus. Refer to the BV-H2406 manual for details.
VHM DISOCONT Tersus operator panel. Refer to the BV-H2406 manual for details.
VMO The machine operating console for service work. Refer to the BV-H2488 manual for details.
LWZ See weighbridge drawing
Tab. 28 : Abbreviations frequently used in parameters
7.2 Configuring the Interfaces

The internal software signals and signals on the interfaces to the environment are linked via parameters. The
linking parameters are assigned to the logic signals and they describe the origin or target of a signal.
Linking takes place in steps over several levels.

Parameters
Step Task
1. Select the source, e.g. DI, DO, …, …

'n/a' means not assigned; i.e., the function does not have any direct interaction with its surround-
ings.
2. Selection of the control unit, e.g. VCUx or VMOx, …

Only those control units are displayed that have been pre-selected in the parameter block
Hardware Modules.
Up to 3 VCUs and 2 VMOs can be assigned to one scale. Address switches are used to differenti-
ate your units. You can find details on setting addresses in the BV-H2406 system manual.
3. Select the channel number on the control unit, e.g. DI1 ...
4. Select the external signal level at low or high for the active signal.
Tab. 29 : Step-by-step specification of signal links
The source parameter defines whether a more precise signal path setting is also necessary. The linking pa-
rameters only offer technically meaningful interfaces.
Source Unit Channel Level Purpose
DI VCU1 ... VCU3 DI1 … DI7 High, Low Binary input signals
VMO1 ... VMO2
FB
DO VCU1 ... VCU3 DO1 … DO8 High, Low Binary output signals
VMO1 ... VMO2 DO1 ... DO5
AI VCU1 ... VCU3 AI1 … AI2 Analog interface

VMO1 ... VMO2 AI1 … AI3
AO VCU1 ... VCU3 AO1 … AO4 Analog interface

VMO1 ... VMO2 AO1 … AO3
LC VCU1 ... VCU3 LC1 ... LC2 Load cell interface
LS VCU1 ... VCU3 DO1 … DO8, DI1 … High, Low Internal by-pass of an output for local
DI7 operation
VMO1 ... VMO2 DO1 ... DO5
n/a There is no interface assigned the internal signal. Input signals automatically adopt a
state that does not interfere with the
program flow.
FB Fieldbus (no additional details required) Controlled by signals via fieldbus
OP VHM operator panel, no additional details required Controlled by operator panel inputs
v Speed, no additional details required Link to an internal signal
Tab. 30 : Signal sources and their descriptions
Source Internal signal type
Unit Interface assembly for external signal exchange
Channel Channel designation in the unit

Parameters
Level Identifier of the value of the external signal if the internal logical signal accepts the True value. You
can switch here to active high and active low signal levels which means that you can invert the
value of the external signal.
Tab. 31 : What the columns mean
Setting Binary input NAMUR input Binary output
Low Voltage 0 V across the input Current at the input >3 mA High resistance, relay contact open
terminals (sensor not covered)
High Voltage >18 VDC across the Current at the input <1 mA Low resistance, relay contact closed
input terminals (sensor covered)
Tab. 32 : The meaning of the Level parameter segment for an internal True signal
Name Unit Source Channel Level
DI: External Event 1 DI VCU1 DI1 Low
Tab. 33 : Example of how a binary input channel is assigned to a physical input channel
The DI: External Event 1 signal is connected at input DI1 of VCU1. If the input is open (low), this is interpret-
ed as logically 'true' or '1'.
7.3 Configuring Event Messages

This system monitors a wide range, both of its own functions and the peripherals. The reaction to a recog-
nized deviation, i.e. an event, is set by parameters. These parameters are used to assign each event to a
class that defines this reaction.
Event class Description Impact on Acknowledgement Color on the VHM

feeding required
Alarm A The scale is turned off when Yes Red

feeding is stopped and
it cannot be turned on
Warning 1 W1 The feeder continues to run Yes Yellow

(with DISOCONT)
Orange
(with INTECONT)
Warning 2 W2 The feeder continues to run No Yellow

Only display as long as
the event is active
Ignore IG The feeder continues to run - -
Tab. 34 : Event classes

Parameters
NOTE: An external binary output channel is set that may have been assigned to the event regard-
less of the event class. This output type channel remains set for as long as the event con-
tinues to exist. It is therefore possible that the measurement is switched off by the event (by
alarm setting) and therefore the event no longer exists. In this case, the binary output only
provides the corresponding information about the event for a short period.
A recently pending alarm- or warning 1-class event will be shown on the operating panel blinking and in col-
or. Blinking is turned off when acknowledged. Acknowledged event messages are cleared from the display
for current events if the event is no longer pending. Each event is stored with a time-stamp in the internal
»memory [➙34]« for later analysis.
7.4 Parameter List
7.4.1 Parameter Overview

VIF20170-003 1814
01 - Hardware Modules
Number: Name Default Customer Sys ID
»P01.01 [➙84]« Analog Channel A10 NO 5746
»P01.02 [➙84]« Analog Channel A11 NO 5747
»P01.03 [➙84]« VCU20100-Unit 2 NO 4211
»P01.04 [➙84]« VCU2: Analog Channel A10 NO 5771
»P01.06 [➙84]« Event: Communication VCU20100-Unit 2 A 4216
»P01.07 [➙84]« VCU20100-Unit 3 NO 4212
»P01.10 [➙84]« Event: Communication VCU20100-Unit 3 A 4217
»P01.11 [➙84]« VHM RS485 Address 1 4221
»P01.12 [➙84]« VMO20100-Unit 1 NO 4222
»P01.13 [➙84]« Event: Communication VMO20100-Unit 1 A 4223
»P01.14 [➙84]« VMO20100-Unit 2 NO 5834
»P01.15 [➙84]« Event: Communication VMO20100-Unit 2 A 5835
02 - Dialog Behaviour

»P02.01 [➙86]« Language * ENGLISH 4224
»P02.02 [➙86]« Units Metric 4225
»P02.03 [➙86]« Scale Name DISOCONT Tersus VIF 6238

Parameters
»P02.04 [➙86]« Access Rights Limitation HMI NO 4801
»P02.05 [➙86]« Remote IP Address HMI 1 192.168.240.21 4798
»P02.06 [➙86]« Event: Communication HMI 1 IG 4218
»P02.11 [➙86]« Event: Communication VHM serial IG 4804
»P02.12 [➙86]« Password 10000 4292
»P02.13 [➙86]« 2nd Password 14389 4321
»P02.14 [➙86]« Reset Counter 1 active 4286
»P02.15 [➙86]« Reset Counter 2 active 4287
»P02.16 [➙86]« Batch control active 4283
»P02.17 [➙86]« Switch Grav./Vol. command active 4595
»P02.18 [➙86]« Switch Keyboard-/Normal Mode active 4282
»P02.19 [➙86]« Prefeeder start/stop active 4813
»P02.20 [➙86]« Data Log ON/OFF Password 4309
»P02.21 [➙86]« Exit Scale active 4600
03 - Device Definition
»P03.01 [➙89]« Control NO 4590
»P03.02 [➙89]« Maximum Flow Rate Io * 200000 kg/h 4226
»P03.03 [➙89]« Flow Rate Units ----.- t/h 4229
»P03.04 [➙89]« Counter 1 Unit -----.- t 4230
»P03.05 [➙89]« Counter 2 Unit ------- t 4232
»P03.06 [➙89]« Counter 3 Unit ------- t 4233
»P03.07 [➙89]« Pulse Length Total 0.05 s 4231
»P03.08 [➙89]« DO: Pulse Counter n/a 4239
»P03.09 [➙89]« Totalizer Increment 0 kg 4254
»P03.10 [➙89]« Counter 1 Overflow 999999999999 kg 4351
04 - Control Sources

Parameters
»P04.01 [➙91]« Feeder Start * FB 4241
»P04.02 [➙91]« Feedrate Setpoint * FB 4242
»P04.03 [➙91]« Setpoint Range 20 mA 4243
»P04.04 [➙91]« Setpoint Offset 4 mA 4244
»P04.05 [➙91]« Source Run Enable * n/a 4245
»P04.06 [➙91]« Event: Run Disabled W2 4246
»P04.07 [➙91]« Source Relative Setpoint n/a 6233
»P04.08 [➙91]« Relativer Setpoint Range 20 mA 6240
»P04.09 [➙91]« Relative Setpoint Offset 4 mA 6241
05 - Rated Data
»P05.01 [➙92]« LC: Load Measurement LC 4266
»P05.02 [➙92]« LC Characteristic Value 2 mV/V 4257
»P05.03 [➙92]« Load Cell 1 analog Input Offset 4 mA 5837
»P05.04 [➙92]« Load Cell 1 analog Input Range 20 mA 5838
»P05.05 [➙92]« LC Rated Capacity 100 kg 4258
»P05.06 [➙92]« Device Constant 0.04 kgh/t 4265
06 - Feeder control
»P06.01 [➙93]« Volumetric Start-Up 0s 4272
»P06.02 [➙93]« Afterflow Measurement Time 3s 4274
07 - Feeder Monitoring

»P07.01 [➙93]« Event: Stand-By W2 4289
»P07.02 [➙93]« Stand-By Limit Value 0 % Io 4290
»P07.03 [➙93]« Event: Error LC Input A 4293
»P07.04 [➙93]« Event: LC Input < MIN A 4294
»P07.05 [➙93]« Event: LC Input > MAX A 4295
»P07.06 [➙93]« Event: Setpoint Limited W1 4296
»P07.07 [➙93]« Event: Power Failure A 4297
»P07.08 [➙93]« Time Deviation 20 s 4298
»P07.09 [➙93]« Threshold Deviation 5% 4299

Parameters
»P07.10 [➙93]« Factor Deviation 1 4320
»P07.11 [➙93]« Deviation abs. max. 100 % 6255
»P07.12 [➙93]« Event: Deviation A 4300
»P07.13 [➙93]« Event: Controller Limited W2 4301
»P07.14 [➙93]« Event: Memory A 4302
»P07.15 [➙93]« Event: Analog Input < Offset A 5418
»P07.16 [➙93]« Source Emergency Setpoint n/a 4930
»P07.17 [➙93]« Emergency Setpoint 6000 kg/h 4931
08 - Filters

»P08.01 [➙97]« LC Filter 0.25 s 4334
»P08.02 [➙97]« Filter: Actual Flow Rate 3s 4328
»P08.03 [➙97]« Filter: Actual Flow Rate analog 3s 4329
»P08.04 [➙97]« Filter: Load 3s 4335
»P08.05 [➙97]« Filter: Deviation 3s 4333
09 - Limit Values
»P09.01 [➙97]« Limit: Actual Flow Rate MIN 5 % Io 4337
»P09.02 [➙97]« Event: Actual Flow Rate MIN W1 4338
»P09.03 [➙97]« Limit: Actual Flow Rate MAX 120 % Io 4339
»P09.04 [➙97]« Event: Actual Flow Rate MAX W1 4340
10 - Calibration Data
»P10.01 [➙98]« Range Correction 1 4352
»P10.02 [➙98]« Basic Tare 0 kg 4355
»P10.03 [➙98]« Tare Correction 0 kg 4356
»P10.04 [➙98]« Zeroing Limit 5%Q 4677
»P10.05 [➙98]« Calibration Time 30 s 4358
»P10.06 [➙98]« Tare Correction Check 0 kg 4935
»P10.07 [➙98]« Calibration Weight 1 kg 4354
»P10.08 [➙98]« Material Correction 1 4360
11 - Rate controller

Parameters
»P11.01 [➙99]« Controller Type Continuous 4701
»P11.02 [➙99]« P-Component KP 0.02 mA/% 4369
»P11.03 [➙99]« I-Component TN 3s 4370
»P11.04 [➙99]« Lower Limit 0 mA 4371
»P11.05 [➙99]« Upper Limit 20 mA 4372
»P11.06 [➙99]« Controller Magnitude Offset 0 mA 4373
»P11.07 [➙99]« Position at STOP 0 4374
»P11.08 [➙99]« Bypass 10 mA 4375
»P11.09 [➙99]« Store NO 4376
»P11.10 [➙99]« Setpoint Filter 1st Ord 2s 4378
»P11.11 [➙99]« Setpoint Filter 2nd Ord 0s 4379
»P11.12 [➙99]« KP Adaptation 1 4644
»P11.13 [➙99]« Setpoint Threshold 0 % Io 4805
»P11.14 [➙99]« S: P-Component 0.033 s/% 4687
»P11.15 [➙99]« S: I-Component 3s 4688
»P11.16 [➙99]« S: Threshold Response 0.1 % 4689
»P11.17 [➙99]« Compensation Element 0 1/s 4690
12 - Analog Outputs

»P12.01 [➙103]« AO: Setpoint n/a 4385
»P12.02 [➙103]« Setpoint Offset 4 mA 4386
»P12.03 [➙103]« Setpoint Range 20 mA 4387
»P12.04 [➙103]« AO: Actual Flow Rate n/a 4388
»P12.05 [➙103]« Flow Rate Offset 4 mA 4389
»P12.06 [➙103]« Flow Rate Range 20 mA 4390
»P12.07 [➙103]« AO: Load n/a 4401
»P12.08 [➙103]« Load Offset 4 mA 4402
»P12.09 [➙103]« Load Range 20 mA 4403
»P12.10 [➙103]« AO: Deviation n/a 4397
»P12.11 [➙103]« Deviation Offset 4 mA 4398
»P12.12 [➙103]« Deviation Range 20 mA 4399
»P12.13 [➙103]« AO: Motor Speed Control AO 4400
13 - Digital Inputs

Parameters
»P13.01 [➙105]« Event: External Event 1 * A 4417
»P13.02 [➙105]« DI: External Event 1 * DI 4418
»P13.03 [➙105]« Event: External Event 2 * A 4430
»P13.04 [➙105]« DI: External Event 2 * DI 4431
»P13.05 [➙105]« Event: External Event 3 IG 4730
»P13.06 [➙105]« DI: External Event 3 n/a 4731
»P13.07 [➙105]« Event: External Event 4 IG 4732
»P13.08 [➙105]« DI: External Event 4 DI 4733
»P13.09 [➙105]« Event: NAMUR Error VCU1-DI6 A 4409
»P13.10 [➙105]« Event: NAMUR Error VCU1-DI7 A 4410
»P13.11 [➙105]« Event: NAMUR Error VCU2-DI6 IG 4411
»P13.15 [➙105]« DI: Acknowledge Events n/a 4419
»P13.16 [➙105]« DI: Local Mode n/a 4420
»P13.17 [➙105]« DI: Volumetric Mode n/a 4421
»P13.18 [➙105]« DI: Volumetric synchron n/a 4941
»P13.19 [➙105]« DI: Reset Totalizer 1 n/a 5414
»P13.20 [➙105]« DI: Reset Totalizer 2 n/a 5415
»P13.21 [➙105]« Event: NAMUR Error VMO1-DI7 IG 5895
»P13.22 [➙105]« Event: NAMUR Error VMO2-DI7 IG 5896
14 - Digital Outputs

»P14.01 [➙108]« DO: Feeder Started DO 4434
»P14.02 [➙108]« DO: Start Prefeeder DO 4435
»P14.03 [➙108]« DO: ALARM DO 4436
»P14.04 [➙108]« DO: Deviation n/a 4437
»P14.05 [➙108]« DO: Actual Flow Rate MIN n/a 4438
»P14.06 [➙108]« DO: Actual Flow Rate MAX n/a 4439
»P14.07 [➙108]« DO: Volumetric Mode n/a 4444
»P14.08 [➙108]« DO: Local Mode n/a 4445

Parameters
»P14.09 [➙108]« DO: WARNING n/a 4759
»P14.10 [➙108]« DO: Keyboard Mode n/a 4462
15 - Batch Mode
»P15.01 [➙110]« Batch Mode NO 4448
»P15.02 [➙110]« Batch Setpoint Source OP 4449
»P15.03 [➙110]« Adaptation Mode Ramp 5426
»P15.04 [➙110]« Correction Amount 0 kg 4451
»P15.05 [➙110]« Adaptation Factor 0.5 4452
»P15.06 [➙110]« Batch Automatic Record NO 4453
»P15.07 [➙110]« DI: Batch Terminate n/a 4454
»P15.08 [➙110]« DO: Batch Running n/a 4455
»P15.09 [➙110]« DO: Dribble Feed n/a 4456
»P15.10 [➙110]« DO: Full Feed n/a 4457
»P15.12 [➙110]« Analog Setpoint Relat. 1000 kg 4936
»P15.13 [➙110]« Batch Setpoint Range 20 mA 4937
»P15.14 [➙110]« Batch Setpoint Offset 4 mA 4938
»P15.15 [➙110]« Adaptation Time 3s 4450
»P15.16 [➙110]« Adaption Start Value 300 % Io 5382
»P15.17 [➙110]« Time Dribble Feed 2 0% 5428
»P15.18 [➙110]« Value Dribble Feed 2 0% 5427
»P15.19 [➙110]« DO: Dribble Feed 2 n/a 5429
»P15.20 [➙110]« Batch Tolerance 100000 kg 4458
»P15.21 [➙110]« Event: Out of Tolerance W2 4459
»P15.24 [➙110]« Batch Setpoint Limit 1000000 kg 4781
»P15.25 [➙110]« Event: Batch setpoint Limit W1 4782
»P15.26 [➙110]« Batch behaviour after power down Cancel 4601
16 - Maintenance interval
»P16.01 [➙113]« Maintenance Electric 3000 h 4465
»P16.02 [➙113]« Event: Maint. Electric IG 4466
»P16.03 [➙113]« Maintenance Feeder Run 3000 h 4467
»P16.04 [➙113]« Event: Maint.Feeder Run IG 4468

Parameters
»P16.05 [➙113]« Event: Wrong System Time W2 4469
17 - Communication EasyServe
»P17.01 [➙114]« Own Address 1 4520
»P17.02 [➙114]« Baud Rate 38400 4521
»P17.03 [➙114]« Format Data 8-N-1 6189
18 - Communication Fieldbus
»P18.01 [➙114]« Protocol Type NO 4528
»P18.02 [➙114]« Timeout Host 10 s 4529
»P18.03 [➙114]« Event: Cyclic Communication A 4530
»P18.04 [➙114]« Event: Acyclic Communication W2 5680
»P18.05 [➙114]« Check in Keyboard Mode YES 6234
»P18.06 [➙114]« Compatibility DISOCONT Master NO 6287
»P18.07 [➙114]« Word Sequence I:std/L:std 6246
»P18.08 [➙114]« Byte Sequence High - Low 6245
»P18.09 [➙114]« Configuration FIXED_8_16 4661
»P18.10 [➙114]« Address 1 4531
»P18.11 [➙114]« Resolution 4096 4533
»P18.12 [➙114]« Baud rate 19200 4535
»P18.13 [➙114]« Data Format 8-O-1 4656
»P18.14 [➙114]« Physics RS232 6186
»P18.15 [➙114]« Address 16 4539
»P18.16 [➙114]« FLOAT-Format IEEE 4540
»P18.17 [➙114]« Address 63 4541
»P18.18 [➙114]« Baud rate 125K 4542
»P18.19 [➙114]« Parameter NO 4658
»P18.20 [➙114]« Preset Count 2 4734
»P18.21 [➙114]« READ_ID Count 6 4659
»P18.22 [➙114]« Access Rights Limitation FB NO 4786
»P18.23 [➙114]« Remote IP Address FB 192.168.240.250 4787
»P18.24 [➙114]« Configuration * PARA_ID_6_15 5923
19 - Fixed mode configuration

Parameters
»P19.01 [➙118]« ID Preset Value 1 320 6247
»P19.02 [➙118]« ID Preset Value 2 352 6248
»P19.03 [➙118]« ID Preset Value 3 384 6249
»P19.04 [➙118]« ID Preset Value 4 592 6250
»P19.05 [➙118]« ID Preset Value 5 594 6251
»P19.06 [➙118]« ID Preset Value 6 610 6252
»P19.07 [➙118]« ID Preset Value 7 0 6253
»P19.08 [➙118]« ID Preset Value 8 0 6254
»P19.09 [➙118]« ID Read Value 1 752 6256
»P19.10 [➙118]« ID Read Value 2 784 6257
»P19.11 [➙118]« ID Read Value 3 1552 6258
»P19.12 [➙118]« ID Read Value 4 1872 6259
»P19.13 [➙118]« ID Read Value 5 1874 6260
»P19.14 [➙118]« ID Read Value 6 1882 6261
»P19.15 [➙118]« ID Read Value 7 1890 6262
»P19.16 [➙118]« ID Read Value 8 1894 6263
»P19.17 [➙118]« ID Read Value 9 816 6264
»P19.18 [➙118]« ID Read Value 10 1876 6265
»P19.19 [➙118]« ID Read Value 11 1906 6266
»P19.20 [➙118]« ID Read Value 12 1960 6267
»P19.21 [➙118]« ID Read Value 13 1896 6268
»P19.22 [➙118]« ID Read Value 14 1898 6269
»P19.23 [➙118]« ID Read Value 15 1902 6270
»P19.24 [➙118]« ID Read Value 16 1904 6271
20 - Ethernet
»P20.01 [➙120]« IP Address 192.168.240.1 6235
»P20.02 [➙120]« Net Mask 255.255.255.0 6236
»P20.03 [➙120]« Gateway 0.0.0.0 6237
21 - PLC Outputs

»P21.01 [➙120]« DO: PLC 1 n/a 4662

Parameters
»P21.02 [➙120]« DO: PLC 2 n/a 4663
»P21.03 [➙120]« DO: PLC 3 n/a 4664
»P21.04 [➙120]« DO: PLC 4 n/a 4665
»P21.05 [➙120]« DO: PLC 5 n/a 4666
»P21.06 [➙120]« DO: PLC 6 n/a 4667
»P21.07 [➙120]« DO: PLC 7 n/a 4668
»P21.08 [➙120]« DO: PLC 8 n/a 4669
»P21.09 [➙120]« AO: PLC 1 n/a 4670
»P21.10 [➙120]« AO: PLC 2 n/a 4671
»P21.23 [➙120]« Position at STOP 0 5907
22 - Bin Weigher

»P22.01 [➙121]« Bin Weigher Active NO 4704
»P22.02 [➙121]« LC: Load Measurement n/a 4705
»P22.03 [➙121]« LC Characteristic Value 2 mV/V 4706
»P22.04 [➙121]« LC Rated Capacity 1000 kg 4707
»P22.05 [➙121]« LC Filter 0.25 s 4708
»P22.06 [➙121]« Bipolar Measurement NO 4712
»P22.07 [➙121]« Event: Error LC Input (Bin) W1 4709
»P22.08 [➙121]« Event: LC Input > MAX (Bin) W1 4710
»P22.09 [➙121]« Bin capacity 100 % LC 4711
»P22.10 [➙121]« Display Format ---.--- t 4672
»P22.11 [➙121]« Display Filter 3s 4713
»P22.12 [➙121]« Control Level MIN 60 % 4714
»P22.13 [➙121]« Control Level MAX 70 % 4715
»P22.14 [➙121]« DO: Bin Filling n/a 4716
»P22.15 [➙121]« Bin Level MIN 5% 4717
»P22.16 [➙121]« Event: Bin Level MIN W1 4718
»P22.17 [➙121]« DO: Bin Level MIN n/a 4719
»P22.18 [➙121]« Bin Level MAX 120 % 4720
»P22.19 [➙121]« Event: Bin Level MAX W1 4721
»P22.20 [➙121]« DO: Bin Level MAX n/a 4722
»P22.21 [➙121]« AO: Bin Load n/a 4723

Parameters
»P22.22 [➙121]« AO: Offset 4 mA 4724
»P22.23 [➙121]« AO: Range 20 mA 4725
»P22.24 [➙121]« Range Correction 1 4726
»P22.25 [➙121]« Tare (Bin) 0 kg 4727
»P22.26 [➙121]« Calibration Weight 10 kg 4728
»P22.27 [➙121]« Controller in OFF-Mode NO 4755
»P22.28 [➙121]« DI: Bin Load Sensor n/a 5401
»P22.29 [➙121]« Event: Bin Load MAX Sensor W1 5402
»P22.30 [➙121]« Bin Level analog Input Offset 4 mA 4825
»P22.31 [➙121]« Bin Level analog Input Range 20 mA 4826
23 - Bin Level Controller

»P23.01 [➙127]« Bin Controller ON NO 4735
»P23.02 [➙127]« Filling Type YES 4736
»P23.03 [➙127]« AO: Controller Magnitude Bin Level n/a 4738
»P23.04 [➙127]« DO: Feeder ON n/a 4758
»P23.05 [➙127]« Setpoint Bin Level 0 kg 4757
»P23.06 [➙127]« Feeder Constant 0 (kg/h)/mA 4741
»P23.07 [➙127]« Dead Time TT 3s 4742
»P23.08 [➙127]« P-Component KP 0 mA/kg 4739
»P23.09 [➙127]« I-Component TN 0s 4740
»P23.10 [➙127]« D Portion TV 0s 4747
»P23.11 [➙127]« D Filter TD 0s 4748
»P23.12 [➙127]« Bypass 10 mA 4743
»P23.13 [➙127]« Bypass D Portion 0s 4749
»P23.14 [➙127]« Controller Magnitude Offset 0 mA 4744
»P23.15 [➙127]« Lower Limit 0 mA 4745
»P23.16 [➙127]« Upper Limit 20 mA 4746
»P23.17 [➙127]« Dead Band Deviation 0 kg 4750
»P23.18 [➙127]« Dead Band Factor 0 4751
»P23.19 [➙127]« Setpoint Filter 0.5 s 4752
»P23.20 [➙127]« Flow Rate Filter 0.5 s 4753
»P23.21 [➙127]« DI: Init. Controller n/a 4754

Parameters
»P23.22 [➙127]« Bin Setpoint source PARAMETER 5476
»P23.24 [➙127]« Stepper no Stepper 5549
»P23.25 [➙127]« S: P-Component 0.033 s/% 5550
»P23.26 [➙127]« S: I-Component 3s 5551
»P23.27 [➙127]« S: D-Component 0s 5552
»P23.28 [➙127]« S: Threshold Resp. 0.1 % 5553
»P23.29 [➙127]« S: Compensation Element 0 1/s 5554
»P23.30 [➙127]« S: DO Open Flow Gate (B) n/a 5555
»P23.31 [➙127]« S: DO Close Flow Gate (B) n/a 5556
»P23.32 [➙127]« AI: Position Flow Gate (B) n/a 5557
»P23.33 [➙127]« AI: Offset (B) 4 mA 5558
»P23.34 [➙127]« AI: Range (B) 20 mA 5559
»P23.35 [➙127]« AO: Position Flow Gate (B) n/a 5560
»P23.36 [➙127]« AO: Offset (B) 4 mA 5561
»P23.37 [➙127]« AO: Range (B) 20 mA 5562
»P23.38 [➙127]« Event: MIN Flow Gate (B) W2 5563
»P23.39 [➙127]« Position MIN Flow Gate (B) n/a 5564
»P23.40 [➙127]« Event: MAX Flow Gate (B) W2 5565
»P23.41 [➙127]« Position MAX Flow Gate(B) n/a 5566
24 - Check System

»P24.01 [➙133]« Type of Check System NO 4861
»P24.02 [➙133]« Auto Correction NO 4903
»P24.03 [➙133]« Cyclic Auto Start NO 4862
»P24.04 [➙133]« Cycle Time 0.5 h 4863
»P24.05 [➙133]« Release Check System n/a 4864
»P24.06 [➙133]« Event: No Check Release W2 4884
»P24.07 [➙133]« Check Start Span OP 4865
»P24.08 [➙133]« Check Start Tare OP 4866
»P24.09 [➙133]« Accept Correction OP 4867
»P24.10 [➙133]« Finish Check Measurement OP 4868
»P24.11 [➙133]« Check Quantity 0 kg 4871
»P24.12 [➙133]« Storage Quantity 500 kg 4872

Parameters
»P24.13 [➙133]« Minimum Fill Weight 0 kg 4875
»P24.14 [➙133]« Event: Minimum Fill Weight W1 4876
»P24.15 [➙133]« Maximum Fill Weight 1000 kg 4877
»P24.16 [➙133]« Event: Maximum Fill Weight W1 4878
»P24.17 [➙133]« Damping Time 3s 4879
»P24.18 [➙133]« DO: Control Started n/a 4881
»P24.19 [➙133]« Feeder Stopped n/a 4882
»P24.20 [➙133]« Event: Feeder Not Stopped W1 4883
»P24.21 [➙133]« Event: Prepare Check Measurement W2 4885
»P24.22 [➙133]« DO: Check Measurement Active n/a 4887
»P24.23 [➙133]« Event: Expect Acceptance W2 4888
»P24.24 [➙133]« DO:Expect Acceptance n/a 4889
»P24.25 [➙133]« Absolute Range 10 % 4890
»P24.26 [➙133]« Relative Range 3% 4891
»P24.27 [➙133]« Event: Absolute Tare Correction Error W1 4892
»P24.28 [➙133]« Event: Relative Tare Correction Error W1 4893
»P24.29 [➙133]« Event: Absolute Span Correction Error W1 4894
»P24.30 [➙133]« Event: Relative Span Correction Error W1 4895
»P24.31 [➙133]« Correction Evaluation 1 4896
»P24.32 [➙133]« Correction Speed 0s 4897
»P24.33 [➙133]« AO: Check Measurement Result n/a 4898
»P24.34 [➙133]« DO: Check Gate n/a 4899
»P24.35 [➙133]« Check Gate Feedback n/a 4900
»P24.36 [➙133]« Check Gate Time 0s 4901
»P24.37 [➙133]« Event: Check Gate Error W1 4902
»P24.38 [➙133]« Limit Max. Bin Error 0% 4946
»P24.39 [➙133]« Event: Bin Error W1 4947
»P24.40 [➙133]« DO: Correction Error n/a 4904
25 - Moisture

»P25.01 [➙140]« Moisture Active NO 5386
»P25.02 [➙140]« Moisture Select n/a 5399
»P25.03 [➙140]« AI: Moisture Measurement n/a 5387

Parameters
»P25.04 [➙140]« Nominal Moisture 20 % 5388
»P25.05 [➙140]« Moisture Offset 4 mA 5389
»P25.06 [➙140]« Moisture Range 20 mA 5390
»P25.07 [➙140]« DO: Moisture active n/a 5400
»P25.08 [➙140]« Moisture MAX 10 % 5391
»P25.09 [➙140]« DO: Moisture MAX n/a 5392
»P25.10 [➙140]« Event: Moisture MAX W1 5393
»P25.11 [➙140]« AO: Flow Rate corrected n/a 5394
»P25.12 [➙140]« AO: Flow Rate Offset 4 mA 5395
»P25.13 [➙140]« AO: Flow Rate Range 20 mA 5396
»P25.14 [➙140]« Pulse Counter corrected NO 5397
26 - Additional device

»P26.01 [➙143]« Auto Zero Active NO 4675
»P26.02 [➙143]« Auto Zero Limit 2%Q 5478
»P26.03 [➙143]« Event: Tare Correction W1 4678
»P26.04 [➙143]« Zero Drop-Out Active NO 4679
»P26.05 [➙143]« Zero Drop-Out Limit 1 % Io 4680
»P26.06 [➙143]« DO: Agitator ON n/a 4654
»P26.07 [➙143]« START Agitator 30 % Io 4572
27 - Dead Time

»P27.01 [➙144]« Dead Time Active NO 5403
»P27.02 [➙144]« Dead Time 0s 5404
»P27.03 [➙144]« Setpoint Select n/a 5405
»P27.04 [➙144]« Setpoint Clock ON n/a 5406
»P27.05 [➙144]« ON/OFF Select n/a 5407
»P27.06 [➙144]« ON/OFF Clock ON n/a 5408
»P27.07 [➙144]« Time Elements Preassign n/a 5409
»P27.08 [➙144]« Initialise Time Elements n/a 5410
»P27.09 [➙144]« DO: Dead Time Active n/a 5411
»P27.10 [➙144]« DO: Setpoint Active n/a 5412
»P27.11 [➙144]« DO: ON/OFF Active n/a 5413

Parameters
28 - Interlocking
»P28.01 [➙145]« DI: Event Mechanics 1 n/a 4760
»P28.06 [➙145]« DI: Event Electricity 1 n/a 4765
»P28.09 [➙145]« DO: Event Mechanics n/a 4768
»P28.10 [➙145]« Event: Mechanics W1 4769
»P28.11 [➙145]« DO: Event Electricity n/a 4770
»P28.12 [➙145]« Event: Electricity W1 4771
»P28.13 [➙145]« DO: Event Mechatronics 1 n/a 4772
»P28.14 [➙145]« DO: Event Mechatronics 2 n/a 4773
»P28.15 [➙145]« Event: Mechatronics W1 4774
»P28.16 [➙145]« DO: Ready n/a 4775
»P28.17 [➙145]« Event: Not Ready W1 4776
»P28.18 [➙145]« DO: Ready for Start n/a 4777
»P28.19 [➙145]« Event: Not Ready for Start W1 4778
29 - FCB analog outputs
»P29.01 [➙147]« FCB_AO 01 n/a 20481
»P29.02 [➙147]« Offset FCB_AO 1 4 mA 6272
»P29.03 [➙147]« Range FCB_AO 1 20 mA 6273
»P29.04 [➙147]« Reference FCB_AO 1 1000 6274
»P29.05 [➙147]« FCB_AO 02 n/a 20482
»P29.06 [➙147]« Offset FCB_AO 2 4 mA 6275
»P29.07 [➙147]« Range FCB_AO 2 20 mA 6276
»P29.09 [➙147]« FCB_AO 03 n/a 20483
»P29.10 [➙147]« Offset FCB_AO 3 4 mA 6278

Parameters
»P29.11 [➙147]« Range FCB_AO 3 20 mA 6279
»P29.13 [➙147]« FCB_AO 04 n/a 20484
»P29.14 [➙147]« Offset FCB_AO 4 4 mA 6281
»P29.15 [➙147]« Range FCB_AO 4 20 mA 6282
»P29.17 [➙147]« FCB_AO 05 n/a 20485
»P29.18 [➙147]« Offset FCB_AO 5 4 mA 6284
»P29.19 [➙147]« Range FCB_AO 5 20 mA 6285
»P29.21 [➙147]« FCB Variant Empty 5902
»P29.22 [➙147]« Event: FCB-Error A 5903
30 - FCB digital outputs
»P30.01 [➙150]« FCB_DO 01 n/a 20529
»P30.02 [➙150]« FCB_DO 02 n/a 20530
»P30.03 [➙150]« FCB_DO 03 n/a 20531
»P30.04 [➙150]« FCB_DO 04 n/a 20532
»P30.05 [➙150]« FCB_DO 05 n/a 20533
»P30.06 [➙150]« FCB_DO 06 n/a 20534
»P30.07 [➙150]« FCB_DO 07 n/a 20535
»P30.08 [➙150]« FCB_DO 08 n/a 20536
»P30.09 [➙150]« FCB_DO 09 n/a 20537
»P30.10 [➙150]« FCB_DO 10 n/a 20538
»P30.11 [➙150]« FCB_DO 11 n/a 20539
»P30.12 [➙150]« FCB_DO 12 n/a 20540
»P30.13 [➙150]« FCB_DO 13 n/a 20541
»P30.14 [➙150]« FCB_DO 14 n/a 20542
»P30.15 [➙150]« FCB_DO 15 n/a 20543
»P30.16 [➙150]« FCB_DO 16 n/a 20544
»P30.17 [➙150]« FCB_DO 17 n/a 20545
»P30.18 [➙150]« FCB_DO 18 n/a 20546
»P30.19 [➙150]« FCB_DO 19 n/a 20547

Parameters
»P30.20 [➙150]« FCB_DO 20 n/a 20548
31 - Data Logging
»P31.01 [➙152]« Hourly Total Time 0 min 5743
»P31.02 [➙152]« Daily Total Time 0 min 5744
»P31.03 [➙152]« Logger cycle time 1 min 6288
»P31.04 [➙152]« Data Log Value 1 752 6289
»P31.05 [➙152]« Data Log Value 2 755 6290
»P31.06 [➙152]« Data Log Value 3 1872 6291
»P31.07 [➙152]« Data Log Value 4 1874 6292
»P31.08 [➙152]« Data Log Value 5 1876 6293
»P31.09 [➙152]« Data Log Value 6 1894 6294
»P31.10 [➙152]« Data Log Value 7 1890 6295
»P31.11 [➙152]« Data Log Value 8 1898 6296
»P31.12 [➙152]« Data Log Value 9 1888 6297
»P31.13 [➙152]« Data Log Value 10 0 6298
32 - Configuration HMI Values

»P32.01 [➙153]« HMI Value 01 1872 6299
»P32.02 [➙153]« HMI Value 02 1894 6300
»P32.03 [➙153]« HMI Value 03 1900 6301
»P32.04 [➙153]« HMI Value 04 1946 6302
»P32.05 [➙153]« HMI Value 05 2012 6303
»P32.06 [➙153]« HMI Value 06 2358 6304
»P32.07 [➙153]« HMI Value 07 2044 6305
»P32.08 [➙153]« HMI Value 08 1904 6306
»P32.09 [➙153]« HMI Value 09 1874 6307
»P32.10 [➙153]« HMI Value 10 1876 6308
33 - Linearization
»P33.01 [➙154]« Linearization ON NO 4577
»P33.02 [➙154]« Linearization S1 25 % Io 4681
»P33.03 [➙154]« Linearization I1 25 % Io 4579

Parameters
»P33.10 [➙154]« Event: Linearization Error W2 4586
34 - Flow Gate

»P34.01 [➙156]« S: DO Open Flow Gate n/a 4702
»P34.02 [➙156]« S: DO Close Flow Gate n/a 4703
»P34.03 [➙156]« AI: Position Flow Gate n/a 4691
»P34.04 [➙156]« AI: Offset 4 mA 4692
»P34.05 [➙156]« AI: Range 20 mA 4693
»P34.06 [➙156]« AO: Position Flow Gate n/a 4694
»P34.07 [➙156]« AO: Offset 4 mA 4695
»P34.08 [➙156]« AO: Range 20 mA 4696
»P34.09 [➙156]« Event: MIN Flow Gate W2 4697
»P34.10 [➙156]« Position MIN Flow Gate n/a 4698
»P34.11 [➙156]« Event: MAX Flow Gate W2 4699
»P34.12 [➙156]« Position MAX Flow Gate n/a 4700
35 - Local Mode (Speed)
»P35.01 [➙157]« Motor Select (Block 1) VMO1 Motor1 5841
»P35.02 [➙157]« ON in Remote (Block 1) n/a 5842
»P35.03 [➙157]« Controller Magnitude (Block 1) n/a 5843
»P35.04 [➙157]« Controller Magnitude Offset (Block 1) 0 mA 5897
»P35.05 [➙157]« JOG enable (Block 1) NO 5844
»P35.06 [➙157]« Release local Start (Block 1) n/a 5845
»P35.07 [➙157]« DI: External Error 1 (Block 1) n/a 5846
»P35.10 [➙157]« DO: ON Motor (2nd) (Block 1) n/a 5849

Parameters
»P35.11 [➙157]« Motor Select (Block 2) VMO1 Motor2 5850
»P35.21 [➙157]« Motor Select (Block 3) not active 5859

Parameters
36 - Local Mode (Gate)

»P36.01 [➙163]« Motor Select VMO1 Motor5 5886
»P36.02 [➙163]« OPEN in Remote n/a 5887
»P36.03 [➙163]« DI: Limit Switch OPEN n/a 5888
»P36.04 [➙163]« CLOSE in Remote n/a 5889
»P36.05 [➙163]« DI: Limit Switch CLOSE n/a 5890
»P36.06 [➙163]« Release local Start n/a 5891
»P36.07 [➙163]« DI: External Error 1 n/a 5892
7.4.2 Parameter Details
7.4.2.1 Parameter Block 01 - Hardware Modules

A DISOCONT Tersus system can consist of no more than 3 VCU control units, several VHM operating pan-
els (OP) and as many as 2 VMO motor controls. A PC running the EasyServe program can be connected for
service purposes.
With the exception of EasyServe and the operating elements (VHM, OP) all of the units participating must be
signed on with the parameters in group P01.xx. Units that are not signed on are not functional and
EasyServe and the operating panels will not offer their inputs or outputs.
Furthermore, as many as 2 analog input or output assemblies (VAI or VAO) can be installed per VCU.
Caution:
For reasons of safety, communication defect messages should always be set to alarm (A) on units actively
involved in control and regulation.
P01.01 Analog Channel A10 Default: NO
Alternative: NO | AI1 (Analog In 1) | AO2 (Analog Out 2)
Defines the analog channel set at position A10 of the main VCU (= VCU1). The position is labeled to ease identification.
AIx: analog input VAI installed
AOx: analog output installed
x: number of the channel when the physical interface is assigned to a logical signals.

Parameters
P01.02 Analog Channel A11 Default: NO
Defines the analog channel set at position A11 of the main VCU (= VCU1). The position is labeled to ease identification.
P01.03 VCU20100-Unit 2 Default: NO
Alternative: NO | YES
Installation of the VCU 20100 input/output expansion with the local bus address 2 and VIO software.
P01.04 VCU2: Analog Channel A10 Default: NO
Defines the analog channel with local address 2 applied to position A10 on the main VCU. The position is labeled to ease identifi-
cation.
Defines the analog channel with local address 2 applied to position A11 on the main VCU. The position is labeled to ease identifi-
cation.
P01.06 Event: Communication VCU20100-Unit 2 Default: A
Event Group: SY Number: 02
This event is identified when communication with the VCU input/output expansion with VIO software and local bus address 2 is
disrupted. The cables and the address setting should be checked if an error occurs.
P01.07 VCU20100-Unit 3 Default: NO
Installation of the VCU 20100 input/output expansion with the local bus address 3 and VIO software.
Defines the analog channel applied to position A10 on the VCU with local address 3. The position is labeled to ease identification.
AOx: analog output VAO installed
Defines the analog channel applied to position A11 on the VCU with local address 3. The position is labeled to ease identification.
AOx: analog output VAO installed

Parameters
P01.10 Event: Communication VCU20100-Unit 3 Default: A
P01.11 VHM RS485 Address Default: 1
Min: 1 Max: 16
The parameter defines the address under which the VHM operating element can reach the scale via RS485 coupling.
P01.12 VMO20100-Unit 1 Default: NO
The first unit VMO 201xx is connected to the local bus. The address 11 must be set by parameter for this unit.
P01.13 Event: Communication VMO20100-Unit 1 Default: A
This event is identified when communication with the first local operating terminal VMO 201xx with local bus address 11 is disrupt-
ed. Check the cables and the address setting if an error occurs.
P01.14 VMO20100-Unit 2 Default: NO
Second VMO 201xx unit is connected to the local bus. The address 12 must be set by parameter for this unit.
P01.15 Event: Communication VMO20100-Unit 2 Default: A
This event is identified when communication with the second local operating terminal VMO 201xx with local bus address 12 is
disrupted. Check the cables and the address setting if an error occurs.
7.4.2.2 Parameter Block 02 - Dialog Behaviour

The parameters of this group define system behavior towards the operator and set access authorization.
P02.01 Language Default: ENGLISH
Alternative: DEUTSCH | ENGLISH | OTHER

Device dialog language. User-defined texts can be used if OTHER is selected. Texts can be written and loaded using EasyServe.
P02.02 Units Default: Metric
Alternative: Metric | English
Switches display and parameter entry units from metric (SI units) to non-metric systems ("Imperial Units", English). All values
entered will be converted automatically.
P02.03 Scale Name Default: DISOCONT Tersus VIF
Letters and characters can be used. The name appears in the upper row of the operating console and when searching through
networks for controllers.
Remark: The characters ";" and "=" are not accepted. During the saving procedure these characters will automatically be deleted.

Parameters
P02.04 Access Rights Limitation HMI Default: NO
Alternative: NO | REMOTE IP
The rights for controlling the scales from the operating console VHM or the user interface of a browser (HMI) connected via Ether-
net can be restricted. The restricted rights apply to the start and stop commands and the setpoint entry.
Alternatives:
NO: control commands are permitted from all operating locations
REMOTE IP: control commands are possible only from the operating console with the IP address listed in the following parame-
ters.
Also refer to:

P02.05 Remote IP Address HMI 1
...
P02.10 Event: Communication HMI 3
P02.05 Remote IP Address HMI 1 Default: 192.168.240.21
Address of the first operating panel from which control commands should be given.
The value 127.0.0.1 must be entered into at least one parameter of P02.05, P02.07 or P02.09 if a VHM is used for controlling via
RS485.
Also refer to:

P02.04 Access Rights Limitation HMI
P02.06 Event: Communication HMI 1 Default: IG
Error in the communication with the first DISOCONT operator panel.
Communication has been interrupted for longer than 10 s.
To rectify: check the cable connections and the address setting.
Address of the second operating panel from which control commands are to be given.
RS485.
Also refer to:

Error in communication with the second DISOCONT operating console.
The address of the third operating element that control commands are supposed to be given from.
RS485.
Also refer to:


Parameters
Error in the communication with the third DISOCONT operator panel.
P02.11 Event: Communication VHM serial Default: IG
This event is detected when the connection via the serial RS485 interface to a VHM operating panel is interrupted.
Causes of this event:

Scales receives no message from the operating console during a tolerance period
Steps:
- check cable connection
- check that operating console is correctly functioning
- check the operating console settings
- check the addresses of the scales at the RS485 data bus (P01.11 VHM RS485 Address)
P02.12 Password Default: 10000
Min: 1000 Max: 9999
Password 1 for access protection of certain functions on the operator panel as per the following parameters. Usually the 1st pass-
word is used for the service personnel and the 2nd password for operating personnel with particular privileges. When reading out
the parameter a numerical code instead of the password entered will be displayed for better protection. The password can be
reset using EasyServe if it should be forgotten.
Default password: 7353 (code displayed: 10000)
P02.13 2nd Password Default: 14389
Min: 1000 Max: 9999
Password 2 for access protection for certain functions on the operator panel as per the following parameters. Usually the 1st
password is used for the service personnel and the 2nd password for operating personnel with particular privileges. When reading
out the parameter a numerical code instead of the password entered will be displayed for better protection. The password can be
reset using EasyServe if it should be forgotten.
Default 2nd password: 2889 (code displayed: 14389)
P02.14 Reset Counter 1 Default: active
Alternative: active | not active | Password | 2.Password

Defines the access protection for using the operating console.
P02.15 Reset Counter 2 Default: active

P02.16 Batch control Default: active


Parameters
P02.17 Switch Grav./Vol. command Default: active

P02.18 Switch Keyboard-/Normal Mode Default: active

P02.19 Prefeeder start/stop Default: active

P02.20 Data Log ON/OFF Default: Password
Enables functions Start Data Logging , Stop Data Logging and Clear Data Log File.
Parameters see block Data Logging.
P02.21 Exit Scale Default: active

Defines the access protection for the function at the operator panel.
7.4.2.3 Parameter Block 03 - Device Definition

The parameters of this group configure basic functionality.
P03.01 Control Default: NO
Switch between feed rate control and simple measuring.
YES: metering, feed-rate regulating system

NO: measuring system
P03.02 Maximum Flow Rate Io Default: 200000 kg/h
Min: 0 kg/h Max: 220000000 kg/h

The nominal flow rate is a characteristic value of the scale that acts as a reference value for threshold values and service displays.
P03.03 Flow Rate Units Default: ----.- t/h
Alternative: ------ kg/h | ----.- kg/h | ---.-- kg/h | --.--- kg/h | ------ t/h | ----
.- t/h | ---.-- t/h | --.--- t/h | ----.-- kg/min | ----.-- g/min | -----.-
g/h | ----.-- g/h
Display format for setpoint and actual feed rate values.

With P02.02 Units = 'English' further alternatives are available.
P03.04 Counter 1 Unit Default: -----.- t
Alternative: ------- kg | -----.- kg | ----.-- kg | ---.--- kg | --.---- kg | -------

t | -----.- t | ----.-- t | ---.--- t | ------- g | -----.- g | ----.-- g
Display format for counter 1.


Parameters
P03.05 Counter 2 Unit Default: ------- t

t | -----.- t | ----.-- t | ---.--- t | ------- g | -----.- g | ----.-- g

P03.06 Counter 3 Unit Default: ------- t

t | -----.- t | ----.-- t | ---.--- t | ------- g | -----.- g | ----.-- g

P03.07 Pulse Length Total Default: 0.05 s
Min: 0 s Max: 10 s
Duration of an external totalizing counter output impulse.
The weighting of a pulse is defined by P03.09 Totalizer Increment.
If the impulse duration is shorter than 10 ms the impulse output is disabled. All impulses not issued yet are cleared.
The output frequency f is approximately Maximum Flow Rate Io:

f [Hz] = P03.02 / (3600 * P03.09)
The output frequency must be ≤ 10 Hz if an external counter is connected.
P03.08 DO: Pulse Counter Default: n/a
Alternative: n/a | DO
DO: Selecting the physical output for triggering an external pulse counter for the measured quantity. Bear in mind the limitations
on speed and life cycle when selecting a relay output in the report and set the weight equivalent for a pulse in P03.09 Totalizer
Increment. The duration of the impulse is set by P03.07 Pulse Length Total.
Pulse outputs with a frequency of 1 - 10 Hz are only possible via output DO8 on the main VCU (VCU 1). A maximum of 1 pulse per
second can be output at all other outputs.
P03.09 Totalizer Increment Default: 0 kg
Min: 0 kg Max: 100000 kg
Weight equivalent of an impulse at the output for the external counter as per P03.08 DO: Pulse Counter.
The DO: Pulse Counter is blocked when setting the value to '0'.
P03.10 Counter 1 Overflow Default: 999999999999 kg
Alternative: 999999999999 kg | 99999999999 kg | 9999999999

kg | 999999999 kg | 99999999 kg | 9999999 kg | 999999
kg
Definition of the value in kg or lb at which the counter will overrun and restart at zero.
Note: The value is transmitted to the fieldbus with 6 significant digits. The last decimal place as displayed on the counter on the
operating panel may jump by more than one unit if the counter overrun is set to a very large value. The counter's internal calcula-
tion however will continue to be exact to 12 significant digits.
If the resolution of the counter on the operating panel is very fine, a large overrun value may cause individual digits to be cut off.
The overrun may be required to be considered separately in the host computer for balancing purposes if the counter is queried via
fieldbus.

Parameters

kg | 999999999 kg | 99999999 kg | 9999999 kg | 999999
kg
fieldbus.

kg | 999999999 kg | 99999999 kg | 9999999 kg | 999999
kg
fieldbus.
7.4.2.4 Parameter Block 04 - Control Sources

The parameters of this group assign internal signals to the physical outputs.
P04.01 Feeder Start Default: FB
Alternative: FB | OP | DI
Specifies the device that will turn on the scales.
The digital input is flank-controlled, i.e., the ON signal must be removed and then reapplied if the scale becomes inoperative be-
cause of something like an alarm.
P04.02 Feedrate Setpoint Default: FB
Alternative: FB | OP | AI
Determines which signal input gives the flow rate setpoint.
P04.03 Setpoint Range Default: 20 mA
Min: 0 mA Max: 1000 mA
Input current for the analog setpoint of 100 % of the Maximum Flow Rate Io.
The range and offset parameters take effect only if P04.02 Feedrate Setpoint has been set to AI.
P04.04 Setpoint Offset Default: 4 mA
Min: -200 mA Max: 200 mA
Input current offset for an analog setpoint of 0 % of Maximum Flow Rate Io.
This parameter takes effect only if P04.02 Feedrate Setpoint has been set to AI.

Parameters
P04.05 Source Run Enable Default: n/a
Alternative: n/a | DI | FB
Determines the signal input that gives the scales release signal. This input is generally used for interlocking with downstream
transport equipment.
The setting 'n/a' means that no release is required.
P04.06 Event: Run Disabled Default: W2
Event Group: IL Number: 01
No release signal from the source determined by P04.05 Source Run Enable.
If this event is pending then the downstream transport equipment is most likely not switched on.
P04.07 Source Relative Setpoint Default: n/a
Alternative: n/a | OP | AI
A preset feed rate setpoint (compare P04.02 Feedrate Setpoint) can be percentaged by the VHM operating console or by an
analog input. This function is used if the system is to feed a percentage of an additional material to the original component.
For example:
P04.02 = AI
P04.07 = OP
The effective setpoint is the percentage component, entered into the operating console, of the absolute setpoint set through the
analog input.
If the setpoint is given as per P04.02 by the operating console (P04.02 = OP) or the scales are in keyboard mode P04.07 will have
no effect, i.e. the setpoint entered at the operating console works as entered.
P04.08 Relativer Setpoint Range Default: 20 mA
Effective only when P04.07 Source Relative Setpoint = AI.
Current at the analog input for entry 100%.
P04.09 Relative Setpoint Offset Default: 4 mA
Effective only when P04.07 Source Relative Setpoint = AI.
Current at the analog input for an input of 0%.
7.4.2.5 Parameter Block 05 - Rated Data

The parameters of this group describe important characteristic values of the scales' mechanics.
P05.01 LC: Load Measurement Default: LC VCU1.LC1
Alternative: LC | AI | FB | n/a
The definition of the input channel for measuring the force that constitutes a measure of the flow rate.
P05.02 LC Characteristic Value Default: 2 mV/V
Min: 0.01 mV/V Max: 10 mV/V

Characteristic value (transmission factor) of the load cell of the (main) weighbridge.

Parameters
P05.03 Load Cell 1 analog Input Offset Default: 4 mA
Only relevant if P05.01 LC: Load Measurement = AI.
The input current for an internal value of the load of 0 %.
Also refer to:

P05.01 LC: Load Measurement
P05.04 Load Cell 1 analog Input Range
P05.04 Load Cell 1 analog Input Range Default: 20 mA
Only relevant if P05.01 LC: Load Measurement = AI.
The current for the value set in P05.05 LC Rated Capacity.
Also refer to:

P05.05 LC Rated Capacity Default: 100 kg
Min: 0.1 kg Max: 220000000 kg

The total of the load cell rated loads for recording the weight.
P05.06 Device Constant Default: 0.04 kgh/t
Min: 0.001 kgh/t Max: 1 kgh/t
This parameter describes the transfer response of the meter from the mass flow rate to the measuring force in kg. You can find
this value in the instrument's datasheet.
7.4.2.6 Parameter Block 06 - Feeder control

The parameters of this group describe the control functions of the basic functionality.
P06.01 Volumetric Start-Up Default: 0 s
Min: 0 s Max: 3600 s
Length of time it takes to begin volumetric operation once the scales have been switched on. If selected, feeding will switch to
gravimetric operation once the startup time has past.
This function improves the startup with an empty feeder.

The optional speed controller is also active during startup.
P06.02 Afterflow Measurement Time Default: 3 s
When the feeder is shut off, the feedrate calculation and totalization continues for this period of time to also measure material still
in motion.
7.4.2.7 Parameter Block 07 - Feeder Monitoring

This parameter group can be used to cause various feeder operating conditions either to produce an alarm
(A) and trip the feeder or to produce a warning (W1 or W2).

Parameters
P07.01 Event: Stand-By Default: W2
Event Group: SC Number: 02
Scales are in standby operation, i.e. the controller magnitude to the feed drive is smaller than the threshold value set in P07.02
Stand-By Limit Value. The feeder drive is switched off. The 'running' state will still be displayed.
This function protects the motor from overheating at very low speeds or when idling.
Actions:
Key in the larger setpoint and check P07.02 Stand-By Limit Value.
P07.02 Stand-By Limit Value Default: 0 % Io
Min: 0 % Io Max: 100 % Io
If the controller magnitude is below the threshold value, the feed drive is switched off to protect the motor from overheating.
Also refer to: P07.01 Event: Stand-By
P07.03 Event: Error LC Input Default: A
Event Group: CA Number: 01
The load cell cable is improperly connected, not connected or has been interrupted. The load cell may be faulty.
Actions:
- Check cabling
- check the load cell
Note:
The power supply must be switched off and on again if the scales still cannot be switched on even after the error has been recti-
fied.
P07.04 Event: LC Input < MIN Default: A
Event Group: LO Number: 01
The load cell load is less than 3 % of the sum of the load cell nominal loads.
Possible causes:
- force shunts or pressure ratios can reduce significantly the load on the load cell
- incorrect cabling
- faulty load cell
P07.05 Event: LC Input > MAX Default: A
Event Group: HI Number: 01
The load acting on the load cell is greater than 110 % of the sum of the nominal loads of the load cells.
Measuring range end:

125 % for load cells with 2.85 mV/V
175 % for load cells with 2 mV/V
Possible causes:
- Shunt forces or compression ratios bring about incorrect load cell loading
- incorrect cabling
- faulty load cell

Parameters
P07.06 Event: Setpoint Limited Default: W1
Cause of the event:

Depending on the respective mode of operation:
a) The setpoint is limited to P03.02 Maximum Flow Rate Io in gravimetric operation.
b) The setpoint is limited to three times the value of P03.02 Maximum Flow Rate Io in volumetric operation.
P07.07 Event: Power Failure Default: A
Event Group: WE Number: 01
This event is identified once the power supply is restored.
The scales will not switch on automatically regardless of the event class. The event must first be acknowledged and the command
to start given again before the scales will restart.
P07.08 Time Deviation Default: 20 s
Min: 0 s Max: 600 s
Duration for which a control deviation above the threshold in P07.09 Threshold Deviation will be tolerated. The event 'control
deviation' is identified once the time has been exceeded.
Simultaneously P07.08 Time Deviation functions as a time constant for the filter that contains the value of the control deviation. A
'control deviation' event is also identified if the filtered result exceeds the threshold value P07.11 Deviation abs. max..
See also:
P07.09 Threshold Deviation
P07.10 Factor Deviation
P07.11 Deviation abs. max.
P07.12 Event: Deviation
P07.09 Threshold Deviation Default: 5 %
Min: 0 % Max: 100 %
Maximum permissible control deviation.

Reference: P03.02 Maximum Flow Rate Io.
Also refer to: P07.08 Time Deviation; P07.12 Event: Deviation
P07.10 Factor Deviation Default: 1
Min: 0 Max: 1
The event message will be given as per P07.12 Event: Deviation if the absolute value of the control deviation for the duration
P07.08 Time Deviation is greater than the threshold P07.09 Threshold Deviation. Alternatively the event is recognized when the
filtered amount of control deviation is in excess of the limit in P07.11 Deviation abs. max..
At a setpoint of 100 %, the effective threshold is always equal to the parameter
P07.09 Threshold Deviation or P07.11 Deviation abs. max.. The threshold can be reduced with parameter P07.10 Factor Devia-
tion for lower setpoints. The corresponding formula can be found in the appendix.
Examples:
P07.10 = 0: Effective threshold = P07.09 × Setpoint / P03.02
Note: set P07.10 > 0.1 if you want the feeder to work down to very low feed rates.
P07.10 = 1: Effective threshold = P07.09
P07.11 Deviation abs. max. Default: 100 %
Min: 0.1 % Max: 1000 %
The amount of the control deviation will be filtered (filter time constant: P07.08 Time Deviation). If the filter output exceeds the limit
set here a 'control deviation' event will be identified (P07.12 Event: Deviation). The filter is reset when the scales are switched off.

Parameters
P07.12 Event: Deviation Default: A
Maximum Deviation exceeded. The actual feed rate has deviated to far from the setpoint over too long a period of time.
Possible causes:
1. Material has been incorrectly handled:

- the bulk material is flowing irregularly or cannot be discharged satisfactorily
- arching in the feed hopper
- there is a backup on the discharge side
- a large quantity of material continues to trickle from the feeder
2. The controller has at times come against its limits:

- error in the electronics
- check the cable to the external output regulator and to the motor. Check the output regulator settings (current limiting,
speed range).
3. Calibration error:
- The controller was set at such a critical value during initial calibration that minor changes in the bulk solids of the system
lead to unreliable operation.
Also refer to:

P07.08 Time Deviation
P07.13 Event: Controller Limited Default: W2
Event Group: CO Number: 01
The Controller Magnitude of the feed rate regulator has reached the upper response threshold. After a time message HI05
(P07.12) will be output.
1. No material is flowing or material flow is irregular.
2. The external output regulator has been incorrectly set.
Step to take: check the material discharge and the Controller Magnitude (service value Y). At Maximum Flow Rate Io Y should be
between about 10...14 mA.
P07.14 Event: Memory Default: A
The program and parameters memory are checked cyclically. An error has occurred during that. The scales will no longer function
correctly.
Steps to take:
- load the factory settings
- Normally the hardware has to be replaced.
P07.15 Event: Analog Input < Offset Default: A
One of the analog inputs has a smaller signal than the zero-point offset that was set.
A tolerance of 0.4 mA has been set to avoid constant setting and clearing of the input signal, in case this input signal should hap-
pen to be unsettled.

Parameters
P07.16 Source Emergency Setpoint Default: n/a
If the emergency setpoint is activated, setpoints greater than the emergency setpoint (P07.17 Emergency Setpoint) are limited to
its value.
The message SC01 is triggered (P07.06 Event: Setpoint Limited). A setpoint entered by keyboard is automatically limited to the
emergency setpoint.
P07.17 Emergency Setpoint Default: 6000 kg/h
Min: 0 kg/h Max: 220000000 kg/h
If the emergency setpoint is activated (input P07.16 Source Emergency Setpoint), setpoints greater than the emergency setpoint
(P07.17) are limited to its value.
The message SC01 is triggered (P07.06 Event: Setpoint Limited). A setpoint entered by keyboard is automatically limited to the
emergency setpoint.
7.4.2.8 Parameter Block 08 - Filters

The parameters of this group define the time constants of the filters for measurement and display.
All filters are of the 1st order (exponentially), i.e. approximately 2/3 of the final value is reached after the time
set if there is an abrupt change in the signal.
Long times result in a smooth, slowly-updating display.
P08.01 LC Filter Default: 0.25 s
Min: 0.25 s Max: 300 s
The load cell filters affects all load cell related measuring values. In general this value should be left at the factory setting.
Note: filtering the load cell signal also effects the regulating action.
P08.02 Filter: Actual Flow Rate Default: 3 s
Min: 0 s Max: 600 s
Filter time constant for the display and for outputs of the actual flow rate at the operating element, EasyServe and fieldbus. Has no
effect on the feeder regulation.
P08.03 Filter: Actual Flow Rate analog Default: 3 s
Min: 0 s Max: 600 s
Filter time constant for the 'actual flow rate' analog output. The filter can have an impact on the control characteristics with an
externally closed control circuit through the analog value.
P08.04 Filter: Load Default: 3 s
Min: 0 s Max: 600 s
Filter time constant for the display of the load on the load cell. The filter only has an impact on the display, not on the further pro-
cessing of the signal for determining the flow rate and quantity measured.
P08.05 Filter: Deviation Default: 3 s
Min: 0 s Max: 600 s

Filter time constant for all displays and printouts of the control deviation.
7.4.2.9 Parameter Block 09 - Limit Values

The parameters of this group define the limits for process values and specify the event classes of the asso-
ciated events.

Parameters
Events that can only occur with regular feed operation are only monitored 10 s after beginning feed opera-
tion.
P09.01 Limit: Actual Flow Rate MIN Default: 5 % Io
Min: -10 % Io Max: 200 % Io
Lower threshold for the actual feed rate.
Reference: P03.02 Maximum Flow Rate Io
P09.02 Event: Actual Flow Rate MIN Default: W1
The actual feed rate is lower than the minimum value P09.01 Limit: Actual Flow Rate MIN.
Possible causes:
- no bulk material
- disturbance forces from force shunts or pressures acting on the weighing equipment
- feed rate setpoint too low
P09.03 Limit: Actual Flow Rate MAX Default: 120 % Io
Min: -10 % Io Max: 200 % Io
Upper threshold for the actual feed rate.
P09.04 Event: Actual Flow Rate MAX Default: W1
Actual feed rate greater than the maximum value set in P09.03 Limit: Actual Flow Rate MAX
Possible causes:
- bulk material shooting out of the discharge chute
- Output setpoint too large
7.4.2.10 Parameter Block 10 - Calibration Data

The parameters of this group contain the setpoints for setup programs and their outputs. Adjustment values
that have been lost can be completely reconstructed by entering earlier values.
If replacements are made it is sufficient to load the previously set parameters into the new unit. No readjust-
ment is necessary.
P10.01 Range Correction Default: 1
Min: 0.5 Max: 2
The parameter affects the load measurement F proportionally.

Q(corrected) = Q(measured) * P10.01
P10.02 Basic Tare Default: 0 kg
Min: -1000000 kg Max: 1000000 kg

The result of the TW: Tare calibration program in accordance with the dead weight without the flow of bulk solids.
P10.03 Tare Correction Default: 0 kg
Min: -10000 kg Max: 10000 kg

The results of the >0< Zero Set calibration program or automatic zero setting.

Parameters
P10.04 Zeroing Limit Default: 5 % Q
Min: 0 % Q Max: 100 % Q
Maximum permissible value of the sum of all zeroing operations of the manual or automatic zeroing system.
Reference: Nominal Belt Load (Service value)
P10.05 Calibration Time Default: 30 s

Duration of the adjustment program.
P10.06 Tare Correction Check Default: 0 kg
Min: -1000000 kg Max: 1000000 kg

The parameter contains the results of the tare correction from the automatic check measurement.
P10.07 Calibration Weight Default: 1 kg
Min: 0.001 kg Max: 22000 kg
The calibration weight serves to control the weighing system. so that the calibration program CW: Span Calibration is run without
bulk solids flowing.
The test weight as it acts on the load cell is keyed in.
P10.08 Material Correction Default: 1
Min: 0.5 Max: 2
The correction factor for the measured flow rate ascertained with a check measurement using bulk solids. This parameter can be
set manually or by automatic check measurement (KME) with DISOCONT Tersus.
Also refer to: Chapt. 'Appendix' → 'Measuring the flow rate'
7.4.2.11 Parameter Block 11 - Rate controller

The parameters of this group define the behavior of the feed rate controller.
Also refer to the controller block diagrams in the appendices.
P11.01 Controller Type Default: Continuous
Alternative: Continuous | Stepping
Choose a controller model
Continuous: The controller generally calculates a continuous controller magnitude as an analogous value. If position-controlled
prefeeders are used, the position has to be controlled externally according to the specifications from the continuous value.
Stepping: The controller controls the position of a position-controlled prefeeder with the digital Open and Close outputs.
Also refer to: the appendix for details on the controller models

Parameters
P11.02 P-Component KP Default: 0.02 mA/%
Min: 0 mA/% Max: 1000 mA/%
Proportional component of the feed rate regulator.
Special case: KP = 0 results in an I-regulator
Reference value: P03.02 Maximum Flow Rate Io
Also refer to:

A regulator block diagram can be found in the appendices
P11.03 I-Component TN Default: 3 s
Min: 0 s Max: 60000 s
Controller readjusting time.
TN is the reciprocal value of the integration constants KI, i.e. a larger value means a slower controller.
KI = 1/TN
TN in %/(mA/s)
TN = 0 results in a proportional controller.
Also refer to:

A regulator block diagram can be found in the appendix
P11.04 Lower Limit Default: 0 mA
Lower limit for the regulator actuating variable.
If transfer is made with currents from 4 ... 20 mA, the parameter should be set at least to 4 mA. P11.06 Controller Magnitude
Offset must be set to a value equal to or greater than P11.04 Lower Limit.
Also refer to: P11.06 Controller Magnitude Offset
P11.05 Upper Limit Default: 20 mA
Upper limit for the regulator actuating variable.
With inputs lower than 20 mA the limit depends on the size of the threshold value.
Also refer to:

A description of the effect of the upper limit can be found in the appendices

Parameters
P11.06 Controller Magnitude Offset Default: 0 mA
Offset of the actuating variable by a constant value. The offset takes effect before the limitation of the actuating variable.
Generally the same values are chosen for P11.06 Controller Magnitude Offset as for P11.04 Lower Limit.
Optimization:
- fill the feeder hopper with bulk material
- calculate the actuating variable Y1, the value at which the discharge unit begins to work
- calculate the actuating variable Y2, the value at which reduction of the feed is suspended.
For feeders that are operated with feed rate setpoints of 0:
P11.06 Controller Magnitude Offset = Y2
All other feeders:
P11.06 Controller Magnitude Offset = Y1
Note: P11.06 Controller Magnitude Offset must be equal to or greater than P11.04 Lower Limit.
P11.07 Position at STOP Default: 0
Alternative: 0 | Lower Limit

If the scales are switched off the actuating variable can be set to 0 or to the offset value P11.04 Lower Limit.
P11.08 Bypass Default: 10 mA
The constant for the setpoint bypass (also refer to the controller figure in the appendix). The bypass instantaneously passes on a
portion of the flow rate setpoint to the controller magnitude to the feed drive. This parameter contains the current at which the
prefeeder just supplies the nominal flow rate (P03.02 Maximum Flow Rate Io).
Setting: operate the feeder volumetrically and set the bypass so that actual flow rate = setpoint. This value should be approximate-
ly 10 ... 15 mA. Otherwise the external flow rate controller should be adjusted.
P11.09 Store Default: NO
Alternative: NO | YES | YES-A
Saving the control magnitude before turning off the scale. The next start will begin with this value.
NO: do not save

YES: save
YES-A: only save if the scale has not broken down due to an alarm
P11.10 Setpoint Filter 1st Ord Default: 2 s
The time constant for a 1st-order filter in the setpoint branch. Does not function for the bypass.
To prevent overshoot, the setpoint is decoupled from the actual controller

through a reconstruction of the controlled member. The setpoint filters P11.10 and P11.11 delay the controller while the bypass
comes to the controller magnitude output without a delay.
The filter is switched off with P11.10 = 0.
Also refer to: the controller figure in the appendix

Parameters
P11.11 Setpoint Filter 2nd Ord Default: 0 s
The time constant for a second filter in the setpoint branch. Does not function for the bypass.
To prevent overshoot, the setpoint is decoupled from the actual controller

through a reconstruction of the controlled member. The setpoint filters P11.10 Setpoint Filter 1st Ord and P11.11 delay the control-
ler while the bypass comes to the controller magnitude output without a delay.
The filter is switched off with P11.11 = 0.
Also refer to: the controller figure in the appendix
P11.12 KP Adaptation Default: 1
Min: 0 Max: 2
Setpoint-dependent review of the proportional component of the regulator.
This parameter is used to optimize the regulation action for small setpoints.
For example:
KP control= 1 : KP is independent of the setpoint
KP control = 0: KP decreases in proportion to the setpoint
KP control = 2: KP increases in proportion to the setpoint
P11.13 Setpoint Threshold Default: 0 % Io
This parameter can be used separately to set the control for start-up and normal operation. Below the target value threshold in
P11.13, the control deviation is multiplied with the factor adjusted in P11.12 KP Adaptation before entering into the controller. The
factor is set to 1 above the threshold.
Examples:
Target value threshold = 0%: The proportional component is evaluated independant of the setpoint as described with parameter
P11.12.
Target value threshold > 0%: The controller input is evaluated with the parameter P11.12 below this threshold. The controller input
remains unaffected by P11.12 above this threshold.
P11.14 S: P-Component Default: 0.033 s/%
Min: 0 s/% Max: 1000 s/%
Only relevant if P11.01 = "Stepping".
The proportion of the position controller for the position-controlled prefeeder.
Also refer to: P11.15 S: I-Component
P11.15 S: I-Component Default: 3 s
Min: 0 s Max: 60000 s
The integral component of the position controller for the position-controlled prefeeder.
Also refer to: P11.14 S: P-Component

Parameters
P11.16 S: Threshold Response Default: 0.1 %
Min: 0 % Max: 1000 %
The minimum waiting period between two adjustment steps. This parameter can be used to prevent continuous vibration of the
prefeeder around the operating point.
P11.17 Compensation Element Default: 0 1/s
Min: 0 1/s Max: 60000 1/s
The compensation element is an additional integrator in the control deviation branch that only functions in gravimetric operation. It
is used to
• overcoming the trigger threshold
• reducing contouring errors with monotonically changing malfunctions
• avoid the remaining control deviations with a non-symmetrical control element and cyclical malfunctions
The input and output of the compensation element are limited to 5 %. The parameter gives the integration constant.
Special case: P11.17=0: The integrator is cleared.
Configuration for the compensation element to correct contouring errors. There might be contouring errors if the volumetric flow
rate depends on the level of a bin and the bin is emptied.
7.4.2.12 Parameter Block 12 - Analog Outputs

The parameters in this group define the output channels for the process signals.
P12.01 AO: Setpoint Default: n/a
Alternative: n/a | AO
Analog output channel for the flow rate set value.
Also refer to: P12.02 Setpoint Offset, P12.03 Setpoint Range
P12.02 Setpoint Offset Default: 4 mA
The output current for the value of the flow rate set value of 0 %.
Also refer to: P12.01 AO: Setpoint
P12.03 Setpoint Range Default: 20 mA
The output current for the value of a flow rate set value of 100 %.
Also refer to: P12.01 AO: Setpoint
P12.04 AO: Actual Flow Rate Default: n/a
Analog output channel for the actual flow rate.
Also refer to: P12.05 Flow Rate Offset, P12.06 Flow Rate Range

Parameters
P12.05 Flow Rate Offset Default: 4 mA
The output current for the value of the actual flow rate of 0 %.
Also refer to: P12.04 AO: Actual Flow Rate
P12.06 Flow Rate Range Default: 20 mA
The output current for the value of the actual flow rate of 100 %.
Also refer to: P12.04 AO: Actual Flow Rate
P12.07 AO: Load Default: n/a
The definition of the output channel for the load measured.
Also refer to: P12.08 Load Offset, P12.09 Load Range
P12.08 Load Offset Default: 4 mA
The output current for a platform load of 0 %.
Also refer to: P12.07 AO: Load
P12.09 Load Range Default: 20 mA
Output current for a measured load of 100 % of the nominal load (service value).
Also refer to: P12.07 AO: Load
P12.10 AO: Deviation Default: n/a
Analog output channel for the control deviation.
Also refer to:

P12.11 Deviation Offset
P12.12 Deviation Range
P12.11 Deviation Offset Default: 4 mA
The value of the control deviation 'zero' lies between the offset and 20 mA.
Also refer to: P12.10 AO: Deviation

Parameters
P12.12 Deviation Range Default: 20 mA
The output current is calculated according to the following formula:
Current = 10 mA + (P12.11)/2 + (P12.12 - P12.11) × control deviation / 100 %
P12.13 AO: Motor Speed Control Default: AO VCU1.AO1
Alternative: AO | n/a
Analog output channel for the actuating variable Y of the feed rate regulator.
Also refer to:

- the parameters in the 'regulator' block
- the regulator diagram in the appendices
7.4.2.13 Parameter Block 13 - Digital Inputs

The parameters in this group are used to associate various controller functions with specific digital input
channels and to associate events with those functions. Most of the functions specified in this group are hard
wired on the controller and cannot be changed.
P13.01 Event: External Event 1 Default: A
External interference signal at fault input 1.
Possible cause: depends on the external cabling. Usually: an error in the main drive
P13.02 DI: External Event 1 Default: DI VCU1.DI1 Low
Alternative: DI | n/a
Input 1 for an external interference signal.
The input is also linked to the internal interference logic (block: interlocking).
Also refer to: P13.01 Event: External Event 1
P13.03 Event: External Event 2 Default: A
Possible cause: depends on the external cabling.

Parameters
P13.05 Event: External Event 3 Default: IG
P13.06 DI: External Event 3 Default: n/a
Alternative: n/a | DI
P13.07 Event: External Event 4 Default: IG
P13.09 Event: NAMUR Error VCU1-DI6 Default: A
The sensor signal at the input exceeds the permissible level.
Possible cause:
- cable to the sensor is broken
- the sensor is faulty
- there is a short circuit in the cable connection
- an external signal sensor is outputting the incorrect signal level
P13.10 Event: NAMUR Error VCU1-DI7 Default: A
Possible cause:

Parameters
P13.11 Event: NAMUR Error VCU2-DI6 Default: IG
Possible cause:
Possible cause:
Possible cause:
Possible cause:
P13.15 DI: Acknowledge Events Default: n/a
Digital input for acknowledging event messages.
Caution: the level is static and may not be on permanently (otherwise continuous acknowledgement).
P13.16 DI: Local Mode Default: n/a
Feedback from the local operating console VLG that has been switched to 'local'.
The DISOCONT Tersus is now a passive display device only. It is switched to 'volumetric' automatically to suppress event mes-
sages. The DISOCONT Tersus switches itself off when it is switched back.

Parameters
P13.17 DI: Volumetric Mode Default: n/a
Digital input for switching the scales to volumetric operation, not synchronized with previous operation.
P13.18 DI: Volumetric synchron Default: n/a
Switches to volumetric operation while the actuating variable continues continuously. The actuating variable is calculated as an
average of the actuating variable obtained during regular operation. Alterations to the feed rate setpoint automatically adjust the
actuating variable.
Also refer to: P13.17 DI: Volumetric Mode
P13.19 DI: Reset Totalizer 1 Default: n/a
Digital input for canceling totalizing counter 1. The positive flank is the actuator.
P13.20 DI: Reset Totalizer 2 Default: n/a
Digital input for clearing totalizing counter 2. The positive flank takes effect.
P13.21 Event: NAMUR Error VMO1-DI7 Default: IG
Possible cause:
P13.22 Event: NAMUR Error VMO2-DI7 Default: IG
Possible cause:
7.4.2.14 Parameter Block 14 - Digital Outputs

The parameters in this group are used to associate various controller functions with specific digital output
channels. Most of the functions specified in this group are hard wired at assembly.
P14.01 DO: Feeder Started Default: DO VCU1.DO3 High
Alternative: DO | n/a
Digital output signal used to display the ON or OFF scales states.

Parameters
P14.02 DO: Start Prefeeder Default: DO VCU1.DO1 High
The digital output for turning the prefeeder on or off.
P14.03 DO: ALARM Default: DO VCU1.DO4 Low
The output becomes active if any alarm is triggered (common alarm). The scales have failed.
P14.04 DO: Deviation Default: n/a
The output signal will become active when the monitoring activates the control deviation (see P07.12 Event: Deviation for condi-
tions).
This contact output works independently of the event class set in P07.12 Event: Deviation.
Note: if an event has been classified as an alarm (see P07.12 Event: Deviation) feeding will switch off if the monitoring activates
the control deviation. Then the digital output will supply information on the event for a very short period of time only.
P14.05 DO: Actual Flow Rate MIN Default: n/a
The output signal becomes active if the feed rate falls below the minimum feed rate (P09.01 Limit: Actual Flow Rate MIN).
The contact output is independent of the event class.
P14.06 DO: Actual Flow Rate MAX Default: n/a
The output signal becomes active when the maximum feed rate (P09.03 Limit: Actual Flow Rate MAX) is exceeded.
The contact output is independent of the event class.
P14.07 DO: Volumetric Mode Default: n/a
The output becomes active if the scales are switched to a volumetric mode.
P14.08 DO: Local Mode Default: n/a
The output becomes active if the scales are switched to local mode.
P14.09 DO: WARNING Default: n/a
The output signal becomes active if any warning is pending.
P14.10 DO: Keyboard Mode Default: n/a
The output becomes active when keyboard mode is preselected.
(The DISOCONT Tersus is operated using the operating console VHM or EasyServe).

Parameters
7.4.2.15 Parameter Block 15 - Batch Mode

The parameters of this group define and optimize behavior in batch mode. Batching mode is used to ensure
that the feeder turns off independantly after conveying a preset quantity.
P15.01 Batch Mode Default: NO
Sets whether batch mode can be run or not.

In addition, 'batching' 'selection' has to be selected with the operating menu .
Also refer to the chapter in the manual:

'General Diagram' → 'Batching'
'Appendix' → 'Batch Operation Control'
P15.02 Batch Setpoint Source Default: OP
Alternative: OP | FB | AI
Definition of the input channel, which prescribed the setpoint for the batch. When a batch setpoint is entered, it only takes effect
from the start of the next batch.
With P15.02 Batch Setpoint Source = n/a, the value from the parameter Batch Setpoint for the selected component being fed is
used.
Note: When selecting an analog input channel (AI), the quantization value of the signal affects the accuracy of the absolute set-
point!
P15.03 Adaptation Mode Default: Ramp
Alternative: Ramp | Steps
Defines behavior once the batch setpoint is reached:
Ramp: the actuating variable is run to zero using a ramp function.

Steps: the device is turned off by switching first to dribble feed or, if required, in two dribble-feed stages of different capacities
P15.04 Correction Amount Default: 0 kg
Min: -100000 kg Max: 1000000 kg
The start of the adaptation time is shifted by this quantity. An adaptation time = 0 corresponds to a pre-threshold.
The correction quantity should be set to 0 for initial startup. The value of Correction Amount is adapted after each batch if P15.05
Adaptation Factor is not equal to zero so that the defect of the next batch is minimized.
P15.05 Adaptation Factor Default: 0.5
Min: 0 Max: 1
The application point of the switch-off function is adapted automatically so that the system is better adapted to the actual condi-
tions for the next batch.
Adaptation Factor = 0 : no adaptation

Adaptation Factor = 1 : full adaptation
Interim values result in filtered adjustment; this should be used in particular for systems with poor reproducibility.
The result of the event is stored in P15.04 Correction Amount.
P15.04 NEW = P15.04 OLD - Batch Resid. Amount * P15.05

Parameters
P15.06 Batch Automatic Record Default: NO
YES: automatic print after each completed batch.

NO: Printout of the batch can only be made via menu.
The printout can be made only after a batch has ended automatically or manually. The printout is stored to a file that can be read
using the Web-Server.
P15.07 DI: Batch Terminate Default: n/a
Digital input signal for canceling a current batch. The rising edge of the signal causes the cancelation. A new batch can then be
started.
A batch can also be cancelled in parallel by signals from the fieldbus or control assembly.
P15.08 DO: Batch Running Default: n/a
The output becomes active if a batch is run.

The signal is active at the start of the batch and deactivated again when the batch has been completed. It remains active if batch
operation is continuous.
P15.09 DO: Dribble Feed Default: n/a
The output becomes active in the dribble feed phase.
P15.10 DO: Full Feed Default: n/a
The output becomes active in the full feed phase.
P15.12 Analog Setpoint Relat. Default: 1000 kg
Min: 0 kg Max: 220000000 kg
Effective only when P15.02 Batch Setpoint Source = AI
The batch setpoint resulting for an input flow corresponding to the parameter P15.13 Batch Setpoint Range.
P15.13 Batch Setpoint Range Default: 20 mA
Input current for a batch setpoint that corresponds to P15.12 Analog Setpoint Relat..
P15.14 Batch Setpoint Offset Default: 4 mA
Input current for a batch setpoint of 0. Negative values can bridge the input area.
For example:
P15.12 = 1000 kg
P15.13 = 20 mA
P15.14 = -20 mA
0 ... 20 mA then correspond to 500 ... 1000 kg

Parameters
P15.15 Adaptation Time Default: 3 s

Establishes the duration of the entire dribble feed phase.
P15.16 Adaption Start Value Default: 300 % Io
Feed rate setpoint that starts the ramp to the end of the batch.
P15.17 Time Dribble Feed 2 Default: 0 %
Min: 0 % Max: 100 %
Proportion of the material conveyance with dribble feed feed rate 2 as a percentage.
Reference value: P15.15 Adaptation Time
Also refer to: P15.18 Value Dribble Feed 2, P15.19 DO: Dribble Feed 2
P15.18 Value Dribble Feed 2 Default: 0 %
Min: 0 % Max: 100 %
Feed rate setpoint during dribble feed phase 2. This value takes effect only in case P15.17 Time Dribble Feed 2 > 0.
Reference value: P15.16 Adaption Start Value
Also refer to:

P15.17 Time Dribble Feed 2
P15.19 DO: Dribble Feed 2
P15.19 DO: Dribble Feed 2 Default: n/a
Defines the output channel with which dribble feed 2 is activated. This value takes effect only in case P15.17 Time Dribble Feed 2
> 0.
Also refer to: P15.18 Value Dribble Feed 2, P15.17 Time Dribble Feed 2
P15.20 Batch Tolerance Default: 100000 kg
If the batch lies outside of the tolerance range, the maximum alteration of
the correction quantity at adaptation is the entered tolerance value. Also, an event is identified.
Also refer to: P15.21 Event: Out of Tolerance
P15.21 Event: Out of Tolerance Default: W2
Event Group: MF Number: 06
The batch result is outside the tolerance range.
Possible causes:
- highly erratic material flow
- altered feeder discharge behavior
- error in weight calculation due to disturbance forces

Parameters
P15.24 Batch Setpoint Limit Default: 1000000 kg
Min: 1 kg Max: 100000000 kg
Upper threshold for batch setpoint entry. The threshold is used to prevent incorrect entries and thus overflows.
Also refer to: P15.25 Event: Batch setpoint Limit
P15.25 Event: Batch setpoint Limit Default: W1
Erroneously entered batch setpoint. The value entered is reduced to the permissible upper limit in P15.24 Batch Setpoint Limit.
Possible causes:
- incorrect entry
- incorrect upper threshold
Also refer to: P15.24 Batch Setpoint Limit
P15.26 Batch behaviour after power down Default: Cancel
Alternative: Continue | Cancel
Defines behavior after a power down:
Cancel: the batch begun before the power down is aborted. A new batch is begun with the current setpoint.
Continue: the batch begun before the power down is completed.
7.4.2.16 Parameter Block 16 - Maintenance interval

The parameters of this group define maintenance intervals and the internal accuracy analysis function.
P16.01 Maintenance Electric Default: 3000 h
Min: 1 h Max: 10000 h
Indication of maintenance work that may need to be performed, dependent on the duty cycle of the power supply. This parameter
defines the interval between maintenance work.
Also refer to: P16.02 Event: Maint. Electric
P16.02 Event: Maint. Electric Default: IG
The sum of the times during which the mains voltage is on is greater than the time P16.01 Maintenance Electric.
A message occurs after each expired time interval. The message may indicate service work required.
P16.03 Maintenance Feeder Run Default: 3000 h
Min: 1 h Max: 10000 h
Indication of maintenance work that may need to be performed, dependent on the duty cycle of the scales (scales ON). This pa-
rameter defines the interval between maintenance work.
Also refer to: P16.04 Event: Maint.Feeder Run

Parameters
P16.04 Event: Maint.Feeder Run Default: IG
The sum of the runtimes of the conveying elements is greater than the time P16.03 Maintenance Feeder Run.
P16.05 Event: Wrong System Time Default: W2
The event is identified if the operating voltage of the electronic system was switched off for so long that the real-time clock reset
itself to its default value. The supply voltage buffer for the clock is guaranteed only for one week if there is no supply voltage.
Remedy: the clock should be set to the current time to ensure that the data are recorded with the correct time.
7.4.2.17 Parameter Block 17 - Communication EasyServe

The parameters of this group define the parameters for serial communication with EasyServe via RS232 or
RS485. These parameters have no function if EasyServe is connected via Ethernet.
P17.01 Own Address Default: 1
Min: 1 Max: 254
Relevant only for EasyServe connection via RS232 or RS485.
All devices connected to the communicatio bus must have disjunct addresses.
Also refer to: P17.02 Baud Rate, P17.03 Format Data
P17.02 Baud Rate Default: 38400
Alternative: 38400
Data transfer speed. This parameter is used for information only. The speed cannot be changed.
P17.03 Format Data Default: 8-N-1
Alternative: 8-N-1
Formats the serial data. The value is used for information only and cannot be altered.
7.4.2.18 Parameter Block 18 - Communication Fieldbus

This parameters of this group define the communication procedure to be used to a higher-level plant control
system and configure the data link.
Details on the fieldbus interface can be found in the following manuals:

BV-H2448: DISOCONT Tersus
BV-H2468: DISOCONT Tersus, Software VCF2017x
BV-H2474: INTECONT Tersus

Parameters
P18.01 Protocol Type Default: NO
Alternative: NO | Modbus-RTU | PROFIBUS

DP | DeviceNet | Modbus-TCP | PROFINET
IO | EtherNet/IP
Type of communication protocol. Some types of fieldbus need their respective fieldbus card.
DISOCONT Tersus: Further details on card installation can be found in the system manual BV-H2406. Manual 'Data Communica-
tion' (BV-H2448) contains further information on the data structures.
INTECONT Tersus: Manual 'Data Communication' (BV-H2474) contains further information on the data structures.
NO: Modbus-TCP can be used to read but write-accesses will not be processed.
Modbus-RTU: RS232, RS422 or RS485 interface; fieldbus interface card VSS 28020 must be installed.
PROFIBUS DP: Fieldbus interface card VPB 28020 must be installed.
DeviceNet: Fieldbus interface card VCB 28020 must be installed.
Modbus-TCP: Complete communication (read/write) using Ethernet and the main VCU RJ45 plug.
EtherNet/IP: Communication via Ethernet and the RJ45 plug on the main VCU.
The red-coded RJ45 socket X96 may not be used for communication with the host computer.
P18.02 Timeout Host Default: 10 s
Min: 1 s Max: 600 s
Monitors the interface
A telegram from the host system will be expected within the time set if the timeout value in P18.02 is greater than zero.
P18.03 Event: Cyclic Communication Default: A
Cyclical serial communication with the higher-order plant control system has been interrupted for longer than the timeout-period in
P18.02.
To rectify: check cable connections.
P18.04 Event: Acyclic Communication Default: W2
Incorrect data in the noncyclical communication from the host computer.
Possible cause: poor programming of the host computer
P18.05 Check in Keyboard Mode Default: YES
To be able to use keyboard mode as emergency operation if coupling fails (without having to log off the fieldbus coupling), this
parameter can be used to deactivate fieldbus communication monitoring in keyboard mode. This allows the scales to be operated
even if the fieldbus link fails.

Parameters
P18.06 Compatibility DISOCONT Master Default: NO
Compatibility setting for the predecessor families of DISOCONT or INTECONT PLUS of the control.
NO: Not completely compatible

YES: compatible, but with restricted data link compatibility for new functions
P18.07 Word Sequence Default: I:std/L:std
Alternative: I:std/L:std | I:swp/L:std | I:std/L:swp | I:swp/L:swp
The parameter determines the word sequence within a double word.
I denotes IEEE 754 values (floating-point values)

L denotes LONG values (4 byte integer values)
std will not swap the word order
swp will swap the word order
P18.08 Byte Sequence Default: High - Low
Alternative: High - Low | Low - High

Determines the byte sequence in a data word.
P18.09 Configuration Default: FIXED_8_16
Alternative: NO_PARA_ID_3_6 | NO_PARA_ID_4_12 | PARA_ID_6_1

5 | FIXED_8_16 | FIXED_8_8 | FIXED_4_4 | VARIABLE
COMPATIBLE | FIXED COMPATIBLE
The configuration of the content of the data of the fieldbus telegrams. You can find a detailed description in the manuals for data
communication:
The contents of the data have to be set on the scale and opposite point in a way that is compatible to one another!
P18.10 Address Default: 1
Min: 1 Max: 254
Address of the device as a slave at the modbus.

Each address may be used at a bus once only.
P18.11 Resolution Default: 4096
Min: 1 Max: 32767
The analog or integer format gives the maximum resolution of the measured value transferred.
Resolution refers to the nominal value of the process value.
P18.12 Baud rate Default: 19200
Alternative: 9600 | 4800 | 2400 | 19200 | 38400

Data transfer rate at Modbus-RTU.

Parameters
P18.13 Data Format Default: 8-O-1
Alternative: 8-O-1 | 8-E-1 | 8-N-1
Modbus-RTU always uses an 11-bit character frame.
Example: 8-O-1 means:

1 start bit, 8 data bit, odd parity, 1 stop bit
N = No parity
O = Odd parity
E = Even parity
P18.14 Physics Default: RS232
Alternative: RS485-2-wire | RS485-4-wire | RS232

Selects the electrical interface type (Modbus-RTU)
Min: 0 Max: 126

The address of the weighing electronics on PROFIBUS
P18.16 FLOAT-Format Default: IEEE
Alternative: IEEE | SIEMENS-KG

Information on the formats for all setpoints, measuring values and floating point parameters.
Min: 0 Max: 63
The address of the weighing electronics on DeviceNet
P18.18 Baud rate Default: 125K
Alternative: 125K | 250K | 500K

Data transfer rate of the DeviceNet.
P18.19 Parameter Default: NO
Select whether the user data package has a parameter block or not.
P18.20 Preset Count Default: 2
Min: 2 Max: 4
The number of specified values that can be specified in a telegram by the higher-order plant control system.
P18.21 READ_ID Count Default: 6
Min: 0 Max: 12
The number of freely selectable measuring and status values (scales → master) that are queried in a telegram.

Parameters
P18.22 Access Rights Limitation FB Default: NO
Alternative: NO | FIRST WRITE | REMOTE IP
Determines for network protocol Modbus-TCP which master system may intervene as a controller:
NO: No restrictions
FIRST WRITE: The subscriber that transmits the first write access gets the control rights. The other subscribers may read only.
REMOTE IP: Control commands from the subscriber with the IP address given in P18.23 Remote IP Address FB only will be
carried out.
P18.23 Remote IP Address FB Default: 192.168.240.250
IP address of the subscriber with control rights for Modbus-TCP.
See also: P18.22 Access Rights Limitation FB
P18.24 Configuration Default: PARA_ID_6_15
Alternative: PARA_ID_6_15 | FIXED_8_16

Selecting the data structure when connecting via PROFINET
7.4.2.19 Parameter Block 19 - Fixed mode configuration

Configuration of the data in fieldbus communication 'FIXED' mode that were exchanged with the host com-
puter via serial interface.
Also refer to: P18.09 Configuration
For the available data and their Ids see the separated communication manual:
P19.01 ID Preset Value 1 Default: 320

Selecting the first control command with ID 320 (decimal) in the Fieldbus telegram. It cannot be changed in this parameter.

Corresponds to P19.01 ID Preset Value 1





Parameters


P19.09 ID Read Value 1 Default: 752

Selecting the first value to be read from weighing electronics in the fieldbus telegram.

As P19.09 ID Read Value 1














Parameters

7.4.2.20 Parameter Block 20 - Ethernet

The parameters in this group control the Ethernet ports. It is necessary to provide inputs when EasyServe, a
DISOCONT Tersus VHM operating element or a host computer is supposed to be connected via Ethernet.
For DISOCONT Tersus you can find information on the selection of addresses in the BV-H2406 manual.
P20.01 IP Address Default: 192.168.240.1
IP address of the weighing electronics. If the control system is integrated into an Ethernet network, the address must be chosen in
agreement with the network administrator. In isolated networks we recommend the factory setting 192.168.240.x. The systems at
the buss differ by x.
P20.02 Net Mask Default: 255.255.255.0
The net mask setting is based on the local network type.

In general the following setting is used: 255.255.255.0
For DISOCONT Tersus see also: P20.02 Net Mask, system manual BV-H2406
P20.03 Gateway Default: 0.0.0.0

Generally no input is required. Typical value: 0.0.0.0
7.4.2.21 Parameter Block 21 - PLC Outputs

Applicable only when physical DISOCONT Tersus outputs are controlled by the control system.
The DISOCONT Tersus allows physical output signals to be controlled directly by the control system com-
puter via fieldbus. The parameters of this group assign physical channels to the fieldbus commands.
Please also refer to: status of fieldbus protocol commands in manual 'DISOCONT Tersus Data Communica-
tion' (BV-H2448).
P21.01 DO: PLC 1 Default: n/a
Definition of the binary output channel controlled by PCS command 1.
Corresponds to P21.01 DO: PLC 1

Parameters
P21.09 AO: PLC 1 Default: n/a
Definition of the analog output channel controlled by PCS analog command word 1.
P21.10 AO: PLC 2 Default: n/a
Corresponds to P21.09 AO: PLC 1
P21.23 Position at STOP Default: 0
Alternative: 0 | Lower Limit
Definition of the control magnitude in case the controller is switched off:

0: Not depending on P22.12 Control Level MIN the output is 0 mA when the controller is switched off
Lower Limit: While switched off, the control out put is equal the value set in P22.12 Control Level MIN
7.4.2.22 Parameter Block 22 - Bin Weigher

In addition to the weighfeeder, the system supports weighing and bin level control of an additional hopper.
This hopper is often a control hopper for the continuous weighfeeder.
P22.01 Bin Weigher Active Default: NO
Alternative: NO | YES | Simulation
The bin weigher operates completely independently of the continuous scales.

It has the following functions:
1. displaying the bin weight
2. registering and monitoring threshold values
3. regulating the (min/max) level
4. the check scale for the check system
It can also be filled via menu.
The continuous fill level can also be regulated via block Bin Level Controller.
P22.01 = Simulation:
Bin regulation and min/max regulation are simulated.
The continuous scale draws off material and filling is done with 4 × P03.02.

Parameters
P22.02 LC: Load Measurement Default: n/a
Alternative: n/a | LC | FB | AI
Definition of the measuring channel
If FB or AI are selected the external value will be converted to a value with mV/V units that corresponds to a measurement from a
load cell. The following signal processing calculates weight in kg from the signal in mV/V and is identical for all input types.
Also refer to:

P22.03 LC Characteristic Value
If AI is selected, refer also to:

P22.30 Bin Level analog Input Offset
P22.31 Bin Level analog Input Range
P22.03 LC Characteristic Value Default: 2 mV/V
Min: 0.01 mV/V Max: 10 mV/V
Transfer factor of the load cell as per the data sheet. All load cells have to have the same nominal value.
Also refer to: P22.04 LC Rated Capacity
P22.04 LC Rated Capacity Default: 1000 kg
Min: 0.5 kg Max: 220000000 kg
Sum of the bin's load cell rated capacities. All load cells must have the same rated data.
Special case of a partially-weighed bin:

If a bin is only supported x % by load cells at WZnominal1 nominal load sum and is otherwise supported on non-weighed supports
(fixed bearings), the load cell rated capacity to be entered is given by
P22.04 = WZnenn1 × 100 % / x %
If the percentage component x % on the load cell is not known a priori, the nominal value is determined by externally weighing one
bin level.
Also refer to: P22.03 LC Characteristic Value
P22.05 LC Filter Default: 0.25 s
Min: 0.25 s Max: 300 s
Time constant of the load cell filter.

The load cell filter affects all measuring load related measuring values.
P22.06 Bipolar Measurement Default: NO
Switches the measuring range for the load cell amplifier.
NO: measurement can be made in one load direction only

YES: the load cell can measure both compression and tensile forces
As there is generally always an initial load on the load cell it is usually sufficient to analyze the signal in the direction of compres-
sion only. The YES setting is needed in rare special cases only, e.g. if a measuring eye is used to record weight.
Bipolar measurement reduces the resolution of the measuring signal.

Parameters
P22.07 Event: Error LC Input (Bin) Default: W1
Steps to take :
- check the cabling and the load cell
- if the cabling is intact: replace the load cell amplifier VME in the VCU
Note:
fied.
P22.08 Event: LC Input > MAX (Bin) Default: W1
The load cell load is greater than 110 % of the sum of the load cell nominal loads.

Possible reasons:
- incorrect cabling
- faulty load cell
P22.09 Bin capacity Default: 100 % LC
Min: 0 % LC Max: 1000 % LC
The nominal bin level is the reference value for threshold values and analog outputs. It is given as a percentage of the load cell
nominal load (P22.04 LC Rated Capacity).
P22.10 Display Format Default: ---.--- t

t | -----.- t | ----.-- t | ---.--- t | ------- g | -----.- g | ----.-- g
Select the dimension and the decimal places for displays.
P22.11 Display Filter Default: 3 s
Min: 0 s Max: 600 s
Time constant of the filter for displaying the weight value.

The filter applies to the display and to the analog or serial printout but not for threshold values or control contacts.
P22.12 Control Level MIN Default: 60 %
Min: -10 % Max: 200 %
A filling unit can be controlled using MIN and MAX levels (output P22.14 DO: Bin Filling). Switched on if the bin level underruns the
MIN level and switched off again when the MAX level is reached.
Reference value: P22.09 Bin capacity
See also: P22.13 Control Level MAX

Parameters
P22.13 Control Level MAX Default: 70 %
Min: -10 % Max: 200 %
A filling unit can be controlled using the MIN and MAX control levels (output P22.14 DO: Bin Filling). If the fill level drops below
MIN, it is switched on and it is switched off again when it reaches MAX.
Also refer to: P22.12 Control Level MIN
P22.14 DO: Bin Filling Default: n/a
Defines the output to start the filling procedure.
The output is set to 'do not fill' each time a scales alarm is triggered.
Also refer to: P22.12 Control Level MIN, P22.13 Control Level MAX
P22.15 Bin Level MIN Default: 5 %
Min: -200 % Max: 200 %
MIN threshold for the bin level.
Also refer to: P22.16 Event: Bin Level MIN, P22.17 DO: Bin Level MIN
P22.16 Event: Bin Level MIN Default: W1
The bin level has underrun the lower threshold.
Possible cause:
- refilling working incorrectly
Also refer to: P22.15 Bin Level MIN
P22.17 DO: Bin Level MIN Default: n/a
Defines the output signal 'bin level too low'.
The output becomes active if the fill level underruns the lower threshold value. It operates independent of the event class of the
corresponding event.
P22.18 Bin Level MAX Default: 120 %
Min: -10 % Max: 200 %
Max threshold for the bin level.
Also refer to: P22.19 Event: Bin Level MAX, P22.20 DO: Bin Level MAX

Parameters
P22.19 Event: Bin Level MAX Default: W1
The bin level has exceeded the upper threshold.
Possible cause:
- refilling not switching off correctly
Also refer to: P22.18 Bin Level MAX
P22.20 DO: Bin Level MAX Default: n/a
Defines the output in case the hopper fill level exceeds the upper threshold.
The output operates independently of the event class of the corresponding event.
P22.21 AO: Bin Load Default: n/a
Defines the output channel for the hopper fill level.
Also refer to: P22.22 AO: Offset, P22.23 AO: Range
P22.22 AO: Offset Default: 4 mA
Output current for a bin weight of 0 %.
See also:
P22.21 AO: Bin Load
P22.23 AO: Range
P22.09 Bin capacity
P22.23 AO: Range Default: 20 mA
Output current for a fill weight of 100 %.
See also: P22.21 AO: Bin Load, P22.22 AO: Offset
P22.24 Range Correction Default: 1
Min: 0.5 Max: 2
This parameter is used to correct the measuring result. It is set automatically by the calibration program CB: Weight Check'.
The measuring result is corrected using the factor in P22.24.
P22.25 Tare (Bin) Default: 0 kg
Min: 0 kg Max: 220000000 kg

The tare is calculated automatically by the calibration program TW: Tare' and set into this parameter.
P22.26 Calibration Weight Default: 10 kg
Min: 0 kg Max: 220000000 kg

Used to enter the test weights used for the calibration program CB: Weight Check.

Parameters
P22.27 Controller in OFF-Mode Default: NO
This parameter defines whether the filling weight control (P22.12 Control Level MIN, P22.13 Control Level MAX, P22.14 DO: Bin
Filling) and bin regulation (block: bin level controller) are always active or only when the scale is switched on.
P22.28 DI: Bin Load Sensor Default: n/a
Digital input for a bin load sensor. The probe has the function of keeping the bin from overflowing. If the sensor is activated, filling
is discontinued for 60 seconds or is aborted.
- output as per P22.14 DO: Bin Filling to OFF
- output as per P23.04 DO: Feeder ON to OFF
- controller magnitude (P23.03 AO: Controller Magnitude Bin Level) to 0 and controller in base position
Filling is aborted regardless of the filling source (regulator, controller, manual)
and the event class (P22.29 Event: Bin Load MAX Sensor).
P22.29 Event: Bin Load MAX Sensor Default: W1
The fill level sensor reports a too-high fill level in the hopper.
Possible causes:
- the weight of the bulk material is very low so that the weight-controlled filling is not shutting off soon enough.
- the refill equipment is not closing correctly.
- the upper fill threshold level P22.13 Control Level MAX has been set too high.
An overfilled hopper can lead to inaccurate check measurements and so to false adjustment of the calculation of the flow rate.
P22.30 Bin Level analog Input Offset Default: 4 mA
Raising the analog input for the bin fill level of the additional bin
The input current corresponding to a signal of 0 mV/V.

Effective only when P22.02 LC: Load Measurement = AI...
See also:
Appendix in the manual → 'Using alternative signals (analog, fieldbus) for DMS inputs'
P22.31 Bin Level analog Input Range

Parameters
P22.31 Bin Level analog Input Range Default: 20 mA
The sensitivity adjustment of the analog input for weighing the additional bin
Converting the analog value into the voltage signal corresponding to a load cell:
The measured value [mV/V] = (input current – P22.30) / (P22.31 – P22.30) * P22.03
where:
P22.30 = Bin Level analog Input Offset
P22.31 = Bin Level analog Input Range
P22.03 = LC Characteristic Value
Effective only when P22.02 LC: Load Measurement = AI...
Also refer to:

The appendix chapter in the manual → 'Using alternative signals (such as analog and fieldbus) for DMS inputs'
P22.30 Bin Level analog Input Offset
7.4.2.23 Parameter Block 23 - Bin Level Controller

This continuous controller keeps the fill level in the bin at the setpoint level.
Precondition: weight measurement of the separate bin has been activated (P22.01 Bin Weigher Active =
YES).
Digital control of the separate bin filling can be found in the Bin Weigher block.
Details on the controller and the controller block diagram can be found in the appendix.
P23.01 Bin Controller ON Default: NO
Activates the continuous controller for the fill level of the additional bin.
Also refer to: P22.01 Bin Weigher Active
P23.02 Filling Type Default: YES
Defines the standard direction.
YES: The controlled organ fills the bin.

NO: The controlled organ empties the bin.
P23.03 AO: Controller Magnitude Bin Level Default: n/a
Output signal for the fill level controller actuating variable.
P23.04 DO: Feeder ON Default: n/a
Output channel for switching on the continuous feed element (control element).
The output is set to 'off', the controller magnitude is set to '0' and the controller is put into the base position with every scales
alarm. The automatic check system (KME) does the regulating during the measuring phase.

Parameters
P23.05 Setpoint Bin Level Default: 0 kg

Setpoint for the hopper in normal operation.
P23.06 Feeder Constant Default: 0 (kg/h)/mA
Min: 0 (kg/h)/mA Max: 1000000 (kg/h)/mA
Proportional constant of the conveyor element. The parameter designates the flow rate for a current of 1 mA at the output P23.03
AO: Controller Magnitude Bin Level.
P23.07 Dead Time TT Default: 3 s
Min: 0 s Max: 60000 s
Transport times between the regulated conveyor element (control element) and the bin if the transporting feeder element has a
fixed conveying speed.
P23.08 P-Component KP Default: 0 mA/kg
Min: 0 mA/kg Max: 10000 mA/kg
Proportional component of the fill level controller.
An I controller results at KP = 0 that leads to a control circuit with an instable structure with this regulation. This setting should
therefore be avoided.
P23.09 I-Component TN Default: 0 s
Min: 0 s Max: 60000 s
Reset time of the controller integral component for the bin fill level. The integral component reaches the same magnitude during
this period as the proportion with a constant control deviation.
The integral component is switched off at P23.09 I-Component TN = 0.
P23.10 D Portion TV Default: 0 s
Min: 0 s Max: 60000 s
Differential component of the bin fill level controller.
The differential component is switched off if P23.10 D Portion TV = 0.
P23.11 D Filter TD Default: 0 s
Min: 0 s Max: 60000 s
Filter time constant for the differential component.
This value should not be greater than the D component. 0.1 ... 0.3 * P23.10 is normal.
Also refer to: P23.10 D Portion TV

Parameters
P23.12 Bypass Default: 10 mA
Constant for pilot control of the conveyor into a bin that is emptied by the continuous scale. This constant describes the current as
a controller magnitude that produces a flow rate at the conveyor bin corresponding to the nominal flow rate (P03.02 Maximum
Flow Rate Io) of the continuous scale.
The bypass is adjusted so that the fill level of the bin is retained (outflow = inflow) if the controller is switched off (P23.08 P-
Component KP, P23.09 I-Component TN, P23.10 D Portion TV = 0) and the scale is switched on.
The bypass can be changed in small increments until the service value yBi oscillates around 0, even if the controller is active.
(The designs with different signs apply correspondingly to P23.02 Filling Type = NO.)
P23.13 Bypass D Portion Default: 0 s
Min: 0 s Max: 60000 s
In critical circumstances such as with a small hopper or long dead time, the D portion for the bypass can relieve the controller if
there are large changes in weighfeeder setpoints. The control deviation time interval can be minimized.
Recommendation: 0 under normal circumstances and approximately TT/2 (P23.07 Dead Time TT) under critical circumstances
P23.14 Controller Magnitude Offset Default: 0 mA
Increase of the actuating variable for the conveyor element.

In general parameters P23.14 Controller Magnitude Offset and P23.15 Lower Limit are set to the same value.
P23.15 Lower Limit Default: 0 mA
Internal lower threshold for the actuating signal to the conveyor element.
In general parameters P23.14 Controller Magnitude Offset and P23.15 Lower Limit are set to the same value.
P23.16 Upper Limit Default: 20 mA
Upper threshold for the actuating signal to the conveyor element.
P23.17 Dead Band Deviation Default: 0 kg
The effective control deviation Xd(w) at the controller input can be reduced by the factor of P23.18 Dead Band Factor within a
range of ± P23.17 Dead Band Deviation. This can bring about more settled (slower) control in the stable state (near the setpoint)
for the bin weight with malfunctions in the weight signal.
P23.18 Dead Band Factor Default: 0
Min: 0 Max: 1
Factor for the control deviation for a fill level close to the setpoint.
Also refer to: P23.17 Dead Band Deviation
P23.19 Setpoint Filter Default: 0.5 s
Min: 0 s Max: 200 s
The setpoint filter for the fill level setpoint.

This can prevent overshoot with setpoint changes effected by the check system (KME).

Parameters
P23.20 Flow Rate Filter Default: 0.5 s
Min: 0 s Max: 200 s
Time constant for the filter in the fill level actual value. Rapid control reaction requires a low time constant.
The value set is automatically taken into account by the calibration program BIN: Controller Optimization'.
P23.21 DI: Init. Controller Default: n/a
Contact initializes all parts of the controller that store information. Bypass and increase only are active as long as this is applied.
P23.22 Bin Setpoint source Default: PARAMETER
Alternative: PARAMETER | FB
This parameter defines whether the fill level setpoint is given by parameter P23.05 Setpoint Bin Level or by the fieldbus interface
(ID: hex 0x0266 or dec 614).
P23.24 Stepper Default: no Stepper
Alternative: no Stepper | additional Stepper | only Stepper
An additional step controller can be activated to the control unit of a position-controlled prefeeder (feed gate or roller) for the bin
controller. The simplified diagram of the controller can be found in the appendix. The position controller controls the prefeeder with
the digital 'Open' and 'Close' signals.
'no Stepper': only the continuous controller is active

'additional Stepper': A position controller tops the continuous controller
'only Stepper': only the position controller is active
The parameter of the continuous controller: P23.07 Dead Time TT ... P23.22 Bin Setpoint source
The parameter of the position controller: P23.25 S: P-Component ... P23.41 Position MAX Flow Gate(B)
P23.25 S: P-Component Default: 0.033 s/%
Min: 0 s/% Max: 1000 s/%

The proportional component of the step controller in transit time per % of deviation (in percent of P22.09 Bin capacity)
P23.26 S: I-Component Default: 3 s
Min: 0 s Max: 60000 s
The reset time of the fill level controller is the time after which the same controller magnitude develops on the output of the integra-
tor with a constant deviation as through the proportional component.
The integral component serves to avoid a permanent deviation. When the reset time is too small, it makes the control circuit insta-
ble.
The integral component is switched off for TN = 0 s and the controller works as a three-point switch.
P23.27 S: D-Component Default: 0 s
Min: 0 s Max: 60000 s
The factor for the differential component of the fill level controller. The differential component can improve the control quality with
long conveying routes to the bin. When the value is too large, it makes the control circuit instable.

Parameters
P23.28 S: Threshold Resp. Default: 0.1 %
Min: 0 % Max: 1000 %
The trigger threshold is used to prevent constant small positioning movements around the operating point. The prefeeder stands
still if the deviation is smaller than P23.28.
The trigger threshold should be greater than the smallest possible step of the actuator.
Special case: threshold = 0 %: The smallest allowed trigger threshold has an internal effect.
P23.29 S: Compensation Element Default: 0 1/s
Min: 0 1/s Max: 60000 1/s
The compensation element is an additional integrator in the control deviation branch for preventing contouring errors with prefeed-
ers that have characteristics that change monotonically or a feed rate of the continuous feeder that changes monotonically. It is
used
for
- overcoming the trigger threshold
- reducing contouring errors with monotonically changing malfunctions.
The input and output of the compensation element are limited to 5 %.

Special case: P23.29 S: Compensation Element = 0: The Integrator is deleted.
P23.30 S: DO Open Flow Gate (B) Default: n/a
The definition of the output channel for the 'open the prefeeder in the bin' command.
With systems with several VCU for the continuous scale:

The output should preferably be on the main VCU to prevent signal running times.
P23.31 S: DO Close Flow Gate (B) Default: n/a
The definition of the output channel for the 'close the prefeeder in the bin' command.
With systems with several VCU for the continuous scale:

The output should preferably be on the main VCU to prevent signal running times.
P23.32 AI: Position Flow Gate (B) Default: n/a
Alternative: n/a | AI
The definition of the input channel for the position return signal of the prefeeder.
Also refer to: P23.33 AI: Offset (B), P23.34 AI: Range (B)
P23.33 AI: Offset (B) Default: 4 mA
The flow of the feedback signal for the 'closed' position of the prefeeder to the bin.
Also refer to: P23.32 AI: Position Flow Gate (B), P23.34 AI: Range (B)
P23.34 AI: Range (B) Default: 20 mA
The current of the feedback signal for the '100 %' signal of the prefeeder to the bin where this position is supposed to correspond
to a flow of bulk solids at the size of the nominal flow rate of the continuous scale (P03.02 Maximum Flow Rate Io).
Also refer to: P23.32 AI: Position Flow Gate (B), P23.33 AI: Offset (B)

Parameters
P23.35 AO: Position Flow Gate (B) Default: n/a
The definition of the output for the position of the prefeeder in the bin as information to an external control unit.
Also refer to: P23.36 AO: Offset (B), P23.37 AO: Range (B)
P23.36 AO: Offset (B) Default: 4 mA
Output current for the 'closed' position of the prefeeder in the bin.
Also refer to: P23.35 AO: Position Flow Gate (B), P23.37 AO: Range (B)
P23.37 AO: Range (B) Default: 20 mA
Output current for the prefeeder 100 % open position in the bin.
Also refer to: P23.35 AO: Position Flow Gate (B), P23.36 AO: Offset (B)
P23.38 Event: MIN Flow Gate (B) Default: W2
The prefeeder to the bin has exceeded its limit switch in the direction of the smallest opening.
Possible causes:
- defect in the adjustment of the prefeeder control (control parameter P23.25 S: P-Component - P23.29 S: Compensation Element)
- defect in the prefeeder's performance drive
- the prefeeder is leaky and bulk solids are flowing even when the prefeeder is closed
- the limit switch is incorrectly set
Actions:
- check the controller settings
- check the mechanical equipment of the prefeeder and limit switch
P23.39 Position MIN Flow Gate (B) Default: n/a
The definition of the input channel for the signal of the limit switch on the prefeeder to the bin. When the limit switch responds, no
other 'close' signal is generated to protect the prefeeder's mechanical equipment. The event P23.38 Event: MIN Flow Gate (B) is
identified.
Note: The limit switch does not have any limiting impact on the controller. The controller can go into saturation if the limit switch
responds. This is why the limit position should be clearly outside of the normal setting range.
P23.40 Event: MAX Flow Gate (B) Default: W2
The prefeeder to the bin has exceeded its limit switch in the direction of the largest opening.
Possible causes:
Actions:

Parameters
P23.41 Position MAX Flow Gate(B) Default: n/a
The definition of the input channel for the signal of the limit switch on the prefeeder to the bin. If the limit switch responds, no other
'open' signal is generated to protect the prefeeder's mechanical equipment. The event P23.40 Event: MAX Flow Gate (B) is identi-
fied.
Note: The limit switch does not have any limiting impact on the controller. The controller can go into saturation if the limit switch
responds. This is why the limit position should be clearly outside of the normal setting range.
7.4.2.24 Parameter Block 24 - Check System

The check system controls and corrects a continuous scales using the change in bin weight; the changes in
weight result only from the bulk material passing over continuous scales. During measurement all other in-
and outflows must be stopped.
A signals flow chart for control can be found in the appendix.
P24.01 Type of Check System Default: NO
Alternative: NO | Single Unit | Filling System | Extern
Selects the control concept
'NO':
No check system in place
'Single Unit':
The continuous feeder scales and control weighing bin form a mechanical unit and are weighed together. The continuous
weighfeeder discharges from the hopper.
'Separated Units':
The continuous feeder scales and control weighing bin are decoupled both mechanically and with regards to weighing. The con-
tinuous weighfeeder discharges from the hopper.
'Filling System':
This continuous weighfeeder fills the control hopper during the check measurement.
'External':
The control procedure is controlled by a higher-order system. The DISOCONT Tersus only supplies the relevant measured values.
The following parameters only are effective:
- P24.22 DO: Check Measurement Active
- P24.25 Absolute Range
- P24.26 Relative Range
The following parameter description relates primarily to the 'single unit' and 'separated units' types.
P24.02 Auto Correction Default: NO
Setting for the correction unit once measurement is finished.
NO: Correction must be started manually

YES: Correction is performed automatically if the correction result lies within the set thresholds (P24.25 Absolute Range, P24.26
Relative Range).

Parameters
P24.03 Cyclic Auto Start Default: NO
Alternative: NO | Tare | Span
Automatic start of the check system.
'NO':
No automatic start
'Tare':
Automatic start for controlling and correcting tare or additive effects of errors.
'Span':
Automatic start for controlling and correcting the proportionality factor between the measured value and actual flow rate. Correc-
tion of multiplicatively acting effects of errors.
It starts after a pause preselected with the parameters P24.04 Cycle Time. It also makes sense to preselect automatic correction
(P24.02 Auto Correction = YES).
Your current result will be discarded at the start of the next automatic measurement if a previous measurement has not yet fin-
ished or been acknowledged.
P24.04 Cycle Time Default: 0.5 h
Min: 0 h Max: 100 h
With automatic start selected, the standby time between the end of one check and the start of the next.
Also refer to: P24.03 Cyclic Auto Start
P24.05 Release Check System Default: n/a
Alternative: n/a | FB | DI
Defines the input that will activate a check by the system controller.
If no active signal given:

1. no check will be started
2. a running check will be canceled.
The setting 'n/a' will make the check system continuously active.
P24.06 Event: No Check Release Default: W2
Event Group: CH Number: 09
This event is identified if a check has been started but the plant control has not authorized one.
Generally, no steps need to be taken. The event serves only as an indication of the missing authorization.
P24.07 Check Start Span Default: OP
Alternative: OP | DI | FB
The definition of the input channel to the start of the control measurement with the goal of a range correction.
P24.08 Check Start Tare Default: OP
The definition of the input channel to the start of the control measurement with the goal of a tare correction.

Parameters
P24.09 Accept Correction Default: OP
Determine the signal source for correction of the continuous scales on the basis of the outcome of the check system.
Once measurement has ended the check system moves to the acknowledgement phase and waits for the correcting command,
when P24.02 Auto Correction = NO. Corrections can also by made manually if the tolerances P24.25 Absolute Range or P24.26
Relative Range have been exceeded. Correction is triggered by the input flank.
P24.10 Finish Check Measurement Default: OP
Determines the source of the signal for canceling a running check. The command acts in all phases of measurement. The calibra-
tion of the continuous scale is not changed by the cancellation. The input is flank-controlled.
The check must be canceled if the measuring system is in acknowledgement phase and if the control outcome is not to be used to
correct the continuous scales.
P24.11 Check Quantity Default: 0 kg
Min: 0 kg Max: 100000000 kg
The quantity of bulk solids that should be discharged as a check.
The quantity selected should be large enough to minimize the effects of errors when determining the control quantity. By the same
token the hopper should have sufficient capacity for the control quantity.
P24.12 Storage Quantity Default: 500 kg
Min: 0 kg Max: 100000000 kg
The storage quantity determines the minimum fill level for the start of a check. If needed, material will be filled to this level before
measurement begins.
Preconditions:
1. The storage quantity must be smaller than the max. control fill level: P24.12 < P24.15 Maximum Fill Weight.
If this condition is not met, the check will end after starting with the message CH 03 (max. check fill level).
P24.13 Minimum Fill Weight Default: 0 kg
Min: 0 kg Max: 100000000 kg
Bulk material buffer that must remain in the hopper during a check so that the flow characteristics and the material density at the
feeding point do not change significantly.
The measurement would cancel with the message CH 02 (min. check fill level) if the material quantity falls below this amount.
P24.14 Event: Minimum Fill Weight Default: W1
The fill level has fallen below the threshold value in P24.13 Minimum Fill Weight during a check. The control measurement is
finished early.
Possible cause:
- bulk material density greater than specified
- unfavorable adjustment of P24.11 Check Quantity or P24.13 Minimum Fill Weight or P24.12 Storage Quantity

Parameters
P24.15 Maximum Fill Weight Default: 1000 kg
Min: 0 kg Max: 100000000 kg
The maximum check fill weight is the greatest fill level allowed during a check. The measuring period will not begin until the fill
level falls below this value.
The permissible operating range of the control measurement within the bin fill level is determined by the two threshold values Min
P24.13 Minimum Fill Weight and Max P24.15 Maximum Fill Weight.
P24.16 Event: Maximum Fill Weight Default: W1
The maximum fill level was exceeded during the check. The control measurement is finished early.
Possible cause:
The storage quantity (P24.12 Storage Quantity) is greater than the maximum control fill level (P24.15 Maximum Fill Weight). The
check will be canceled just after it starts. In case of an error, check the magnitude of both parameters.
P24.17 Damping Time Default: 3 s
The waiting period from switching off filling to starting the control measurement. The process variables should stabilize within this
period. This time is also observed even if the bin was not filled shortly beforehand.
P24.18 DO: Control Started Default: n/a
Defines the output channel for the message 'control active'.
The signal is active from the start of the control until successful correction or cancellation.
P24.19 Feeder Stopped Default: n/a
Alternative: n/a | FB | DI
The 'On/Off' feedback from the filling element. The settling time (P24.17 Damping Time) starts with the Off signal when the check
has started. The check will wait for the feedback signal (the P24.20 Event: Feeder Not Stopped event) before starting the settling
time if filling is switched on.
The check will be canceled without a response if the conveying element On feedback is received after starting settling time.
P24.20 Event: Feeder Not Stopped Default: W1
The control waits until conveyance into the control bin is stopped.
Possible cause:
- long time required to end filling
- incorrect control sequence for bin filling
P24.21 Event: Prepare Check Measurement Default: W2
The check procedure is in the filling phase or settling time or the fill level is still greater than the maximum check fill level (P24.15
Maximum Fill Weight).
For information only. In general, nothing else needs to be done.
P24.22 DO: Check Measurement Active Default: n/a
Defines the output channel for the message that the check system is in the measuring phase.

Parameters
P24.23 Event: Expect Acceptance Default: W2
At the end the check system waits for a decision by the operator:
a) accept correction result, correct continuous scales

b) discard correction result and cancel
If 'automatic correction' is active, the operator need only act if a tolerance level is exceeded (P24.02 Auto Correction = YES).
Step: Communicate decision about correction
P24.24 DO:Expect Acceptance Default: n/a
The definition of the output channel for the information that the check system is waiting for the operator's decision at the end.
The output is independent of the event class.
Also refer to: P24.23 Event: Expect Acceptance
P24.25 Absolute Range Default: 10 %
Min: 0 % Max: 1000 %
Threshold for the sum of all previous corrections.
Correction will not be made automatically if the threshold would be exceeded by a check. An event will be identified in each case.
See also:
P24.27 Event: Absolute Tare Correction Error
P24.29 Event: Absolute Span Correction Error
P24.26 Relative Range Default: 3 %
Min: 0 % Max: 1000 %
Threshold for the currently pending correction.
Correction will not be made automatically if the error overshoots the threshold. An event will be identified in each case.
See also:
P24.28 Event: Relative Tare Correction Error
P24.30 Event: Relative Span Correction Error
P24.27 Event: Absolute Tare Correction Error Default: W1
The current correction would make the sum of all zero-point corrections greater than the threshold value P24.25 Absolute Range
since the last basic tare calibration. There is no automatic correction. The operator can acknowledge the message and enter the
result manually. Monitoring and messaging occur in the acknowledgement phase. The correction weighting factor P24.31
Correction Evaluation is not taken into account in the error analysis.
Cause of the event:

- substantial tare drift in the feeder scale (contamination or stuck weighing station)
- defects in bin weight measurement (shunt forces or pressure effects)
Actions:
- checking the weighing station of the feeder scale
- taring the feeder scale
- checking bin weighing (the stability of the weight display when loading and unloading)

Parameters
P24.28 Event: Relative Tare Correction Error Default: W1
The result of the current correction deviates more greatly than the threshold value P24.26 Relative Range from that of the last
measurement. There is no automatic correction. The operator can acknowledge the message and enter the result manually. It is
monitored and reported in the acknowledgement phase. The correction weighting factor P24.31 Correction Evaluation is not taken
into account in the error analysis.
Cause of the event:

Actions:
P24.29 Event: Absolute Span Correction Error Default: W1
The threshold in P24.25 Absolute Range was exceeded by the sum of all corrections for multiplicative errors.
Bprod = (1 - B * K) * 100 %
Bprod: Sum of all previous corrections as a %

B: newly calculated correction factor = (loss in control bin weight) / (advancement in continuous scales counter)
K: product of all previous corrections stored in P10.01 Range Correction
P24.30 Event: Relative Span Correction Error Default: W1
The multiplicative error just ascertained exceeds the threshold value in P24.26 Relative Range.
Brel = (1 - B ) × 100 %
Brel: error relative to the current adjustment of the continuous scales as a %

P24.31 Correction Evaluation Default: 1
Min: 0 Max: 1
The extent of the correction is determined by the factor P24.31 Correction Evaluation. There is no correction with P24.31 = 0 and
the complete defect ascertained is corrected with P24.31 = 1.
P24.31 = 1 is normally set for the first control measurement to make a basic setting. Subsequent corrections, in particular when
checks are automatically started, are normally carried out with P24.31 < 1. This makes it possible to filter the control results and
eliminate random measuring errors in the control measurement.
P24.32 Correction Speed Default: 0 s
To ensure that the correction does not bring about any flow rate jumps, it can be automatically carried out in small steps. If 0 is
entered, it is corrected in one step. P24.32 defines the time between two steps of 0.1 % of the nominal load (at tare correction) or
0.1 % of P10.01 Range Correction (with range correction).

Parameters
P24.33 AO: Check Measurement Result Default: n/a
Defines the analog output channel for the result of the control (loss in bin weight) / (advancement in continuous scales counter).
Updating is made at the start of an acknowledgement phase. The output value is retained until the next acknowledgement phase.
The correction quantification in P24.31 Correction Evaluation is disregarded at output.
Signal scaling is linear between 4 ... 20 mA = 0.9 ... 1.1.

Examples:
4 mA = 0.9
12 mA = 1
20 mA = 1.1
P24.34 DO: Check Gate Default: n/a
This parameter relates only to the check by increase in weight of the bin (P24.01 Type of Check System = Filling System).
Procedure: the control gate will divert the material either through the normal conveyance path or into the control bin. The correct
position of the control gate can be monitored by the digital input 'Echo Control Gate' (P24.35 Check Gate Feedback).
P24.35 Check Gate Feedback Default: n/a
This parameter only relates to the check by weight increase in the bin (P24.01 Type of Check System = filling system).
Defines the input channel for the position return signal from the control gate. The return signal is not monitored with the setting
'n/a'.
If there is no feedback from the control gate within the monitoring time (P24.36 Check Gate Time), the 'control gate error' event is
set and the control measurement is canceled.
Also refer to:

P24.34 DO: Check Gate
P24.37 Event: Check Gate Error
P24.36 Check Gate Time Default: 0 s
Tolerated time allowed for the control gate to move between command and position return signal.
Also refer to:

P24.35 Check Gate Feedback
P24.37 Event: Check Gate Error

Parameters
P24.37 Event: Check Gate Error Default: W1
The control gate did not reach its end position within the tolerance time.
Possible cause:
- gate has no power
- gate is stuck
Also refer to:

P24.36 Check Gate Time
P24.38 Limit Max. Bin Error Default: 0 %
Min: 0 % Max: 10000 %
The bin fill level is measured at the start and the end of the measuring phase. Both measuring points are monitored for disturb-
ances in the measurement.
If the malfunctions exceed the threshold value in P24.38, another attempt at measuring will be started after a time defined by
P24.17 Damping Time. However, if this attempt also returns excessively high malfunctions, the check will be canceled, the results
discarded and an event identified (P24.39 Event: Bin Error). Disturbances are not monitored if the setting is 0 %.
How to set:
1. set the threshold to 10,000 %
2. Monitor the service display 'KME Window' during the check procedure and note the max. value.
3. key in approximately 3 times this value in parameter P24.38 Limit Max. Bin Error.
P24.39 Event: Bin Error Default: W1
Large disturbances in the weight signal of the control bin were detected during the check. The check was canceled and the result
discarded. It is also canceled if the event class has been set to IG.
Possible cause:
- force bypasses at the control bin
- pressure forces acting on the control bin
- wind forces acting on the control bin
Also refer to: P24.38 Limit Max. Bin Error
P24.40 DO: Correction Error Default: n/a
Defines the output channel for displaying an error condition of the control measurement. The output is set if one of the events
CH04 - CH07 occurs (measuring result lies outside tolerance levels). The check is finished, although the correction has not been
carried out.
7.4.2.25 Parameter Block 25 - Moisture

For certain processes, other units than units of weight per time may be more relevant to the feeding process.
One example is bulk material moisture. The relevant parameter is not the weight of the moist material but
rather the weight of the dry material.
The measuring system can correct bulk solid properties such as these. This requires that the disturbance
variable, e.g. the moisture or ash content, be measured and the result sent to the system. The measuring

Parameters
system then calculates the bulk solid components relevant to the process and feeds it instead of the total
weight.
P25.01 Moisture Active Default: NO
The actual flow rate can be corrected with the moisture block. The corrected value will always be used for the controller input and
the batch counter if moisture correction is active. The pulses for an external counter can be issued configured with P25.14 Pulse
Counter corrected, corrected or not corrected.
NO: No correction
YES: Weight signal is corrected
The parameters relevant to moisture correction are visible only when correction is active.
P25.02 Moisture Select Default: n/a
With factory default value "n/a" , the correction is not active.
P25.03 AI: Moisture Measurement Default: n/a
Defines the input signal for the measuring signal of the error effects, e.g. the moisture content.
See also:
P25.04 Nominal Moisture
P25.05 Moisture Offset
P25.06 Moisture Range
P25.04 Nominal Moisture Default: 20 %
Min: 0 % Max: 100 %
Maximum value of additives (moisture) content as a percentage of weight.
See also:
P25.03 AI: Moisture Measurement
P25.05 Moisture Offset
P25.06 Moisture Range
P25.05 Moisture Offset Default: 4 mA
Current for a correction value of 0 %
Reference value: P25.04 Nominal Moisture
Also refer to: P25.03 AI: Moisture Measurement, P25.06 Moisture Range
P25.06 Moisture Range Default: 20 mA
Current for a correction value of 100 %
Reference value: P25.04 Nominal Moisture
Also refer to: P25.03 AI: Moisture Measurement, P25.05 Moisture Offset

Parameters
P25.07 DO: Moisture active Default: n/a
Definition of the output channel for signal 'Correction active'.
See also: P25.02 Moisture Select
P25.08 Moisture MAX Default: 10 %
Min: 0 % Max: 100 %
Threshold for monitoring the moisture as a portion of the moisture content of the overall weight.
Also refer to: P25.09 DO: Moisture MAX, P25.10 Event: Moisture MAX
P25.09 DO: Moisture MAX Default: n/a
Defines the output channel for the signal that indicates that the moisture content has exceeded its threshold. The output is inde-
pendent of the class of the related event.
Also refer to: P25.08 Moisture MAX, P25.10 Event: Moisture MAX
P25.10 Event: Moisture MAX Default: W1
The measured value of the interference quantity (for instance, the moisture) has been exceeded. Feeding errors may arise.
Possible cause:
- extremely damp bulk material
- moisture measurement measuring error
Also refer to: P25.08 Moisture MAX, P25.09 DO: Moisture MAX
P25.11 AO: Flow Rate corrected Default: n/a
Defines the output channel for the feed rate corrected for the disturbance value (moisture).
Also refer to: P25.12 AO: Flow Rate Offset, P25.13 AO: Flow Rate Range
P25.12 AO: Flow Rate Offset Default: 4 mA
Output current for an output of 0 %.
P25.13 AO: Flow Rate Range Default: 20 mA
Output current for an output of 100 %.

Parameters
P25.14 Pulse Counter corrected Default: NO
Defines the output signal for connecting an external impulse counter.
NO: The impulse output supplies the uncorrected material quantity

YES: The impulse output supplies the bulk material quantity corrected by the correction factor, e.g. moisture.
7.4.2.26 Parameter Block 26 - Additional device
P26.01 Auto Zero Active Default: NO
The preselection of the automatic zeroing equipment that corrects the zero point in operation without bulk solids.
The conditions for identifying the fact that bulk solids is not flowing:
- platform load < P26.02 Auto Zero Limit
- measurement switched off
Also refer to:

P10.04 Zeroing Limit
P26.03 Event: Tare Correction
P26.02 Auto Zero Limit Default: 2 % Q
Min: 0 % Q Max: 100 % Q
The threshold value for starting automatic zero setting. The zeroing system only ascertains the mean value of the load if the load
is below the threshold value. This is corrected in P10.03 Tare Correction when the total of all zero settings is below the threshold
in P10.04 Zeroing Limit. When the threshold is exceeded in P10.04, it is not corrected and the system reports Event: Tare Correc-
tion.
Reference: nominal load (service value)
Also refer to: P26.01 Auto Zero Active
P26.03 Event: Tare Correction Default: W1
The event is identified when the total of the corrections of the zero settings would be in excess of the threshold value in P10.04
Zeroing Limit.
Possible causes:
- substantial build-up of bulk material on the measuring chute
- substantial air flow in the meter
- shunt forces from the measuring chute against the non-stationary part
Actions:
- check the measuring equipment
- clean the device
See also:
P26.01 Auto Zero Active
P26.02 Auto Zero Limit

Parameters
P26.04 Zero Drop-Out Active Default: NO
The zero drop out function sets the display of the flow rate to zero when the load drops below the threshold value in P26.04 Zero
Drop-Out Active. This prevents the totalizing counter from running on if measuring continues for a longer period while no bulk
material flows. This suppresses small, unavoidable tare errors.
YES: activate the Zero Drop Out system.

NO: Zero Drop Out has no effect. The small operating range is displayed at the measured value.
P26.05 Zero Drop-Out Limit Default: 1 % Io
Totalizing is suppressed with measurements below this limit to ensure that the counter remains constant.
No feature appears on the display.
Reference: Flow Rate Units
P26.06 DO: Agitator ON Default: n/a
Defines the output channel used to switch on the agitator in the feeder hopper.
Also refer to: P26.07 START Agitator
P26.07 START Agitator Default: 30 % Io
Limit value for switching on the scarifier drive.

The scarifier drive is activated via the output type channel defined by P26.06 DO: Agitator ON.
Switching on the feeder immediately starts the scarifier drive if the target feed rate is above the threshold set in P26.07. If the
setpoint falls below the threshold or if the feeder is switched off, the scarifier drive immediately switches off.
If the setpoint is increased above the threshold after operation with a setpoint below the threshold set in P26.07, the scarifier drive
starts after a delay of 30 s.
Reference: P03.03 Flow Rate Units
7.4.2.27 Parameter Block 27 - Dead Time

The system allows the switch-on command and setpoints to be delayed. This is a useful function if several
consecutive feeders operate as a collective system and the batch must be correct at all times. The first feed-
er receives the control commands instantaneously, the following feeder receives them after a delay corre-
sponding to the transit time of the bulk material from the first feeder to the collection point (= dead time).
P27.01 Dead Time Active Default: NO
Alternative: NO | Setpoint + ON/OFF | Setpoint | ON/OFF
There is a dead time element for the setpoint and ON/OFF command each, each of which can be activated separately.
NO: no dead-time active

Setpoint: dead-time active for the setpoint only
ON/OFF: dead-time for ON/OFF only active
Setpoint + ON/OF: dead-time for setpoint and ON/OFF active
P27.02 Dead Time Default: 0 s
Min: 0 s Max: 600 s

The value for dead time is valid for start/stop commands and setpoint changes.

Parameters
P27.03 Setpoint Select Default: n/a
Activates the setpoint delay. If set to 'n/a', alterations are carried out with no delay.
P27.04 Setpoint Clock ON Default: n/a
The signal indicates whether the transport equipment is running and thus whether the delay should continue running. The delay is
always on If set to 'n/a'.
P27.05 ON/OFF Select Default: n/a
Activates the delay for start/stop commands. If set to 'n/a', alterations are carried out with no delay.
P27.06 ON/OFF Clock ON Default: n/a
The signal indicates whether the transport equipment is running and thus whether the delay should continue running. The delay is
always on If set to 'n/a'.
P27.07 Time Elements Preassign Default: n/a
With this command the timing elements are preallocated with the current setpoint or the current ON/OFF command.
P27.08 Initialise Time Elements Default: n/a
The setpoint element is preallocated with ZERO at initialization and the ON/OFF element is preallocated with OFF.
P27.09 DO: Dead Time Active Default: n/a
Digital output for active dead-time setpoint or active dead-time ON/OFF.
P27.10 DO: Setpoint Active Default: n/a
Digital output for active dead-time setpoint.
P27.11 DO: ON/OFF Active Default: n/a
Digital output active dead-time ON/OFF.
7.4.2.28 Parameter Block 28 - Interlocking

The parameters of this group configure the system's predefined events and running messages.
Also refer to the interlocking logic circuit diagram in the appendices
P28.01 DI: Event Mechanics 1 Default: n/a
Alternative: n/a | DI | LS
Defines the input channel. The meaning is defined by the external circuitry.

Parameters
P28.06 DI: Event Electricity 1 Default: n/a
P28.09 DO: Event Mechanics Default: n/a
Defines the physical output signal. See the logic diagram for the meaning of the output.
P28.10 Event: Mechanics Default: W1

Defines the event class. The meaning of the event can be gathered from the logic diagram.
P28.11 DO: Event Electricity Default: n/a
P28.12 Event: Electricity Default: W1

P28.13 DO: Event Mechatronics 1 Default: n/a

Parameters
P28.14 DO: Event Mechatronics 2 Default: n/a
P28.15 Event: Mechatronics Default: W1

P28.16 DO: Ready Default: n/a
P28.17 Event: Not Ready Default: W1

P28.18 DO: Ready for Start Default: n/a
P28.19 Event: Not Ready for Start Default: W1

7.4.2.29 Parameter Block 29 - FCB analog outputs

The DISOCONT Tersus has a small PLC, the logical analog outputs of which are tied to the physical outputs
by parameters in this block.
Refer to the chapter 'Appendix' → 'PLC Functionality (optional)' for information on programming the PLC.
P29.01 FCB_AO 01 Default: n/a
Assigning the physical output signal for analog output 1 of the PLC.
P29.02 Offset FCB_AO 1 Default: 4 mA

Output current for a PLC signal of 0.
P29.03 Range FCB_AO 1 Default: 20 mA
Output current for a PLC signal of 100 %
Reference value: P29.04 Reference FCB_AO 1
See also: P29.01 FCB_AO 01

Parameters
P29.04 Reference FCB_AO 1 Default: 1000
Min: 1 Max: 1000000
Maximum value of the signal at the PLC analog output.
Also refer to: P29.01 FCB_AO 01, P29.03 Range FCB_AO 1
Corresponds to P29.01 FCB_AO 01
Description see:
P29.01 FCB_AO 01
P29.02 Offset FCB_AO 1
P29.03 Range FCB_AO 1
P29.04 Reference FCB_AO 1
Description see:
P29.01 FCB_AO 01
Min: 1 Max: 1000000
Description see:
P29.01 FCB_AO 01
Description see:
P29.01 FCB_AO 01

Parameters
Description see:
P29.01 FCB_AO 01
Min: 1 Max: 1000000
Description see:
P29.01 FCB_AO 01
Description see:
P29.01 FCB_AO 01
Description see:
P29.01 FCB_AO 01
Min: 1 Max: 1000000
Description see:
P29.01 FCB_AO 01

Parameters
Description see:
P29.01 FCB_AO 01
Description see:
P29.01 FCB_AO 01
Min: 1 Max: 1000000
Description see:
P29.01 FCB_AO 01
P29.21 FCB Variant Default: Empty
Name of the required function block link. This name is automatically transferred to the parameter when a new link is loaded. When
the system is started after turning on the voltage, it checks to see whether the name of the function block link loaded is the same
as the name entered in the parameter. Event P29.22 Event: FCB-Error is identified if the names are different.
This check serves as a control if a replacement part is used.
See also: P29.22 Event: FCB-Error
P29.22 Event: FCB-Error Default: A
This event is identified if the function block link loaded does not correspond to the link stored in the parameter.
Caution: It probably does not have the full functionality. Unreliable operating states may arise.
Possible causes:
- it forgot to load the correct link after exchanging the VCU.
- the name in the parameter was changed manually.
Steps to be taken:
Load the function block link to the correct name given in P29.21 FCB Variant. No further links can be loaded as long as this event
is identified. If in this error state a link with a different name should be loaded, the new name must first be entered into P29.21.
7.4.2.30 Parameter Block 30 - FCB digital outputs

The DISOCONT Tersus has a small PLC, the logical binary outputs of which are tied to the physical outputs
by parameters in this block.
Refer to the chapter 'Appendix' → 'PLC Functionality (optional)' for information on programming the PLC.

Parameters
P30.01 FCB_DO 01 Default: n/a
Allocation of the physical output channel to the binary output signal of the internal PLC.

Parameters
7.4.2.31 Parameter Block 31 - Data Logging

The parameters in this group configure the recording of process data. The recorded data are available at the
operating panel and can be easily accessed via Ethernet on the controller homepage.
Note: you have to activate recording with the VHM operating panel or EasyServe before measured values
can actually be recorded.
P31.01 Hourly Total Time Default: 0 min
Min: -1 min Max: 59 min

Moment at which the totalizing counter begins logging in minutes from the start of a full hour.
P31.02 Daily Total Time Default: 0 min
Min: -1 min Max: 1439 min

Moment at which the totalizing counter begins logging in minutes from the start of a day.

Parameters
P31.03 Logger cycle time Default: 1 min
Min: 1 min Max: 1439 min

Logging cycle time for the Data Log Values selected by P31.04 ... P31.13.
P31.04 Data Log Value 1 Default: 752
Select the process value for recording. You can find the identification number of a value in the 'data communication' manual.
See also:
P31.03 Logger cycle time
These manuals:
DISOCONT Tersus: BV-H2448
INTECONT Tersus: BV-H2474
DISOCONT Tersus Software VCF 2017x: BV-H2468

Similar to P31.04 Data Log Value 1








7.4.2.32 Parameter Block 32 - Configuration HMI Values

The parameters in this group define the process variables to be displayed on the 'Values' page of the operat-
ing panel (HMI, OP) for a DISOCONT Tersus.
On an INTECONT Tersus these values can be called up with the '9' key.
EasyServe can be used for easy configuration or the settings can be made with the help of the allocation
map in the data description of the serial interface in the operating panel.
You can find the characteristic values (ID) belonging to the process variables in the manual on data commu-

Parameters
nication:
DISOCONT Tersus: BV-H2448
INTECONT Tersus: BV-H2474
DISOCONT Tersus Software VCF 2017x: BV-H2468
P32.01 HMI Value 01 Default: 1872

Identification number (ID) of the desired process variable.









7.4.2.33 Parameter Block 33 - Linearization
P33.01 Linearization ON Default: NO
Load measuring can be linearized with this parameters.

The 4 linearization points can be determined by calibration with calibration weights or using material. Not required or not measured
points must be laid either outside the measuring range or must be interpolated.
Consider the location of the linearization in the signal processing.

Detailed calibration instructions are in the appendix.

Parameters
P33.02 Linearization S1 Default: 25 % Io
Min: 0.1 % Io Max: 1000 % Io
Linearization point 1:
Correct feedrate at the input of the linearization.
P33.03 Linearization I1 Default: 25 % Io
Min: 0.1 % Io Max: 1000 % Io
The measuring device's actual feed rate at linearization point 1.

This point can approximately be calculated as follows:
P33.03(new) = P33.03(old) * mc/ms

P33.03(old): the value that was active during the measurement
mc: the progress of the totalizer count during the measurement
ms: the actual amount of bulk solids determined on an external static scale
Min: 0.1 % Io Max: 1000 % Io
Linearization point 2.
Otherwise as P33.02 Linearization S1
Min: 0.1 % Io Max: 1000 % Io
Refer to P33.03 Linearization I1 for a description
Min: 0.1 % Io Max: 1000 % Io
Min: 0.1 % Io Max: 1000 % Io
Min: 0.1 % Io Max: 1000 % Io
Min: 0.1 % Io Max: 1000 % Io

Parameters
P33.10 Event: Linearization Error Default: W2
Not a monotonically increasing curve.
A monotonically increasing compensation curve is monitored when:

- linearization is switched on,
- a parameter is altered
7.4.2.34 Parameter Block 34 - Flow Gate

The parameters of this group are only relevant if the prefeeder is designed as a position-regulated feed gate
(P11.01 Controller Type) for the bulk solids to the feeder scale.
P34.01 S: DO Open Flow Gate Default: n/a
The definition of the output channel for opening the position-controlled prefeeder. With DISOCONT Tersus the output should be on
the main VCU (local bus address 1).
P34.02 S: DO Close Flow Gate Default: n/a
The definition of the output channel for closing the position-controlled prefeeder. With DISOCONT Tersus the output should be on
the main VCU (local bus address 1).
P34.03 AI: Position Flow Gate Default: n/a
The definition of the input channel for the feedback signal for the position of the prefeeder.
Also refer to:

P34.04 AI: Offset
P34.05 AI: Range
P34.04 AI: Offset Default: 4 mA

The input current at the 'just closed' position of the feed gate.
P34.05 AI: Range Default: 20 mA
The input current for the nominal position is 100 %. There should be a material flow of 100 % of the nominal operating range
P03.02 Maximum Flow Rate Io at the nominal position under nominal conditions for the bulk solids.
P34.06 AO: Position Flow Gate Default: n/a
The definition of the analog output channel with the information on the position of the prefeeder to external equipment. Norming
via P34.07 AO: Offset and P34.08 AO: Range

Parameters
P34.07 AO: Offset Default: 4 mA

The output current for the 0 % prefeeder position is opened ('just closed').
P34.08 AO: Range Default: 20 mA

The output current for the 100 % prefeeder position is opened ('just completely closed').
P34.09 Event: MIN Flow Gate Default: W2
The event is identified when the prefeeder has run past the limit switch for the minimum position. It is used to protect the mechani-
cal equipment.
Possible causes:
Defects in the prefeeder control unit
Actions:
Check the control unit.
P34.10 Position MIN Flow Gate Default: n/a
The definition of the input channel for the signal from the limit switch on the prefeeder for the minimum open position.
P34.11 Event: MAX Flow Gate Default: W2
The event is identified when the prefeeder has run past the limit switch for the maximum position. It is used to protect the mechan-
ical equipment.
Possible causes:
Actions:
P34.12 Position MAX Flow Gate Default: n/a
The definition of the input channel for the signal of the limit switch on the prefeeder for the maximum open position.
7.4.2.35 Parameter Block 35 - Local Mode (Speed)

The parameters of this group are only relevant if a VMO model local operating panel is used to control the
drives. Drives can be controlled individually in local operation for service jobs.
This block contains the parameters for continually functioning drives, feed gates (rollers) with built-in position
control or valves.
Each VMO can control as many as 5 drives. The parameters for these drives are identified by block numbers
1 ... 5 in this parameter group.
You can find a logic diagram of the local control unit in the appendix.
Note: Communication to the VMO must be activated using parameters P01.12 VMO20100-Unit 1 ... P01.15

Parameters
Event: Communication VMO20100-Unit 2.
Furthermore, the parameters in the VMO should also be adjusted accordingly in addition to the pa-
rameters in the VCU. This is generally done before leaving the factory.
P35.01 Motor Select (Block 1) Default: VMO1 Motor1
Alternative: VMO1 Motor1 | VMO1 Motor2 | VMO1 Motor3 | VMO1

Motor4 | VMO1 Motor5 | VMO2 Motor1 | VMO2 Mo-
tor2 | VMO2 Motor3 | VMO2 Motor4 | VMO2 Motor5 | not
active
Selecting the drives in VMO that is assigned to parameter block 1. It is then operated in VMO with the appropriate line.
VMOx MotorY: The drive is linked to motor Y in VMO x.
P35.02 ON in Remote (Block 1) Default: n/a
Alternative: n/a | LS
The signal running through the selected output channel is linked with the ON command for the drive. When the output becomes
active, the drive is shown in VMO as 'running'. The drive can be switched on and off via VMO in local operation .
n/a: The drive in VMO is not linked with any signal. This motor should be deactivated in VMO.
P35.03 Controller Magnitude (Block 1) Default: n/a
The signal running over the selected output channel is linked to the controller magnitude for the drive. The value of the controller
magnitude is shown in VMO and can be specified in VMO in local operation.
n/a: The drive is not linked to any signal. This setting is selected when the drive is operated at a constant speed.
P35.04 Controller Magnitude Offset (Block 1) Default: 0 mA
The controller magnitude flow where the motor stops right out of rotating operation so that it no longer conveys bulk solids.
P35.05 JOG enable (Block 1) Default: NO
Activating switching on the drive even with a defect.
NO: The drive cannot be switched on with an alarm.
YES: When there is an alarm, the motor can still be started in local operation of VMO. However, it only runs until the start button is
pressed. This operating mode only makes sense with belt drives that have to be started with belt drift to move the belt into normal
position again.
P35.06 Release local Start (Block 1) Default: n/a
The definition of the input channel of the signal for releasing local operations in VMO. The VMO can only be switched in local
operation when this signal is on. This input makes it possible to switch in local operation via key switch or with signals from the
host computer.
n/a: Local operation can be selected in VMO at any time.
Note: the parameters MOTOR1.MAN_AUTO or GENPAR.KEYB_CMN_MODE also have to be set in VMO.

Parameters
P35.07 DI: External Error 1 (Block 1) Default: n/a
The definition of the input channel for the 1st malfunction signal.
Exception: Refer to P35.05 JOG enable (Block 1)
The malfunction inputs P35.07, P35.08 and P35.09 work at the same priority. The drive cannot be switched on in local operation if
there is one of these malfunctions.
The definition of the input channel for the 2nd malfunction signal.
The definition of the input channel for the 3rd malfunction signal.
P35.10 DO: ON Motor (2nd) (Block 1) Default: n/a
The definition of the output channel for the 'drive is running' signal. The output is active precisely when the output defined via
P35.02 ON in Remote (Block 1) is also active.
P35.11 Motor Select (Block 2) Default: VMO1 Motor2

active
Refer to the corresponding parameter for drive block 1 (P35.01 Motor Select (Block 1) to P35.10 DO: ON Motor (2nd) (Block 1)) for
the function.
the function.
the function.
the function.

Parameters
the function.
the function.
the function.
the function.
the function.
the function.
P35.21 Motor Select (Block 3) Default: not active

active
the function.
the function.
the function.

Parameters
the function.
the function.
the function.
the function.
the function.
the function.
the function.

active
the function.
the function.

Parameters
the function.
the function.
the function.
the function.
the function.
the function.
the function.
the function.

active
the function.

Parameters
the function.
the function.
the function.
the function.
the function.
the function.
the function.
the function.
the function.
7.4.2.36 Parameter Block 36 - Local Mode (Gate)

The parameters of this group are only relevant if a VMO model local operating panel is used to control the
drives. Drives can be controlled individually in local operation for service jobs.

Parameters
This block contains the parameters for position-controlled prefeeders that are controlled by the VCU with the
'Open' and 'Closed' signals.
You can find a logic diagram of the local control unit in the appendix.
Note: Communication to the VMO has to be activated via parameters P01.12 to P01.15 Event: Communica-
tion VMO20100-Unit 2.
Furthermore, the parameters in the VMO should also be adjusted accordingly in addition to the pa-
rameters in the VCU. This is generally done at the manufacturer's.
P36.01 Motor Select Default: VMO1 Motor5

active
Select the drive in VMO that is assigned the parameter block. It is then operated in VMO with the appropriate line.
VMOx MotorY: The drive is linked to motor Y in VMO x.
P36.02 OPEN in Remote Default: n/a
The definition of the output channels for the 'open feed gate' signal.
P36.03 DI: Limit Switch OPEN Default: n/a
The definition of the input channel for the 'feed gate open in end position' signal. The limit switch stops the further operation of the
slide gate in the OPEN direction to protect the mechanical equipment.
P36.04 CLOSE in Remote Default: n/a
The definition of the output channels for the 'close feed gate' signal.
P36.05 DI: Limit Switch CLOSE Default: n/a
The definition of the input channel for the 'feed gate is closed in end position' signal. The limit switch stops the further operation of
the slide gate in the CLOSED direction to protect the mechanical equipment.
P36.06 Release local Start Default: n/a
The definition of the input channel of the signal for releasing local operations in VMO. The VMO can only be switched in local
operation when this signal is on. This input makes it possible to switch in local operation via key switch or with signals from the
host computer.
n/a: Local operation can be selected in VMO at any time.
Note: the parameters MOTOR1.MAN_AUTO or GENPAR.KEYB_CMN_MODE also have to be set in VMO.

Parameters
P36.07 DI: External Error 1 Default: n/a
The definition of the input channel for the 1st malfunction signal.
The malfunction inputs P36.07, P36.08 and P36.09 work at the same priority.
The definition of the input channel for the 2nd malfunction signal.
The definition of the input channel for the 3rd malfunction signal.

Event Messages
8 Event Messages
DANGER
Events register abnormal states, e.g. malfunctions or exceeded
threshold values.
A running feeder can be a hazard to people or to property.
The cause of event messages must be corrected before events are
acknowledged!
Event messages are grouped together.
Group identifier Event domain
SY Internally monitoring the control system
SC Irregularities in operator control or peripheral control
WE Fault in the external power electronics
WM Fault in the mechanical system
MF Fault in the bulk material flow
IL Messages from interlocking with system control
CO Internal controller malfunction message
CA Adjustment fault
HI Threshold value exceeded upwards
LO Threshold value exceeded downwards
Tab. 35 : Event groups
Note:
In the following list, parameters related to the indicated event are shown in parentheses.
8.1 Events Details
8.1.1 Event Group: Calibration

CA01 Event: Error LC Input (P07.03)
Actions:
- Check cabling
- check the load cell
Note:
fied.

Event Messages
CA03 Event: Error LC Input (Bin) (P22.07)
Steps to take :
- check the cabling and the load cell
- if the cabling is intact: replace the load cell amplifier VME in the VCU
Note:
fied.
CA05 Event: Linearization Error (P33.10)
Not a monotonically increasing curve.
A monotonically increasing compensation curve is monitored when:

- linearization is switched on,
- a parameter is altered
CA06 Event: Tare Correction (P26.03)
The event is identified when the total of the corrections of the zero settings would be in excess of the threshold value in P10.04
Zeroing Limit.
Possible causes:
- substantial build-up of bulk material on the measuring chute
- substantial air flow in the meter
- shunt forces from the measuring chute against the non-stationary part
Actions:
- check the measuring equipment
- clean the device
See also:
P26.01 Auto Zero Active
P26.02 Auto Zero Limit
8.1.2 Event Group: Check Measurement

CH02 Event: Minimum Fill Weight (P24.14)
The fill level has fallen below the threshold value in P24.13 Minimum Fill Weight during a check. The control measurement is
finished early.
Possible cause:
- bulk material density greater than specified
- unfavorable adjustment of P24.11 Check Quantity or P24.13 Minimum Fill Weight or P24.12 Storage Quantity
CH03 Event: Maximum Fill Weight (P24.16)
The maximum fill level was exceeded during the check. The control measurement is finished early.
Possible cause:
The storage quantity (P24.12 Storage Quantity) is greater than the maximum control fill level (P24.15 Maximum Fill Weight). The
check will be canceled just after it starts. In case of an error, check the magnitude of both parameters.

Event Messages
CH04 Event: Absolute Tare Correction Error (P24.27)
The current correction would make the sum of all zero-point corrections greater than the threshold value P24.25 Absolute Range
since the last basic tare calibration. There is no automatic correction. The operator can acknowledge the message and enter the
result manually. Monitoring and messaging occur in the acknowledgement phase. The correction weighting factor P24.31
Correction Evaluation is not taken into account in the error analysis.
Cause of the event:

Actions:
CH05 Event: Relative Tare Correction Error (P24.28)
The result of the current correction deviates more greatly than the threshold value P24.26 Relative Range from that of the last
measurement. There is no automatic correction. The operator can acknowledge the message and enter the result manually. It is
monitored and reported in the acknowledgement phase. The correction weighting factor P24.31 Correction Evaluation is not taken
into account in the error analysis.
Cause of the event:

Actions:
CH06 Event: Absolute Span Correction Error (P24.29)
The threshold in P24.25 Absolute Range was exceeded by the sum of all corrections for multiplicative errors.
Bprod = (1 - B * K) * 100 %
Bprod: Sum of all previous corrections as a %

K: product of all previous corrections stored in P10.01 Range Correction
CH07 Event: Relative Span Correction Error (P24.30)
The multiplicative error just ascertained exceeds the threshold value in P24.26 Relative Range.
Brel = (1 - B )× 100 %
Brel: error relative to the current adjustment of the continuous scales as a %

CH08 Event: Feeder Not Stopped (P24.20)
The control waits until conveyance into the control bin is stopped.
Possible cause:
- long time required to end filling
- incorrect control sequence for bin filling

Event Messages
CH09 Event: No Check Release (P24.06)
This event is identified if a check has been started but the plant control has not authorized one.
Generally, no steps need to be taken. The event serves only as an indication of the missing authorization.
CH10 Event: Prepare Check Measurement (P24.21)
The check procedure is in the filling phase or settling time or the fill level is still greater than the maximum check fill level (P24.15
Maximum Fill Weight).
For information only. In general, nothing else needs to be done.
CH11 Event: Expect Acceptance (P24.23)
At the end the check system waits for a decision by the operator:
a) accept correction result, correct continuous scales

b) discard correction result and cancel
If 'automatic correction' is active, the operator need only act if a tolerance level is exceeded (P24.02 Auto Correction = YES).
Step: Communicate decision about correction
CH12 Event: Check Gate Error (P24.37)
The control gate did not reach its end position within the tolerance time.
Possible cause:
- gate has no power
- gate is stuck
Also refer to:

P24.36 Check Gate Time
CH13 Event: Bin Error (P24.39)
Large disturbances in the weight signal of the control bin were detected during the check. The check was canceled and the result
discarded. It is also canceled if the event class has been set to IG.
Possible cause:
- force bypasses at the control bin
- pressure forces acting on the control bin
- wind forces acting on the control bin
Also refer to: P24.38 Limit Max. Bin Error
8.1.3 Event Group: Controller

CO01 Event: Controller Limited (P07.13)
The Controller Magnitude of the feed rate regulator has reached the upper response threshold. After a time message HI05
(P07.12) will be output.
1. No material is flowing or material flow is irregular.
2. The external output regulator has been incorrectly set.
Step to take: check the material discharge and the Controller Magnitude (service value Y). At Maximum Flow Rate Io Y should be
between about 10...14 mA.

Event Messages
CO02 Event: MIN Flow Gate (P34.09)
The event is identified when the prefeeder has run past the limit switch for the minimum position. It is used to protect the mechani-
cal equipment.
Possible causes:
Actions:
CO03 Event: MAX Flow Gate (P34.11)
The event is identified when the prefeeder has run past the limit switch for the maximum position. It is used to protect the mechan-
ical equipment.
Possible causes:
Actions:
CO04 Event: Bin Load MAX Sensor (P22.29)
The fill level sensor reports a too-high fill level in the hopper.
Possible causes:
- the weight of the bulk material is very low so that the weight-controlled filling is not shutting off soon enough.
- the refill equipment is not closing correctly.
- the upper fill threshold level P22.13 Control Level MAX has been set too high.
An overfilled hopper can lead to inaccurate check measurements and so to false adjustment of the calculation of the flow rate.
CO06 Event: MAX Flow Gate (B) (P23.40)
The prefeeder to the bin has exceeded its limit switch in the direction of the largest opening.
Possible causes:
Actions:
CO10 Event: MIN Flow Gate (B) (P23.38)
The prefeeder to the bin has exceeded its limit switch in the direction of the smallest opening.
Possible causes:
Actions:

Event Messages
8.1.4 Event Group: Electrical System

WE01 Event: Power Failure (P07.07)
This event is identified once the power supply is restored.
The scales will not switch on automatically regardless of the event class. The event must first be acknowledged and the command
to start given again before the scales will restart.
WE02 Event: NAMUR Error VCU1-DI6 (P13.09)
Possible cause:
Possible cause:
Possible cause:
Possible cause:
Possible cause:

Event Messages
Possible cause:
WE08 Event: Analog Input < Offset (P07.15)
One of the analog inputs has a smaller signal than the zero-point offset that was set.
A tolerance of 0.4 mA has been set to avoid constant setting and clearing of the input signal, in case this input signal should hap-
pen to be unsettled.
WE13 Event: NAMUR Error VMO1-DI7 (P13.21)
Possible cause:
WE14 Event: NAMUR Error VMO2-DI7 (P13.22)
Possible cause:
8.1.5 Event Group: Interlock

IL01 Event: Run Disabled (P04.06)
No release signal from the source determined by P04.05 Source Run Enable.
If this event is pending then the downstream transport equipment is most likely not switched on.
IL02 Event: Mechanics (P28.10)

IL03 Event: Electricity (P28.12)

IL04 Event: Mechatronics (P28.15)

IL05 Event: Not Ready (P28.17)

IL06 Event: Not Ready for Start (P28.19)


Event Messages
IL10 Event: FCB-Error (P29.22)
This event is identified if the function block link loaded does not correspond to the link stored in the parameter.
Caution: It probably does not have the full functionality. Unreliable operating states may arise.
Possible causes:
- it forgot to load the correct link after exchanging the VCU.
- the name in the parameter was changed manually.
Steps to be taken:
Load the function block link to the correct name given in P29.21 FCB Variant. No further links can be loaded as long as this event
is identified. If in this error state a link with a different name should be loaded, the new name must first be entered into P29.21.
IL11 Event: Wrong System Time (P16.05)
The event is identified if the operating voltage of the electronic system was switched off for so long that the real-time clock reset
itself to its default value. The supply voltage buffer for the clock is guaranteed only for one week if there is no supply voltage.
Remedy: the clock should be set to the current time to ensure that the data are recorded with the correct time.
8.1.6 Event Group: Material Flow

MF05 Event: Moisture MAX (P25.10)
The measured value of the interference quantity (for instance, the moisture) has been exceeded. Feeding errors may arise.
Possible cause:
- extremely damp bulk material
- moisture measurement measuring error
Also refer to: P25.08 Moisture MAX, P25.09 DO: Moisture MAX
MF06 Event: Out of Tolerance (P15.21)
The batch result is outside the tolerance range.
Possible causes:
- highly erratic material flow
- altered feeder discharge behavior
- error in weight calculation due to disturbance forces
MF07 Event: Batch setpoint Limit (P15.25)
Erroneously entered batch setpoint. The value entered is reduced to the permissible upper limit in P15.24 Batch Setpoint Limit.
Possible causes:
- incorrect entry
- incorrect upper threshold
Also refer to: P15.24 Batch Setpoint Limit

Event Messages
8.1.7 Event Group: MAX

HI01 Event: LC Input > MAX (P07.05)
The load acting on the load cell is greater than 110 % of the sum of the nominal loads of the load cells.

Possible causes:
- Shunt forces or compression ratios bring about incorrect load cell loading
- incorrect cabling
- faulty load cell
HI02 Event: Actual Flow Rate MAX (P09.04)
Actual feed rate greater than the maximum value set in P09.03 Limit: Actual Flow Rate MAX
Possible causes:
- bulk material shooting out of the discharge chute
- Output setpoint too large
HI05 Event: Deviation (P07.12)
Maximum Deviation exceeded. The actual feed rate has deviated to far from the setpoint over too long a period of time.
Possible causes:
1. Material has been incorrectly handled:

- the bulk material is flowing irregularly or cannot be discharged satisfactorily
- arching in the feed hopper
- there is a backup on the discharge side
- a large quantity of material continues to trickle from the feeder
2. The controller has at times come against its limits:

- error in the electronics
- check the cable to the external output regulator and to the motor. Check the output regulator settings (current limiting,
speed range).
3. Calibration error:
- The controller was set at such a critical value during initial calibration that minor changes in the bulk solids of the system
lead to unreliable operation.
Also refer to:

P07.08 Time Deviation

Event Messages
HI10 Event: LC Input > MAX (Bin) (P22.08)
The load cell load is greater than 110 % of the sum of the load cell nominal loads.

Possible reasons:
- incorrect cabling
- faulty load cell
HI11 Event: Bin Level MAX (P22.19)
The bin level has exceeded the upper threshold.
Possible cause:
- refilling not switching off correctly
8.1.8 Event Group: MIN

LO01 Event: LC Input < MIN (P07.04)
The load cell load is less than 3 % of the sum of the load cell nominal loads.
Possible causes:
- incorrect cabling
- faulty load cell
LO02 Event: Actual Flow Rate MIN (P09.02)
The actual feed rate is lower than the minimum value P09.01 Limit: Actual Flow Rate MIN.
Possible causes:
- no bulk material
- feed rate setpoint too low
LO11 Event: Bin Level MIN (P22.16)
The bin level has underrun the lower threshold.
Possible cause:
- refilling working incorrectly
8.1.9 Event Group: Sequence Monitoring

SC01 Event: Setpoint Limited (P07.06)
Cause of the event:

Depending on the respective mode of operation:
a) The setpoint is limited to P03.02 Maximum Flow Rate Io in gravimetric operation.
b) The setpoint is limited to three times the value of P03.02 Maximum Flow Rate Io in volumetric operation.

Event Messages
SC02 Event: Stand-By (P07.01)
Scales are in standby operation, i.e. the controller magnitude to the feed drive is smaller than the threshold value set in P07.02
Stand-By Limit Value. The feeder drive is switched off. The 'running' state will still be displayed.
This function protects the motor from overheating at very low speeds or when idling.
Actions:
Key in the larger setpoint and check P07.02 Stand-By Limit Value.
SC03 Event: Maint.Feeder Run (P16.04)
The sum of the runtimes of the conveying elements is greater than the time P16.03 Maintenance Feeder Run.
SC04 Event: Maint. Electric (P16.02)
The sum of the times during which the mains voltage is on is greater than the time P16.01 Maintenance Electric.
SC05 Event: External Event 1 (P13.01)
Possible cause: depends on the external cabling. Usually: an error in the main drive
8.1.10 Event Group: System Message

SY01 Event: Memory (P07.14)
The program and parameters memory are checked cyclically. An error has occurred during that. The scales will no longer function
correctly.
Steps to take:
- load the factory settings
- Normally the hardware has to be replaced.
SY02 Event: Communication VCU20100-Unit 2 (P01.06)

Event Messages
SY03 Event: Communication VCU20100-Unit 3 (P01.10)
SY04 Event: Communication HMI 1 (P02.06)
Error in the communication with the first DISOCONT operator panel.
Error in communication with the second DISOCONT operating console.
Error in the communication with the third DISOCONT operator panel.
SY07 Event: Communication VHM serial (P02.11)
This event is detected when the connection via the serial RS485 interface to a VHM operating panel is interrupted.
Causes of this event:

Scales receives no message from the operating console during a tolerance period
Steps:
- check cable connection
- check that operating console is correctly functioning
- check the operating console settings
- check the addresses of the scales at the RS485 data bus (P01.11 VHM RS485 Address)
SY08 Event: Cyclic Communication (P18.03)
Cyclical serial communication with the higher-order plant control system has been interrupted for longer than the timeout-period in
P18.02.
To rectify: check cable connections.
SY10 Event: Acyclic Communication (P18.04)
Incorrect data in the noncyclical communication from the host computer.
Possible cause: poor programming of the host computer
SY15 Event: Communication VMO20100-Unit 1 (P01.13)
This event is identified when communication with the first local operating terminal VMO 201xx with local bus address 11 is disrupt-
ed. Check the cables and the address setting if an error occurs.
SY16 Event: Communication VMO20100-Unit 2 (P01.15)
This event is identified when communication with the second local operating terminal VMO 201xx with local bus address 12 is
disrupted. Check the cables and the address setting if an error occurs.

Appendix
9 Appendix
Details of special functions are described in this chapter.
9.1 Setpoint and switch-on sources

Setpoint can be set and feed on and off commands can come from different sources.
Fig. 13: Setpoint and switch-on sources
The sources are preselected with parameters in the 'Control Sources' group.
You can use the 'OP Mode' function to switch back and forth between the pre-selected sources and the key-
board (see >Switching Keyboard Operation ON/OFF<).
Parameter Function Source
P04.01 Feeder Start OP = keyboard

FB = fieldbus
DI = contact
P04.02 Feedrate Setpoint OP = keyboard

FB = fieldbus
AI = analog input (A/D)
P04.07 Source Relative Setpoint n/a = not assigned
Setpoint with a percentage quantifier OP = keyboard

AI = analog input
The effective setpoint is displayed on the operating panel. The setpoint input field is available only if the pa-
rameters allow input via the operating panel.

Appendix
A new window for entering the relative component will open when the setpoint field is touched if the relative
setpoint qualifier was pre-selected with the operating panel.
Setpoint synchronization:
The external setpoint will be taken if the source of the setpoint is switched from an external source to the
keyboard (OP). The external source has its effect in the opposite direction.
On/Off synchronization:
The on/off switch status is retained when switching from an external source to the keyboard (OP). The exter-
nal source has its effect in the opposite direction.
Mains Power OFF:
The keyboard setpoints are stored.
Flow Chart of the Start and Stop Sequence
Fig. 14: The start and stop sequence
Time Condition
1 Feeding does not begin with the on command since the release signal has not been given.
2 To start, the scales requires the rising slope of a start command.
3 Feeding is started with the rising slope.
4 Feed rate control will operate in volumetric operation (also refer to >Regulation Operation Modes<)
during the start up time defined by T1 = P06.01.
5 Changing over to normal gravimetrically controlled feeding operation (assuming gravimetric mode was
previously selected). Control stays in volumetric mode (assuming it was previously selected by the
operator).
6 Feeding will be switched off if there is no all-clear signal (or if the switch on command was removed).

Appendix
Time Condition
7 Feed rate recording continues over the time set by T2 = P06.02 to capture trickling bulk solids. After-
wards, the feed rate is no longer calculated; the counter stays at the level already achieved.
Tab. 36 : The states and points in time in the flow chart
Parameter Function
P06.01 Duration of the volumetric T1 start up period
P06.02 Continuation of totalizing after turning off T2 feeding (afterflow totalizer)
P04.01 Source of the on signal
P04.05 Source of the all-clear signal
P14.01 Scales signal output switched on
Tab. 37 : Relevant parameters
In Case of Alarm:
The feeder drive is switched off immediately if an alarm is triggered. The feed rate will continue to be record-
ed even past the time set in P06.02Afterflow Measurement Time.
Measurement and Displays:

The platform load will always be calculated and displayed. The totalized amount of material will only be cal-
culated with the feeder switched on and during the Afterflow Measurement Time (P06.02).

Appendix
9.2 Measuring the flow rate (measure)
Fig. 15: A simplified signal flow diagram
LC Load cell D Rotation point
Q The load on the load cell CW Calibration weight
a The distance between 'calibration weight' b The distance between the 'force application load
and 'fulcrum' cell' and 'fulcrum'
Ua The load cell output voltage Aw [%] The load cell utilization as a % of its rated capacity
Qm The measured load in kg Iu [kg/h] The measured feed rate in kg/h before linearization
and correction
LIN Linearizer I [kg/h] The measured feed rate
Q [kg] The measured load on the load cell CWT The CW: Span Calibration calibration program
Parameters Name Meaning
P05.01 LC: Load Measurement Select the physical input channel
P05.02 LC Characteristic Value The transmission factor of the load cell according to the data
sheet
P05.05 LC Rated Capacity The total of the rated capacities of the load cells used accord-
ing to the data sheet
P05.06 Device Constant The transmission factor of the mass flow → force according to
the data sheet

Appendix
P10.01 Range Correction Optional correction factor after a calibration weight check
P10.02 Basic Tare Tare as the result of the TW: Tare calibration program
P10.03 Tare Correction The zero setting results of the >0< Zero Set calibration pro-
gram
P10.06 Tare Correction Check Tare correction from the » automatic check system [➙50]«
P10.07 Calibration Weight Effective calibration weight = CW * a / b
P10.08 Material Correction Correction via »material control [➙57]« or »automatic control
[➙50]«
9.3 Flow rate regulation

A feed rate controller is available only if P03.01 has been set to YES.
The feed rate is controlled via volumetric discharge performance of the feeder before the measuring unit.
The device adjusts this capacity so that the measured mass flow corresponds to feed rate setpoint.
Different types of feeder are used. Two different controller models are available for this. The controller model
is selected via P11.01.
The controller P11.01 Controller The feeder model

model magnitude
Constant controller Continuous 0 (4) ... 20 mA A continuously rotating feeder such as a helix or starwheel, …
The feed gate with built-in pneumatic or electric position control
The parameter has no effect in the Flow Gate block
Step controller Stepping OPEN and The feed gate driven by a motor with position feedback
CLOSE The parameters in the Flow Gate block configure the characteris-
contacts
tics
Tab. 39 : Controller models and how they are used
9.3.1 Constant controller

The following figure shows a simplified schematic diagram of the control circuit for operating a mass flow
feeder.

Appendix
Fig. 16: Controller VIF
PF Volumetric feeder Q [kg/h] The measured load on the load cell
I [kg/h] Actual feed rate P [kg/h] Feed rate setpoint
Xd [%] The deviation in percent of the nominal Event Event identification

feed rate (P03.02)
OFF Behavior when feeding is switched off K The value of the VHM input keyboard
S The value from serial fieldbus coupling A The value from the analog input
VOL Operation mode switch volumet- Measure Refer to »Measuring the flow rate (measure)
ric/gravimetric [➙182]« for signal processing
P03.02 Maximum Flow Rate Io The nominal feed rate from the data sheet
P04.02 Feedrate Setpoint Select the input cable for the setpoint feed rate

Appendix
P06.01 Volumetric Start-Up The duration of start-up operations after feeding has been
switched on
P08.01 LC Filter The filter for the load cell signal
P11.02 P-Component KP The proportion of the PI controller
P11.03 I-Component TN PI controller readjusting time
P11.04 Lower Limit The lower limit of the actuating variable
P11.05 Upper Limit Setpoint-dependent upper threshold of the actuating variable

(see below for details)
P11.06 Controller Magnitude Offset Increase of the controller actuating variable
P11.07 Position at STOP The definition of the behavior of the controller actuating varia-
ble when feeding is switched off
P11.08 Bypass The setpoint-bypass constant
P11.09 Store The definition of the integral component's behavior when feed-
ing is switched off
P11.10 Setpoint Filter 1st Ord The time constant of the 1st setpoint filter
P11.11 Setpoint Filter 2nd Ord The time constant of the 2nd setpoint filter
P11.17 Compensation Element Compensation for avoiding contouring errors
P11.12 KP Adaptation Controlling velocity depending upon the setpoint
P11.13 Setpoint Threshold The setpoint threshold below which the P11.12 is effective
PI controller with bypass details

The central control unit consists of a PI controller for the feed rate of the model
The standard PI controller also is equipped with a setpoint bypass (P11.08). The bypass quickly carries out
setpoint jumps even if the controller is set to slow reaction. It also enables controlled (volumetric) operation.
To prevent overshoot, the setpoint is decoupled from the actual controller by means of a control loop simula-
tion (P11.10 and P11.11). The controller is also equipped with a setpoint-dependant actuating variable limiter
(P11.04 and P11.05). The controller is stopped and an event is identified (message) when the lower or upper
controller actuating variable limit has been reached.
The relationship between the controller parameters and the actuating variable is shown schematically in the
following diagram.

Appendix
Parameter Special case

value
KP = 0 I-controller: TN is the reciprocal value of the integration constants,

i. e. large value = slow controller KI = 1/TN in % / (mA/s)
TN = 0 P-controller: I-component will be deleted
KP = TN = 0 Controller output = increase
Tab. 41 : Special cases for KP and TN parameters
Parameters Effect
P06.01 Volumetric Start-Up The duration of volumetric start-up operation once the scales has been switched on
in seconds
P11.09 Store NO: The I-proportion is not stored when switching off
YES: The I-proportion is stored when switched off and has an impact when starting
up
YES-A: The I-proportion is stored when switched off and has an impact when start-
ing up when feeding is not switched off by an alarm.
P11.08 Bypass One value is superimposed additively on the actuating variable, proportionally to the
preset setpoint. This parameter gives the bypass value for the nominal setpoint.
P11.10 Setpoint Filter 1st Ord The filters delays the setpoint for the controller while the bypass is sent unhindered
to the actuating variable.
P11.11 Setpoint Filter 2nd Ord This has the purpose of approximately adjusting the time characteristics of the con-
trol loop to prevent the actual value from overshooting on setpoint jumps.
P11.17 Compensation Element This additional constant integral member in the control deviation branch can have
the following favorable effects:
Contouring errors brought about by monotonous variable malfunctions (such as
control measurement equipment).
Constant control deviations with actuators with a non-symmetric effect.
The compensation element only has an impact in gravimetric operation and pa-
rameters P11.17 ≠ zero. Input and output are limited to ±5 %.
P11.12 KP Adaptation This parameter can be used to evaluate the proportional component of the controller
depending upon the feed rate set value.
KP Adaptation = 1 : KP is independent on the setpoint
KP Adaptation = 0 : KP decreases in proportion to the setpoint
KP Adaptation = 2 : KP increases in proportion to the setpoint

Appendix
Parameters Effect
P11.13 Setpoint Threshold The upper limit for evaluating the control deviation by the setpoint as per P11.12
Tab. 42 : Set-up notes for parameters in the constant controller
Condition Behavior
Change in the parameter val- The I component is not converted when parameters are changed which means that
ues there might be jumps in the controller actuating variable Y. If these jumps cannot be
tolerated, there should only be major changes in the (P11.08) bypass when feeding is
switched off.
Network connection The stored values in the I component and in the filters are set to zero.
Switch off feeding Stored components of the setpoint filter are set to zero. The value of the I component
is determined by P11.09.
Starting up feeding The feeder is switched on when all conditions are met.
The actuating variable is set to the value of the setpoint bypass. The increase overlaps
additively in P11.06 with the stored I-component of the controller as perP11.09.
Simultaneously the setpoint filter starts working from zero.
The feed rate controller works in volumetric mode during the startup period after
P06.01. Once this startup period has elapsed the controller is actuated and gravimetric
operation will commence.
Standby The drive that protects the motor is switched off if the setpoint drops below the limit set
in P07.02 for longer than three seconds. The controller actuating variable is set to the
lower value as determined by P11.06. The device will contrinue to indicate that feeding
is running.
The controller does not function and the I component of the feed rate controller is de-
leted or remains stored depending upon P11.09.
Measuring remains active.
Normal operating mode will be re-engaged if the setpoint exceeds the threshold set in
P07.02.
Gravimetric operating mode The material feeder regulates the actual feed rate to the effective setpoint.
Volumetric operating mode Only the setpoint bypass and rise act as a controller actuating variable. The feeder is
controlled proportional to the setpoint. The I component of the controller is deleted
regardless of the P11.09 while the setpoint filters continue to run.
Volumetrically synchronous In contrast to volumetric operation, switching synchronously from gravimetric to volu-
operation type metric makes it possible to switch over from the gravimetric operating mode without a
bump by including the current controller output value.
Simulation The control loop is closed internally during simulation operation. The measured values
Q and n are also simulated (Q = Qnom, n = nominal speed).
The simulated value is shown as the feed rate. The actuating variable Y is proportional
to the setpoint and is 10 mA if the rated setpoint is entered.
In simulation mode the operating modes, on/off switching sources and setpoint
sources function as usual.
The task: testing the plant, especially the control processes. Learning operation.
The characteristics in the The components stored in the controller are set to zero when selectively switching off
'Prefeeder – Stop' mode the feeder just as when switching off feeding. However, totalizing continues to function.
Tab. 43 : Characteristics in special operational states

Appendix
Monitoring Control Deviation

The control deviation is displayed and monitored in gravimetric operation only.
The display, but not the monitoring system input, is filtered by parameter P08.05.
Event message P07.08 will be triggered if the value of the error signal Xd exceeds the limit value S1 for a
duration defined in parameter "Event: Deviation". Monitoring will restart if the error signal falls below the
threshold during this time.
At the same time, the control deviation value is filtered (filter time in parameter P07.08) and the filter output is
monitored. Event 'Event: Deviation' will be identified if the filter output exceeds the threshold value S2.
Threshold values S1 and S2 can be adapted to the current feed rate setpoint by means of the following for-
mulas:
S1 = P07.09 * [P07.10 + (1 - P07.10) * feed rate setpoint / P03.02]
S2 = P07.11 * [P07.10 + (1 - P07.10) * feed rate setpoint / P03.02]
The following diagram illustrates the relationship using with examples for threshold value S1.
P Feed rate setpoint S Limit value S1 or S2
LIM Limit Value in P07.09 or. P07.11 F Influence Factor P07.10
9.3.2 Step controller

The controller functions as a three-point switch to moving position-controlled flow gates OPEN and CLOSED
and feed gates, etc. The controller model is switched on via P11.01 = Stepping and is only available for feed-
ing systems (P03.01 = YES).

Appendix
Fig. 17: Step-by-Step controller VIF
Parameters Effect
P11.14 The proportional component (P component) of the stepping controller.

The reference quantity is the nominal feed rate in P03.02
P11.15 Readjusting time

This is the time when the same controller actuating variable change is caused by the I component
as by the P component.
P11.16 The trigger threshold in % of P03.02

The trigger threshold should be greater than the smallest possible step of the actuator.
The feeder will remain still if the control deviation is smaller than the trigger threshold.
P11.17 The time constant of the compensation element

The compensation element contains an additional integrator (refer to constant controller) to bal-
ance out contouring errors dependant upon bin levels. The compensation element only functions
in gravimetric operation.
The compensation element is ineffective at P11.17 = 0.
Tab. 44 : The control parameters for the step controller

Appendix
Value Meaning
Network ON Delete contents of all memory-retaining elements

(controller and compensation integrator)
Scales OFF The 'feeder ON' contact is reset and all elements to be stored are deleted.
Scales ON The scales begins to work in volumetric operation until the start-up period has elapsed.
It will then switch to gravimetric control.
Volumetric operation Switch M at 'Vol. Startup'

The feeder is set to a position proportional to the setpoint. The compensation integrator is
deleted and inoperative.
Gravimetric operation Switch M is at 'Grav.' (position shown).

The actual feed rate is set to the effective setpoint by means of the feeder position.
The compensation integrator is active.
Tab. 45 : Switching and operational states
The internal structure of the step-by-step controller
Fig. 18: The feed gate control logic
The EXTERNAL component is not part of the device but rather shows one possible implementation of a 'lo-
cal circuit' for connecting to a model FAE8202 power unit.

Appendix
Drawing elements Meaning
Switch menu The operating elements of the control unit or in EasyServe
Min The limit switch for the MIN feeder position
Max The limit switch for the MAX feeder position
Tab. 46 : Some signals of the control logic
The 'Open', 'Stop' and 'Closed' switch positions are only available in feeder manual control.
The limit switches Min and Max prevent the feeder thresholds from being exceeded.
9.4 Batch Operation Control

The following figure shows the batching operation process.
Fig. 19: Batching flow chart diagram
PB Batching setpoint in kg T3 The duration of the adaptation period

(P15.15)
m Mass fed T4 The duration of dribble feed phase 2

(P15.17)

Appendix
T2 P06.02 Measure Recording the actual feed rate and calculat-

Afterflow Measurement Time ing the totalizing counter
PR Effective feed rate setpoint Feed The switch-on command to the feeder's
discharge organ
Main_Spd The command for feeding in full feed Dbl_Spd The command for feeding in dribble speed
1
Dbl_Spd2 The command for feeding in dribble speed B_On The 'batch running' output signal
2
ON Output signal active OFF Output signal passive
State Transitions During Feeding as per the Flow Chart Diagram
No. Transition in states
0 Start the batch by switching on the scales. The batch setpoint has to be entered first. The setpoint can no
longer be altered once the batch is running.
1 Interrupt operation by turning off the scales. The totalizing counter still measures for the time entered in T2 =
P06.02 Afterflow Measurement Time.
2 Resume batch by turning on the scales. This can also be done during the Afterflow Measurement Time.
3 The feed rate setpoint is reduced to zero (but only with controlling systems) and the P15.09 DO: Dribble Feed
and P15.10 DO: Full Feed signals swap levels.
The switching time is before the calculated batch end time by the period defined in P15.15 (batch setpoint
reached).
Behavior of the feed rate setpoint (in regulating systems only):
▪ Case A: P15.03 = Ramp
– If the current setpoint is lower than P15.16, the setpoint will be continuously reduced to zero as per the
A1 process in the diagram.
– If the current setpoint is greater than P15.16, the setpoint will be suddenly switched to the value de-
fined by P15.16 and then continuously reduced to zero as per the process A2 in the diagram.
▪ Case B: P15.03 = Steps
The value will be reduced to the value set by P15.16 to the time defined by P15.15. The setpoint will be
reduced again to the value given by P15.18 (process A3 in the diagram) at the point in time given by
P15.17 before the end. Simultaneously the signal P15.19 DO: Dribble Feed 2 is also set.
4 A batch is ended if the setpoint minus the 'Correction Amount' defined in P15.04 has been reached or if the
effective setpoint in cases A1 and A2 becomes zero. In case B, a batch is ended at the very latest after three
times the adaptation time (P15.15).
The dribble feed quantity (pre-contact) with a measuring scales results from the set adaptation time multiplied
by the dribble feed starting value.
5 The flow of bulk solids is recorded for the time entered in T2 = P06.02. That also includes the remaining trickle
of bulk solids in the measured value.
A new batch can only be started after the afterflow time has elapsed.
Tab. 47 : Process: discharge weighing with regulating loss-in-weight feeder

Appendix
Adaptation
With adaptation, a corrective quantity K is calculated from the error quantity (batch actual weight - weight
setpoint) after each completed batch and stored in the P15.04 parameter. This automatically shifts items 3 to
5 of the diagram with the next batch.
K(new) = K(old) + P15.05 * error
K(new) = new corrective quantity
Error = actual batch weight – batch setpoint
Errors greater than the batching tolerance set by P15.20 are restricted to the set tolerance value. Shortfalls
that are smaller than the smallest display digit are not corrected.
P15.05 acts as a filter parameter to ensure that P15.04 contains a mean for the bulk material overrun with.
Behavior if Alarm Triggered
If an alarm is triggered, the batch is interrupted as if feeding were switched off. The batch can be resumed
once the cause has been rectified and the event message acknowledged.
Threshold values
The P09.02 Event: Actual Flow Rate MIN event message is suppressed during the rundown time. This does
not apply to the digital output.
Feed controller in standby mode
The scales may enter standby mode during rundown time (P07.02). The corresponding message will be
suppressed.
9.5 Local operation

For service work, it is often necessary to turn on specific drives individually and without interlocking with oth-
er plant components. Service operation is not intended for running the feeder operationally.
WARNING
There is danger from moving machine parts and flowing bulk solids
Interlocking can be suspended with lowering equipment and a start up warning depending upon settings and
cabling. Special protective measures should be complied with in this operating mode!
It can either be operated in local operation with a VLG model control unit or a VMO model control unit with
display.
9.5.1 Controlling with VLG

The VLG control unit is switched on electrically between VCU and the drives. Drives can be switched on and
off individually for service purposes after switching to manual operation (unlocking the operating mode).

Appendix
Fig. 20: Local operation with VLG
Details on the design types, connections and functionality of the VLG can be found in the BV-H2406 system
manual.
9.5.2 Controlling with VMO

The VMO motor control unit communicates with the VCU through a serial interface (local bus). Drives can be
switched on and off individually for service purposes after switching to manual operation (unlocked operating
mode) and the speed can be specified for controlled drives. You can find technical data and operating in-
structions for the VMO in the BV-H2488 manual.
When using the VMO 20100, it continues to be electrically connected to the drives directly from the VCU.
The VMO acts as an input and operating unit in local operation.
Fig. 21: VMO 20100 with VCU 20100
As an alternative, the VMO control unit can also be equipped with its own interface and be switched between
VCU and the drive.

Appendix
Fig. 22: VMO 20101 with VCU
In this case, the VCU can operate the interface of the VMO in automatic operation. It is autonomously con-
trolled via VMO in manual operation. In this case, the parameters have to be adjusted in the VMO for local
operation in a way that matches the parameters of the VCU.
In both cases, the logic is wired for local operation in signal engineering between the automatic control via
VCU and the software interface to the drives.
Fig. 23: Inserted local operation logic
AUTO Control in automatic operation LOC Control in local operation
ACT Actuators: such as motors, valves and feed A Automatic Mode

gates, …
L Local Operation
The local operation logic is correspondingly notified what output signal is responsible for a drive.
For speed-controlled drives, drives with an external controller or valves the relevant parameters are in block
Local Mode (Speed) or in block Local Mode (Gate) for feed gates with open and close control.

Appendix
The LS signal source designates the logical signal issued at an output in normal (automatic) operation. Then
the local operation logic drives the appropriate output in local operation.
The monitoring inputs for local operation are taken in parallel from the inputs for automatic operation.

Appendix
9.5.2.1 Local operation logic for rotating drives and valves
Fig. 24: Local operation logic for rotating drives
Signal Meaning An example of main drive and local control

block 1
Parameter Name Value
DO DOx: Start The digital output for starting the feeder drive that is set P14.02 DO: Start DO-VCU1-
as for normal operation per parameter. Prefeeder DO1
DO DOy: Doubling the signal for reporting 'Drive is running' P14.01 DO: Feeder DO-VCU1-
start(2) Started DO6

Appendix
LS DOx: Run Input for the switch-on command in automatic opera- P35.02 ON in Remo- LS-VCU1-
tion. The signal is passed onto DO DOx in automatic te (Block 1) DO1
operation: Start.
This parameter links the local operation logic with
normal operation logic, thus stipulating which drive is
supposed to be switched in local operation.
Enable jog The parameter that defines whether the drive can be P35.05 JOG enable YES
started for set-up mode even if a malfunction is pend- (Block 1)
ing.
Loc Start Start command triggered by the start button of VMO Button on VMO
Local mode 'VMO is in Local Mode' signal. The conditions for being The state in VMO
able to switch VMO into local mode depend on the
configuration of VMO.
VMO exists The parameter that stipulates whether there is a VMO P01.12 VMO20100- YES
and if it is linked to the drive. P01.14 Unit 1 NO
P35.01 VMO1 motor
VMO20100-
1
Unit 2
Motor Select
(Block 1)
VMO OK The 'Fault-Free Communication to the VMO' signal -
Enable Loc The interlocking signal for switching on the drive in P35.06 Release local
Start local operation Start (Block
1)
DIx: Error1 The drive's error signal. The drive cannot be started P35.07 DI: External DI-VCU1-DI1
DIx: Error1 locally if there is an error. P35.08 Error 1 (Block n/a
DIx: Error1 P35.09 1) n/a
DI: External
Error 2 (Block
1)
DI: External
Error 3 (Block
1)
Loc Active Local operation is active. The signal may also switch -
the controller magnitude for controlled drives to local
input from VMO.
AO AOx The analog output for specifying the speed to the drive, P12.13 AO: Motor AO-VCU1-
set as for normal operation per parameter. Speed Con- AO1
trol

Appendix
LS AOx The input for specifying speed in automatic operation. P35.03 Controller LS-VCU1-
The signal is passed onto AO AOx in automatic opera- Magnitude AO1
tion.
(Block 1)
The parameter connects local operation logic to normal
operation logic, thus stipulating which controller magni-
tude is assigned to the drive in local operation.
LOC Speed Specifying the controller magnitude in local operation VMO input
on the VMO

Appendix
9.5.2.2 The logic for position-controlled feed gates
Fig. 25: The logic for position-controlled drives
Signal Meaning An example of feed gates and local control

block 1
Parameters Name Value
DO DOx: Open Digital output for opening the feed gate, set as for P34.01 S: DO Open DO-VCU1-
normal operation per parameter. Flow Gate DO1
DO DOx: Close Digital output for closing the feed gate, set as for nor- P34.02 S: DO Close DO-VCU1-
mal operation per parameter. Flow Gate DO2
LS DOx: Open The input for the Open command in automatic opera- P36.02 OPEN in LS-VCU1-
tion. The signal is passed onto DO DOx in automatic Remote DO1
operation: Start.

Appendix
LS DOx: Close The input for the Open command in automatic opera- P36.04 CLOSE in LS-VCU1-
tion. The signal is passed onto DO DOx in automatic Remote DO2
operation: Start.
Loc Open The command for opening the valve, triggered by the Button on VMO
button of VMO
Loc Close The command for closing the valve, triggered by the Button on VMO
button of VMO
Local Mode VMO is in Local Mode signal. The conditions for being The state in VMO
able to switch VMO into local mode depend on the
configuration of VMO.
VMO exists The parameter that stipulates whether there is a VMO P01.12 VMO20100- YES
and if it is linked to the drive. P01.14 Unit 1 NO
P35.01 VMO1 motor
VMO20100-
1
Unit 2
Motor Select
(Block 1)
VMO OK The Fault-Free Communication to the VMO signal -
Enable Loc The interlocking signal for switching on the drive in P35.06 Release local
Start local operation Start (Block
1)
DIx: Error1 The drive's error signal The drive cannot be started P35.07 DI: External DI-VCU1-DI1
DIx: Error1 locally if there is an error. P35.08 Error 1 (Block n/a
DIx: Error1 P35.09 1) n/a
DI: External
Error 2 (Block
1)
DI: External
Error 3 (Block
1)
Loc Active Local operation is active -

Appendix
9.6 Bin weigher: Scaling and Limit
Fig. 26: Bin limit values
The normal scales applies in normal operation. The fill level is regulated by the metering hopper. In intermit-
tent operation the metering hopper is activated when the fill level F-Min is underrun and is deactivated as
soon as the F-Max level is exceeded. If the metering hopper is continuously active (P23.01 = YES), the fill
level is regulated to the fill level setpoint F-Set by means of the changes in the metering hopper flow rate.
The check measurement takes over the fill regulation when a check is started. Wherever necessary, it is
filled until there are sufficient bulk solids in the bin (fill level > C-Check + C-Min). The check starts when the
fill level falls below F-Max and is stopped when the fill level falls below C-Min.

Appendix
9.7 Continuous bin fill level control
Fig. 27: VMC bin fill level controller
The fill level controller only works for the first Bin Weigher, although not for any Second Bin Weigher availa-
ble.
Setup Instructions
P23.12 can be determined in a stationary state once the transient oscillations have subsided. In this state,
the value is calculated as follows:
P23.12 = (yB - P23.14 ) × P03.02 / feed rate setpoint

Appendix
We recommend calling up the '»Optimizing Hopper Fill Level Regulation [➙49]«' adjustment program for the
control parameter after entering input the P23.07 and P23.12 parameters.

Appendix
9.8 Bin fill level regulation via feed gate
Fig. 28: Step controller for the bin fill level

Appendix
Abbreviation Meaning
B-S: Xd Service value: the control deviation for the position controller
B: Position Service value: the position of the feed gate
a) P Feed rate setpoint (P) in feeding systems

b) I The actual feed rate (I) with measuring systems
B: Xd Service value: the control deviation for the fill level controller
StepCTRL Step controller
PosCTRL The position controller for the feed gate
PowerCTRL The power control for the feeder
Conti_M Continuous measurement of the feed rate
MIN The limit switch of the minimum position
MAX The limit switch of the maximum position
Tab. 48 : The meaning of the abbreviations in the block diagram

Appendix
9.9 Details and flow chart control measurement (KME)
Fig. 29: Flow chart control measurement

Appendix
9.10 Adjusting linearization

The correlation between the actual and the measured flow rate may depart from the ideal straight lines for
differing flow rates. Some reasons might be material build-up on the deflection chute, a flow profile inde-
pendant of the flow of bulk solids or a flow velocity dependant upon the flow of bulk solids.
Please comply with the position of the linearizer in the signal branch as per the figure in »Block Diagram:
Measuring the Flow Rate [➙182]« when adjusting linearization. It is necessary to set make control meas-
urements with bulk solids (»Control with Material [➙57]«; »Automatic Control Check Systems (KME) [➙50]«)
for setting the linearization points.
Before adjusting linearization, it is necessary to calibrate the measuring equipment with linearization (P33.01
= NO) switched off. Then call up the tare function without bulk solids after keying in the relevant parameters.
Finally, it is necessary to make an initial measurement with bulk solids at the highest possible flow rate to
check and readjust the proportionality factor P10.01 Range Correction between the measured value and flow
rate wherever necessary.
Linearization should be carried out at k (k < 5) measuring points with differing flow rates I(k) in the flow rate
zone relevant to production. We recommend distributing the points I(k) with equal spaces over the relevant
zone. There is an additional point at flow rate = zero that is automatically adjusted by taring without a flow of
bulk solids. The curve is continued at a constant gradient above the highest point. This is why the two high-
est points should be sufficiently far apart from another to correctly define the gradient.
Furthermore, the points in both axes have to be rising monotonically.
Fig. 30: Linearization characteristic curve
Ideal: Straight course of the correlation between the measured value and actual feed rate
Real: The calculated non-linear course of the real characteristic curve
The figure shows the selected measuring points of the feed rate in the horizontal axis. The S(k) values to be
keyed into the parameters are as follows:
S(k) = I(k) / (P03.02 * P10.01) * 100 % ; k = 1, 2, 3, 4
The value S(k) can be read out during the measurement from the Unlin. Flow Rate service value. If the
measurement takes place in feed-rate controlled operation I(k) corresponds to the feed rate setpoint used.

Appendix
The value R(k,n+1) to be adjusted in the parameters of the vertical axis after making the measurement re-
sults from the value of the corresponding parameter R(k,n) that is active during the measurement, the value
ms of the conveyed quantity ascertained on a sufficiently precise static scale and the meter progress mc of
the Coriolis measuring unit:
R(n+1) = R(n) * ms/mc
The feed rate naturally deviates from the feed rate I(k) in the middle of the measurement at the start and end
of the measurement. To ensure that these effects have the smallest possible impact on parameter adjust-
ment, the start phase should be as brief as possible until reaching the feed rate I(k) and the take-off phase
should be as brief as possible in relation to the entire duration of the measurement. This can be supported
with a quick controller adjustment with systems controlled by feed rate. If the start- and take-off phase cannot
be selected to be brief in relation to the overall duration, all linearization points should be preset and then
checked and recalibrated. Suitable controller adjustment should guarantee a feed rate that is as constant as
possible during the measurement.
We recommend depicting the actual values of linearization for the plausibility control graphically.
9.11 Links in the Parameter Block 'Interlocking'
Fig. 31: The logic diagram of the link between events and ready messages
E: event message DI: digital input DO: digital output
Legend Parameter Signal Name
Alarm All event messages of event class ALARM
DI E 1 P28.06 DI: Event Electricity 1

Appendix
Legend Parameter Signal Name
DI EE 1 P13.02 DI: External Event 1
DI M 1 P28.01 DI: Event Mechanics 1
DO E P28.11 DO: Event Electricity
DO M P28.09 DO: Event Mechanics
DO MT 1 P28.13 DO: Event Mechatronics 1
DO MT 2 P28.14 DO: Event Mechatronics 2
DO R P28.16 DO: Ready
DO RS P28.18 DO: Ready for Start
IL02 P28.10 Event: Mechanics
IL03 P28.12 Event: Electricity
IL04 P28.15 Event: Mechatronics
IL05 P28.17 Event: Not Ready
IL06 P28.19 Event: Not Ready for Start
Int. alarm Internal alarm resulting from event messages CA01, CA02,
WM01, WM02, WM03, WM04
NO S No service mode: no keyboard mode, no local mode,

No simulation mode
Release P04.05 Source Run Enable
SC05 P13.01 Event: External Event 1
SC06 P13.03 Event: External Event 2
SC11 P13.06 DI: External Event 3
SC12 P13.08 DI: External Event 4

Appendix
NOTE: When an input source parameter accepts the value n/a, the signal is internally assumed to
be True.
Explanations:
All signal levels can be inverted by setting the associated source parameter (also refer to »Configuring the
Interfaces [➙62]«). The figure shows the factory setting.
▪ LOW: closed contact in standby, i.e. power is on. The contact is open if the signal is active (functions as
opener).
▪ HIGH: open contact in standby, i.e. power is not on. The contact is closed if the signal is active (functions
as closer).
9.12 Using alternative signals (such as analog or fieldbus) for DMS inputs
It is usual for some signals to be read in through sensors with strain gauges (DMS) such as weight, force or
pressure signals. In special cases, these signals are recorded with other types of sensors or reshaped exter-
nally so that they are available in the form of standard signals (such as 4 … 20 mA). DISOCONT Tersus
provides the option of reading in some sources of input signals via standard signals. The standard signal is
read in through an analog VAI 20100 interface and reshaped to make it correspond to the signal of a DMS
sensor. The remaining signal processing is identical for the DMS signal and standard signal.
Some measuring signals can also be read in by fieldbus to prevent faults on the transmission path. These
are also processed like DMS signals after appropriate conversion.

Appendix
Fig. 32: Alternative inputs using the example of a weight signal for an additional bin
LC DMS load cell output voltage 0 … 20 mA Input current from the external sensor
FB: kg The weight value in kg transmitted from [mV/V] A signal with the dimension mV/V
the fieldbus
Adjust Handing over the signal to the calibra- LC [mV/V] The service value of the load with the mV/V
tion programs dimension
LC_0 The rated load cell load in P22.04 LC [%] The service value of the load in percent of
LC_0
X0 Offset analog input in P22.30 Xn Range characteristic value in P22.31
S Transmission factor of the load cell in x, y Input and output values of the calculating
P22.03 blocks
Error Error signal if the physical signal is out Source Selecting the source for the signal in P22.02
of range
Corr Multiplicative correction of the trans- Tare Zero signal in P22.25 such as determined by
mission factor in P22.24 the calibration program
L The load for further use of the applica-

tion software
This figure uses recording the weight of an additional bin as an example of the form the signals of sources
other than DMS load cells are processed in. The calibration programs, service displays and parameters for
tare and correcting sensitivity remain in manual override, even though they indicate some values such as for
the DMS load cells. The figure applies accordingly to other signals such as force or pressure. The corre-
sponding parameters are in the group that also contains the parameter for selecting the signal source.

Appendix
NOTE: Please bear the fact in mind that the value resolution of a value read in through the stand-
ard signal is reduced by the resolution of the external transmitter and the VAI 20100 inter-
face assembly in relation to the input for DMS via interface VME0120 (VME0120: 24 bits
and VAI 20100: 16 bits). In addition, there can also be a temporal offset of the signal due to
scanning.
There might be additional errors in particular when forming the difference of signals (such
as differentiating) or a compensator (such as pressure compensation).
9.13 PLC Functionality (Optional)

As with a PLC, the functionality for simple additional tasks can be expanded using signal links and function
blocks. The function block links are configured using the service tool EasyServe only. Any configuration
created can be loaded into or read out of the control using EasyServe. The link becomes active immediately
after loading.
All signals available via fieldbus are available as input signals for function blocks. The output signals are
integrated into the standard DISOCONT Tersus signal processing by means of the parameters in the groups
FCB analog outputs and FCB digital outputs.
A loaded and active link is indicated on the operator panel alongside the program information using the
[Help] key. The 'Empty' link designates the factory settings without added links.
Fig. 33: Example of a function block link
In this example a binary input signal, e.g. a DISOCONT Tersus input contact, is read in through the 'GP-Din
1' input block and transmitted to the 'And1-4' AND gate via the 'Delay 1' delay and an inverter. The other
inputs of the gate are connected to the 'Bin 1' constant and a 'Cycle 1' frequency generator. The output will
make a cyclical signal available when the waiting period has elapsed after setting the input. The output of the
AND gate is transmitted to the DISOCONT Tersus standard controller with a 'GP-Dout 1' output.

Appendix
The signal must be connected to a digital output via P30.01 FCB_DO 01 to enable physical output. Many
input signals of the standard program allow signals to be read in that have been generated by the function
blocks. This requires that the signal source be set to 'FCB' and the device to 'GP' for the input signal. Then
the output channels 'DO1' … 'DO8' for binary signals and 'AO1' ... 'AO6' for continuous (analog) signals are
available as input channels.
9.13.1 Handling the Function Blocks
Condition: The Schenck Process software DISOPLAN (VPL 20430) must be installed on th e
PC.
Function blocks can only be edited and linked in the Expert Mode of the service tool
EasyServe.
For this, DISOPLAN has to be started with administrator rights as follows from EasyServe:
▪ Menu item Tools | Start | Function Blocks or
▪ menu item Tools | Start | Function Variant / Parameters

Supplementary documentation:
▪ BV-H2185 EasyServe Operating manual
▪ BV-H2461 DISOPLAN Operating manual
▪ BV-H2510 DISOCONT Tersus - Function blocks – Programming manual
▪ BV-H2448 DISOCONT Tersus – Data communication
The creation and modification of links is reserved for Schenck Process personnel.
Configurations can be read out of and loaded into the control. They can be filed on the PC's hard disk and
called up from there. Links must be assigned a name. The 'empty link' (as a factory settings) has the name
'Empty' and should not be used for other links.
WARNING
Possible loss of function when replacing the VCU.
Function blocks are not automatically saved with the parameters in
EasyServe. If a function block link is loaded, it will be necessary to store it
separately in EasyServe. If the VCU is replaced, both the parameters and
the function block link have to be loaded separately to restore full functional-
ity. Alternatively, you can use the additional tool DISOPLAN (that contains
both the parameters and function block links) to make a complete backup.
However, this backup can then no longer be used for setting a more recent
version of the program in the scales.
It is not necessary with a system with the 'Empty' link (refer to '»VHM System Information and Cleaning the
Screen [➙44]«') to reload the link after exchanging the VCU since there is no expansion to the functions
from the function blocks.
Loading the function software, the factory settings or the backup parameter set has no impact on the function
blocks loaded, i.e. any link already loaded will be retained. A loaded link cannot be deleted, it can only be
overwritten. If you want to make a link ineffective, you can overwrite it with a new link that has to contain at

Appendix
least one block. The menu functions Tools | Start | Function Variant / Parameters can be used to select the
active function block variants. 'Empty' refers to the empty link. A loaded link's name can be used to select it.
Using P29.21 FCB Variant the controller will check whether the function block link loaded matches the pa-
rameter set. If the name entered there does not tally with the name of the function block variant loaded, the
event categorized by P29.22 Event: FCB-Error will be identified.
A loaded link will have no impact on scale operation as long as the link outputs are not coupled to the scale
software by means either of the corresponding parameters P29.01 to P30.20 or an input signal of the stand-
ard controller.
The current state of the function block outputs can be seen in the EasyServe menu View | Service Values |
OP2.
9.13.2 Function Blocks for Binary Signals

The following function blocks are available.
Fig. 34: Binary function blocks
No. Model Quantity Parameter Function
1 Binary input 20 Process variable as per Connection of the function block logic to the function of
'GP-DIn' the description of the the standard program
fieldbus interface
2 Binary output 20 - Makes output signals available. Connecting via param-

'GP-Dout' eters in the FCB digital outputs block. All outputs are
available as status information in the fieldbus interface.
3 Clock generator 2 Period duration Signal generator for a periodic signal.

'Cycle'

Appendix
No. Model Quantity Parameter Function
4 'Bin. 0' 1 - Encoder for the binary constants 1 = True and 0 =

'Bin. 1' 1 False
5 Pulse generator 1 Time for the pulse The timer has three outputs that supply an pulse of 0.1
'Timer' s duration at the time set.
6 AND 10 - AND link between two input signals

'And'
AND 8 - AND link between four input signals

'And 4'
7 OR 10 - OR link between two input signals

'Or'
OR 8 - OR link between four input signals

'Or 4'
8 Negation 10 - Inverts the signal

'Not'
9 Retardation 16 Delay time in seconds Delays the input signal by the specified time
'Delay'
Tab. 49 : Blocks available for processing binary signals
NOTE: The function blocks available depend on the version of the scale software and may differ from those
in the above list.
9.13.3 Function Blocks for Analog Signals

Analog signals can be processed with the following function block.

Appendix
Fig. 35: Analog function blocks
No. Type Quantity Parameter Function
1 Analog input 20 Process variable as per Input for a variable with a continuous value.
'GP-AIn' the description of the The values are read in the physical dimension given for
fieldbus interface that signal in the data communication manual (BV-
H2448).
2 Analog output 20 - Makes output signals available. Connecting via param-

'GP-Aout' eters in the FCB analog outputs block. Only 5 FKB
outputs can be configured to physical outputs. All out-
puts are available as measured values in the fieldbus
interface.
If the values are directly used as an input signal to the
controller then the physical dimension corresponds to
the dimension given for that signal in the data commu-
nication manual (BV-H2448).
3 Comparator 6 Upper and lower compara- Supplies the 'True' value if the input signal lies outside
'Comparator' tive value of the threshold values.
4 'Limit' 10 Upper and lower threshold Limits the input signal and becomes True when the
value limiter arises.
5 Multiplier 5 - Supplies the product of the input values at the output.

'Multiplier'

Appendix
No. Type Quantity Parameter Function
6 Memory 10 - The input value to 'MemInp' is output to if the logic gate

'Memory' at 'Acquire' is 1. If the logic gate is 0 at 'Acquire' the
current value will be retained. With 'Acquire' = 1 the
output will indicate by 'Hold' that a value has been
stored. The memory will be cleared with 'Reset' and set
to 0 with 'Hold'.
7 Addition 5 - Makes the sum of the input values available at the

'Add' output.
8 Subtraction 5 - Makes the difference of the input values available at

'Subtract' the output
9 Counter 6 Start value Supplies the counted input impulses at the output
'Counter'
10 Switch 1 - Switches one of the three inputs to the output

'Analog switch'
11 Multiplication 20 Dividend Multiplies or divides by a fixed factor

'Factor' Divisor
12 Constant 5 The value of the constants Supplies the numerical value at the output
'Constant'
13 Offset 10 Dividend
'Offset' Divisor
NOTE: The function blocks available depend on the version of the scale software and may differ from those
in the above list.
9.14 Pulse Output for External Totalizing Counters

DISOCONT Tersus has three internal totalizing integrators (=totalizing counters). The results of the counters
can be transferred to an external counter by means of one of the following ways:
▪ Via the electronic impulse output (open collector) DO8 of VCU 1 (main VCU) with frequency < 10 Hz for
electronic external counters. This solution is the preferable one.
▪ Via a DO1 … DO7 of VCU 1, 2 or 3 or VMO 20101 1, 2, in as far as they are available. The minimum
impulse length is 1 s. The service life of the output relay is guaranteed only for 20 million switches.
Of course, the counter readings can be read more simply via the fieldbus or in the web server.
The relevant parameters are:
P03.07 Pulse Length Total
P03.08 DO: Pulse Counter
P03.09 Totalizer Increment
P03.08 DO: Pulse Counter P03.07 Pulse Length Total
0 ... 9 ms 10 ms … 1 s >1s
DO8 of VCU 1 No pulse 10 ms … 1 s >1s

Appendix
DO1 … DO7 of all VCUs No pulse 1s >1s

DO8 of VCUs 2 and 3 and
VMO
Tab. 50 : Long counting pulse
P03.09 Totalizer Increment Counting pulse weight determined by:
0 kg No pulse
> 0 kg P03.09 Totalizer Increment
Tab. 51 : Counting pulse weight
Note: The current status of DO8 at VCU 1 is not displayed by EasyServe due to time considerations.
9.15 Checking the Weight Measurement Instrumentation

Most of the function errors are indicated by event messages.
A test connector can be used to perform a basic function inspection if a displayed weight value is evidently
wrong despite correct parameterization.
A simple voltage metering check cannot be made using a measuring instrument due to the alternating volt-
age supply to the load cells.
A test connector can narrow down any errors between the load cells, cabling and the measuring electronics.
One such connector with the material number V037426.B02 is available from Schenck Process.
Fig. 36: Test connector
The test connector is plugged into the load cell cable input on the DISOCONT Tersus instead of the load cell
cable.
Once plugged in, the raw measured value can be read off at the service values of the measuring electronics.
It must have the following value: raw measured value 1.1 mV/V ± 3 %.
Note: If different resistance values are used in test connector then the raw measured value can be calculat-
ed according to the formula: raw measured value = 1000 * R2 / (R11 + R12) [mV/V]
The measuring amplifier is working properly if the raw measuring value lies within this range.
The measured load display in kg depends on the way the scale's rated data are set.

Index
Index
2nd Password ................................................................................................................................................................... 88
Abbreviations .................................................................................................................................................................... 62
About This Manual .............................................................................................................................................................. 1
Absolute Range............................................................................................................................................................... 137
Accept Correction ............................................................................................................................................................ 135
Access Rights Limitation FB............................................................................................................................................ 118
Access Rights Limitation HMI ............................................................................................................................................ 87
Access to calibration functions .......................................................................................................................................... 38
Access to Special Functions ............................................................................................................................................. 26
Accessing the Configuration.............................................................................................................................................. 43
Acknowledging Event Messages................................................................................................................................... 4, 29
Adaptation Factor ............................................................................................................................................................ 110
Adaptation Mode ............................................................................................................................................................. 110
Adaptation Time .............................................................................................................................................................. 112
Adaption Start Value ....................................................................................................................................................... 112
Additional Bin Weighers .................................................................................................................................................... 11
additional containers ......................................................................................................................................................... 11
Additional device ..................................................................................................................................................... 143, 144
Address ................................................................................................................................................................... 116, 117
Adjusting linearization ..................................................................................................................................................... 208
Adjusting the flow rate regulation ...................................................................................................................................... 56
Afterflow Measurement Time ............................................................................................................................................ 93
AI Moisture Measurement .............................................................................................................................................. 141
AI Offset ......................................................................................................................................................................... 156
AI Offset (B) ................................................................................................................................................................... 131
AI Position Flow Gate ..................................................................................................................................................... 156
AI Position Flow Gate (B) ............................................................................................................................................... 131
AI Range ........................................................................................................................................................................ 156
AI Range (B) .................................................................................................................................................................. 131
Always Observe .................................................................................................................................................................. 5
Analog Channel A10 ......................................................................................................................................................... 84
Analog Channel A11 ......................................................................................................................................................... 85
Analog Outputs ............................................................................................................................................................... 103
Analog Setpoint Relat...................................................................................................................................................... 111
AO Actual Flow Rate ...................................................................................................................................................... 103
AO Bin Load ................................................................................................................................................................... 125
AO Check Measurement Result ..................................................................................................................................... 139
AO Controller Magnitude Bin Level ................................................................................................................................ 127
AO Deviation .................................................................................................................................................................. 104
AO Flow Rate corrected ................................................................................................................................................. 142
AO Flow Rate Offset ...................................................................................................................................................... 142
AO Flow Rate Range ..................................................................................................................................................... 142
AO Load ......................................................................................................................................................................... 104
AO Motor Speed Control ................................................................................................................................................ 105
AO Offset ............................................................................................................................................................... 125, 157
AO Offset (B) .................................................................................................................................................................. 132
AO PLC 1 ....................................................................................................................................................................... 121
AO PLC 2 ....................................................................................................................................................................... 121
AO Position Flow Gate ................................................................................................................................................... 156
AO Position Flow Gate (B) ............................................................................................................................................. 132
AO Range .............................................................................................................................................................. 125, 157
AO Range (B)................................................................................................................................................................. 132
AO Setpoint .................................................................................................................................................................... 103
Appendix ......................................................................................................................................................................... 179
Assembling the Electrical Components ............................................................................................................................. 55
Authorization for Control Commands ................................................................................................................................ 25
Auto Correction ............................................................................................................................................................... 133
Auto Zero Active.............................................................................................................................................................. 143
Auto Zero Limit ................................................................................................................................................................ 143
Automatic control ................................................................................................................................................................ 9
Automatic control measurement unit (KME) ...................................................................................................................... 50
Basic Operating Functions ................................................................................................................................................ 27
Basic Tare ......................................................................................................................................................................... 98
Batch Automatic Record.................................................................................................................................................. 111
Batch behaviour after power down .................................................................................................................................. 113

Index
Batch control ..................................................................................................................................................................... 88

Batch Mode ..................................................................................................................................................................... 110
Batch Mode ..................................................................................................................................................................... 110
Batch Operation Control .................................................................................................................................................. 191
Batch Setpoint Limit ........................................................................................................................................................ 113
Batch Setpoint Offset ...................................................................................................................................................... 111
Batch Setpoint Range ..................................................................................................................................................... 111
Batch Setpoint Source..................................................................................................................................................... 110
Batch Tolerance .............................................................................................................................................................. 112
Batching ............................................................................................................................................................................ 10
Baud rate................................................................................................................................................................. 116, 117
Baud Rate ....................................................................................................................................................................... 114
Begin Data Logging ........................................................................................................................................................... 39
Behavior after Connecting the Power ................................................................................................................................ 13
Bin capacity ..................................................................................................................................................................... 123
Bin Controller ON ............................................................................................................................................................ 127
Bin fill level regulation via feed gate ................................................................................................................................ 205
Bin Level analog Input Offset .......................................................................................................................................... 126
Bin Level analog Input Range ......................................................................................................................................... 127
Bin Level Controller ......................................................................................................................................................... 127
Bin Level MAX ................................................................................................................................................................. 124
Bin Level MIN .................................................................................................................................................................. 124
Bin Setpoint source ......................................................................................................................................................... 130
Bin Weigher..................................................................................................................................................................... 121
Bin Weigher Active .......................................................................................................................................................... 121
Bin Weigher: Display and Operation ................................................................................................................................. 35
Bin weigher: Scaling and Limit ........................................................................................................................................ 202
Bin weight control .............................................................................................................................................................. 48
Bipolar Measurement ...................................................................................................................................................... 122
Bypass .................................................................................................................................................................... 101, 129
Bypass D Portion ............................................................................................................................................................ 129
Byte Sequence ................................................................................................................................................................ 116
CA01 Event Error LC Input............................................................................................................................................ 167
CA03 Event Error LC Input (Bin) ................................................................................................................................... 168
CA05 Event Linearization Error ..................................................................................................................................... 168
CA06 Event Tare Correction ......................................................................................................................................... 168
Calibrating bin weighing .................................................................................................................................................... 58
Calibrating Touch Screen Entry......................................................................................................................................... 43
Calibration ....................................................................................................................................................................... 167
Calibration Data................................................................................................................................................................. 98
Calibration programs ......................................................................................................................................................... 45
Calibration Time ................................................................................................................................................................ 99
Calibration Weight..................................................................................................................................................... 99, 125
Call-up Scales Control Screen .......................................................................................................................................... 19
Caution ................................................................................................................................................................................ 5
CH02 Event Minimum Fill Weight .................................................................................................................................. 168
CH03 Event Maximum Fill Weight ................................................................................................................................. 168
CH04 Event Absolute Tare Correction Error ................................................................................................................. 169
CH05 Event Relative Tare Correction Error .................................................................................................................. 169
CH06 Event Absolute Span Correction Error ................................................................................................................ 169
CH07 Event Relative Span Correction Error ................................................................................................................. 169
CH08 Event Feeder Not Stopped .................................................................................................................................. 169
CH09 Event No Check Release .................................................................................................................................... 170
CH10 Event Prepare Check Measurement ................................................................................................................... 170
CH11 Event Expect Acceptance ................................................................................................................................... 170
CH12 Event Check Gate Error ...................................................................................................................................... 170
CH13 Event Bin Error .................................................................................................................................................... 170
Check Gate Feedback..................................................................................................................................................... 139
Check Gate Time ............................................................................................................................................................ 139
Check in Keyboard Mode ................................................................................................................................................ 115
Check Measurement ....................................................................................................................................................... 168
Check Quantity ................................................................................................................................................................ 135
Check Start Span ............................................................................................................................................................ 134
Check Start Tare ............................................................................................................................................................. 134
Check System ................................................................................................................................................................. 133
Check with bulk solids ....................................................................................................................................................... 57
Checking the Weight Measurement Instrumentation ....................................................................................................... 219
Cleaning the screen .......................................................................................................................................................... 34

Index
Cleaning the Screen .......................................................................................................................................................... 44

CLOSE in Remote ........................................................................................................................................................... 164
CO01 Event Controller Limited...................................................................................................................................... 170
CO02 Event MIN Flow Gate .......................................................................................................................................... 171
CO03 Event MAX Flow Gate ......................................................................................................................................... 171
CO04 Event Bin Load MAX Sensor .............................................................................................................................. 171
CO06 Event MAX Flow Gate (B) ................................................................................................................................... 171
CO10 Event MIN Flow Gate (B) .................................................................................................................................... 171
Command and Edit Keys................................................................................................................................................... 23
Communication EasyServe ............................................................................................................................................. 114
Communication Fieldbus ................................................................................................................................................. 114
Compatibility DISOCONT Master .................................................................................................................................... 116
Compensation Element ................................................................................................................................................... 103
Conditions ......................................................................................................................................................................... 17
Configuration........................................................................................................................................................... 116, 118
Configuration HMI Values ............................................................................................................................................... 154
'Configuration Mode (VHM) ............................................................................................................................................... 21
Configuring Event Messages ............................................................................................................................................ 64
Configuring the Communication Path (Com) ..................................................................................................................... 44
Configuring the Interfaces ................................................................................................................................................. 62
Configuring the trend display ............................................................................................................................................. 31
Configuring the VHM Operating Panel .............................................................................................................................. 40
Connecting an operating panel (VHM) with a scale controller (VCU) ................................................................................ 14
Connecting EasyServe (PC) with the scales controller (VCU) .......................................................................................... 16
Connecting the web browser (PC) with the scales controller (VCU).................................................................................. 17
Connecting to a Scales (Con.Scale) ................................................................................................................................. 40
Connection via Bluetooth ............................................................................................................................................ 15, 16
Connection via Ethernet.............................................................................................................................................. 14, 16
Connection via RS232 ...................................................................................................................................................... 17
Connection via RS485 ...................................................................................................................................................... 15
Connection via Wireless LAN ............................................................................................................................................ 16
Constant controller .......................................................................................................................................................... 183
Continuous bin fill level control ........................................................................................................................................ 203
Control............................................................................................................................................................................... 89
Control Level MAX .......................................................................................................................................................... 124
Control Level MIN............................................................................................................................................................ 123
Control operating modes ................................................................................................................................................... 10
Control Sources ................................................................................................................................................................ 91
Controller......................................................................................................................................................................... 170
Controller in OFF-Mode................................................................................................................................................... 126
Controller Magnitude (Block 1) ........................................................................................................................................ 158
Controller Magnitude Offset .................................................................................................................................... 101, 129
Controller Magnitude Offset (Block 1) ............................................................................................................................. 158
Controller Type .................................................................................................................................................................. 99
Controlling with VLG........................................................................................................................................................ 193
Controlling with VMO ...................................................................................................................................................... 194
Correction Amount .......................................................................................................................................................... 110
Correction Evaluation ...................................................................................................................................................... 138
Correction Speed ............................................................................................................................................................ 138
Counter 1 Overflow ........................................................................................................................................................... 90
Counter 1 Unit ................................................................................................................................................................... 89
Counter 2 Unit ................................................................................................................................................................... 90
Counter 3 Unit ................................................................................................................................................................... 90
Cycle Time ...................................................................................................................................................................... 134
Cyclic Auto Start.............................................................................................................................................................. 134
D Filter TD ....................................................................................................................................................................... 128
D Portion TV.................................................................................................................................................................... 128
Daily Total Time .............................................................................................................................................................. 152

Index
Damaged/Defective Electrical Components ........................................................................................................................ 6

Damping Time ................................................................................................................................................................. 136
Danger ................................................................................................................................................................................ 5
Data Format .................................................................................................................................................................... 117
Data Log ON/OFF ............................................................................................................................................................. 89
Data Log Value 1 ............................................................................................................................................................ 153
Data Log Value 10 .......................................................................................................................................................... 153
Data Log Value 2 ............................................................................................................................................................ 153
Data Log Value 3 ............................................................................................................................................................ 153
Data Log Value 4 ............................................................................................................................................................ 153
Data Log Value 5 ............................................................................................................................................................ 153
Data Log Value 6 ............................................................................................................................................................ 153
Data Log Value 7 ............................................................................................................................................................ 153
Data Log Value 8 ............................................................................................................................................................ 153
Data Log Value 9 ............................................................................................................................................................ 153
Data Logging ................................................................................................................................................................... 152
Dead Band Deviation ...................................................................................................................................................... 129
Dead Band Factor ........................................................................................................................................................... 129
Dead Time....................................................................................................................................................................... 144
Dead Time....................................................................................................................................................................... 144
Dead Time Active ............................................................................................................................................................ 144
Dead Time TT ................................................................................................................................................................. 128
Design Modifications ........................................................................................................................................................... 4
Detail Selection ................................................................................................................................................................. 23
Details and flow chart control measurement (KME)......................................................................................................... 207
Deviation abs. max ............................................................................................................................................................ 95
Deviation Offset............................................................................................................................................................... 104
Deviation Range.............................................................................................................................................................. 105
Device Constant ................................................................................................................................................................ 93
Device Definition ............................................................................................................................................................... 89
DI Acknowledge Events ................................................................................................................................................. 107
DI Batch Terminate ........................................................................................................................................................ 111
DI Bin Load Sensor ........................................................................................................................................................ 126
DI Event Electricity 1 ...................................................................................................................................................... 146
DI Event Mechanics 1 .................................................................................................................................................... 145
DI External Error 1.......................................................................................................................................................... 165
DI External Error 1 (Block 1) .......................................................................................................................................... 159
DI External Error 2 ......................................................................................................................................................... 165
DI External Error 3 ......................................................................................................................................................... 165
DI External Event 1 ........................................................................................................................................................ 105
DI Init. Controller ............................................................................................................................................................ 130
DI Limit Switch CLOSE .................................................................................................................................................. 164
DI Limit Switch OPEN .................................................................................................................................................... 164
DI Local Mode ................................................................................................................................................................ 107
DI Reset Totalizer 1........................................................................................................................................................ 108

Index
DI Reset Totalizer 2........................................................................................................................................................ 108

DI Volumetric Mode ........................................................................................................................................................ 108
DI Volumetric synchron .................................................................................................................................................. 108
Dialog Behaviour ............................................................................................................................................................... 86
Digital Inputs ................................................................................................................................................................... 105
Digital Outputs................................................................................................................................................................. 108
Display .............................................................................................................................................................................. 33
Display and Operation Fields ............................................................................................................................................ 21
Display Filter ................................................................................................................................................................... 123
Display Format ................................................................................................................................................................ 123
Display Parameter Alterations ........................................................................................................................................... 36
Display Stored Counter Readings ..................................................................................................................................... 34
Display the Most Recent Parameter Alterations ................................................................................................................ 35
Displaying Selected Values ............................................................................................................................................... 30
Displaying the most recent events (errors) ........................................................................................................................ 34
DO Actual Flow Rate MAX ............................................................................................................................................. 109
DO Actual Flow Rate MIN .............................................................................................................................................. 109
DO Agitator ON .............................................................................................................................................................. 144
DO ALARM .................................................................................................................................................................... 109
DO Batch Running ......................................................................................................................................................... 111
DO Bin Filling ................................................................................................................................................................. 124
DO Bin Level MAX ......................................................................................................................................................... 125
DO Bin Level MIN .......................................................................................................................................................... 124
DO Check Gate .............................................................................................................................................................. 139
DO Check Measurement Active ..................................................................................................................................... 136
DO Control Started ......................................................................................................................................................... 136
DO Correction Error ....................................................................................................................................................... 140
DO Dead Time Active .................................................................................................................................................... 145
DO Deviation .................................................................................................................................................................. 109
DO Dribble Feed ............................................................................................................................................................ 111
DO Dribble Feed 2 ......................................................................................................................................................... 112
DO Event Electricity ....................................................................................................................................................... 146
DO Event Mechanics...................................................................................................................................................... 146
DO Event Mechatronics 1 .............................................................................................................................................. 146
DO Event Mechatronics 2 .............................................................................................................................................. 147
DO Feeder ON ............................................................................................................................................................... 127
DO Feeder Started ......................................................................................................................................................... 108
DO Full Feed .................................................................................................................................................................. 111
DO Keyboard Mode........................................................................................................................................................ 109
DO Local Mode .............................................................................................................................................................. 109
DO Moisture active ......................................................................................................................................................... 142
DO Moisture MAX .......................................................................................................................................................... 142
DO ON Motor (2nd) (Block 1) ......................................................................................................................................... 159
DO ON/OFF Active......................................................................................................................................................... 145
DO PLC 1 ....................................................................................................................................................................... 120
DO PLC 2 ....................................................................................................................................................................... 120
DO PLC 3 ....................................................................................................................................................................... 120
DO PLC 4 ....................................................................................................................................................................... 120
DO PLC 5 ....................................................................................................................................................................... 121
DO PLC 6 ....................................................................................................................................................................... 121
DO PLC 7 ....................................................................................................................................................................... 121
DO PLC 8 ....................................................................................................................................................................... 121
DO Pulse Counter ............................................................................................................................................................ 90
DO Ready ...................................................................................................................................................................... 147
DO Ready for Start ......................................................................................................................................................... 147
DO Setpoint Active ......................................................................................................................................................... 145
DO Start Prefeeder......................................................................................................................................................... 109
DO Volumetric Mode ...................................................................................................................................................... 109
DO WARNING ............................................................................................................................................................... 109
DO Expect Acceptance ................................................................................................................................................... 137
Electrical Connections ....................................................................................................................................................... 55
Electrical System ............................................................................................................................................................. 172
Emergency Setpoint .......................................................................................................................................................... 97
Entering Basic parameters ................................................................................................................................................ 55

Index
Ethernet........................................................................................................................................................................... 120
Event Absolute Span Correction Error ................................................................................................................... 138, 169
Event Absolute Tare Correction Error .................................................................................................................... 137, 169
Event Actual Flow Rate MAX ................................................................................................................................... 98, 175
Event Actual Flow Rate MIN .................................................................................................................................... 98, 176
Event Acyclic Communication ................................................................................................................................ 115, 178
Event Analog Input < Offset ..................................................................................................................................... 96, 173
Event Batch setpoint Limit...................................................................................................................................... 113, 174
Event Bin Error....................................................................................................................................................... 140, 170
Event Bin Level MAX.............................................................................................................................................. 125, 176
Event Bin Level MIN............................................................................................................................................... 124, 176
Event Bin Load MAX Sensor.................................................................................................................................. 126, 171
Event Check Gate Error ......................................................................................................................................... 140, 170
Event Communication HMI 1.................................................................................................................................... 87, 178
Event Communication VCU20100-Unit 2 ................................................................................................................. 85, 177
Event Communication VCU20100-Unit 3 ................................................................................................................. 86, 178
Event Communication VHM serial............................................................................................................................ 88, 178
Event Communication VMO20100-Unit 1................................................................................................................. 86, 178
Event Communication VMO20100-Unit 2................................................................................................................. 86, 178
Event Controller Limited ........................................................................................................................................... 96, 170
Event Cyclic Communication.................................................................................................................................. 115, 178
Event Deviation ........................................................................................................................................................ 96, 175
Event Electricity...................................................................................................................................................... 146, 173
Event Error LC Input ................................................................................................................................................ 94, 167
Event Error LC Input (Bin) ...................................................................................................................................... 123, 168
Event Expect Acceptance ...................................................................................................................................... 137, 170
Event External Event 1........................................................................................................................................... 105, 177
Event FCB-Error..................................................................................................................................................... 150, 174
Event Feeder Not Stopped..................................................................................................................................... 136, 169
Event LC Input < MIN............................................................................................................................................... 94, 176
Event LC Input > MAX.............................................................................................................................................. 94, 175
Event LC Input > MAX (Bin) ................................................................................................................................... 123, 176
Event Linearization Error........................................................................................................................................ 156, 168
Event Maint. Electric............................................................................................................................................... 113, 177
Event Maint.Feeder Run ........................................................................................................................................ 114, 177
Event MAX Flow Gate ............................................................................................................................................ 157, 171
Event MAX Flow Gate (B) ...................................................................................................................................... 132, 171
Event Maximum Fill Weight.................................................................................................................................... 136, 168
Event Mechanics.................................................................................................................................................... 146, 173
Event Mechatronics................................................................................................................................................ 147, 173
Event Memory .......................................................................................................................................................... 96, 177
Event MIN Flow Gate ............................................................................................................................................. 157, 171
Event MIN Flow Gate (B) ....................................................................................................................................... 132, 171
Event Minimum Fill Weight..................................................................................................................................... 135, 168
Event Moisture MAX............................................................................................................................................... 142, 174
Event NAMUR Error VCU1-DI6.............................................................................................................................. 106, 172
Event NAMUR Error VMO1-DI7 ............................................................................................................................. 108, 173
Event NAMUR Error VMO2-DI7 ............................................................................................................................. 108, 173
Event No Check Release ....................................................................................................................................... 134, 170
Event Not Ready .................................................................................................................................................... 147, 173
Event Not Ready for Start ...................................................................................................................................... 147, 173
Event Out of Tolerance .......................................................................................................................................... 112, 174
Event Power Failure ................................................................................................................................................. 95, 172
Event Prepare Check Measurement ...................................................................................................................... 136, 170
Event Relative Span Correction Error .................................................................................................................... 138, 169
Event Relative Tare Correction Error ..................................................................................................................... 138, 169
Event Run Disabled ................................................................................................................................................. 92, 173
Event Setpoint Limited ............................................................................................................................................. 95, 176

Index
Event Stand-By ........................................................................................................................................................ 94, 177

Event Tare Correction ............................................................................................................................................ 143, 168
Event Wrong System Time..................................................................................................................................... 114, 174
Event classes .................................................................................................................................................................... 22
Event Group: Calibration ................................................................................................................................................. 167
Event Group: Check Measurement ................................................................................................................................. 168
Event Group: Controller................................................................................................................................................... 170
Event Group: Electrical System ....................................................................................................................................... 172
Event Group: Interlock..................................................................................................................................................... 173
Event Group: Material Flow ............................................................................................................................................. 174
Event Group: MAX .......................................................................................................................................................... 175
Event Group: MIN ........................................................................................................................................................... 176
Event Group: Sequence Monitoring ................................................................................................................................ 176
Event Group: System Message ....................................................................................................................................... 177
Event Messages........................................................................................................................................................ 22, 167
Events Details ................................................................................................................................................................. 167
Exit Scale .......................................................................................................................................................................... 89
External Control Type........................................................................................................................................................ 52
Factor Deviation ................................................................................................................................................................ 95
FCB analog outputs ........................................................................................................................................................ 147
FCB digital outputs .......................................................................................................................................................... 150
FCB Variant..................................................................................................................................................................... 150
FCB_AO 01 ..................................................................................................................................................................... 147
FCB_AO 02 ..................................................................................................................................................................... 148
FCB_AO 03 ..................................................................................................................................................................... 148
FCB_AO 04 ..................................................................................................................................................................... 149
FCB_AO 05 ..................................................................................................................................................................... 149
FCB_DO 01..................................................................................................................................................................... 151
FCB_DO 02..................................................................................................................................................................... 151
FCB_DO 03..................................................................................................................................................................... 151
FCB_DO 04 ..................................................................................................................................................................... 151
FCB_DO 05 ..................................................................................................................................................................... 151
FCB_DO 06 ..................................................................................................................................................................... 151
FCB_DO 07 ..................................................................................................................................................................... 151
FCB_DO 08 ..................................................................................................................................................................... 151
FCB_DO 09 ..................................................................................................................................................................... 151
FCB_DO 10 ..................................................................................................................................................................... 151
FCB_DO 11 ..................................................................................................................................................................... 151
FCB_DO 12 ..................................................................................................................................................................... 151
FCB_DO 13 ..................................................................................................................................................................... 152
FCB_DO 14 ..................................................................................................................................................................... 152
FCB_DO 15 ..................................................................................................................................................................... 152
FCB_DO 16 ..................................................................................................................................................................... 152
FCB_DO 17..................................................................................................................................................................... 152
FCB_DO 18..................................................................................................................................................................... 152
FCB_DO 19..................................................................................................................................................................... 152
FCB_DO 20..................................................................................................................................................................... 152
Feeder Constant ............................................................................................................................................................. 128
Feeder control ................................................................................................................................................................... 93
Feeder Monitoring ............................................................................................................................................................. 93
Feeder Start ...................................................................................................................................................................... 91
Feeder Stopped .............................................................................................................................................................. 136
Feedrate Setpoint.............................................................................................................................................................. 91
Fig. 1: Components Safety Instruction ................................................................................................................................ 5
Fig. 10: Regulating the feeder ........................................................................................................................................... 56
Fig. 11: Arrangement for verification with bulk material ..................................................................................................... 57
Fig. 12: Parameter sets ..................................................................................................................................................... 61
Fig. 13: Setpoint and switch-on sources ......................................................................................................................... 179
Fig. 14: The start and stop sequence .............................................................................................................................. 180
Fig. 15: A simplified signal flow diagram ......................................................................................................................... 182
Fig. 16: Controller VIF ..................................................................................................................................................... 184
Fig. 17: Step-by-Step controller VIF ................................................................................................................................ 189
Fig. 18: The feed gate control logic ................................................................................................................................. 190
Fig. 19: Batching flow chart diagram ............................................................................................................................... 191
Fig. 2: The MULTISTREAM measuring principle................................................................................................................. 9
Fig. 20: Local operation with VLG ................................................................................................................................... 194
Fig. 21: VMO 20100 with VCU 20100 ............................................................................................................................. 194
Fig. 22: VMO 20101 with VCU ........................................................................................................................................ 195

Index
Fig. 23: Inserted local operation logic .............................................................................................................................. 195

Fig. 24: Local operation logic for rotating drives .............................................................................................................. 197
Fig. 25: The logic for position-controlled drives ............................................................................................................... 200
Fig. 26: Bin limit values ................................................................................................................................................... 202
Fig. 27: VMC bin fill level controller ................................................................................................................................. 203
Fig. 28: Step controller for the bin fill level....................................................................................................................... 205
Fig. 29: Flow chart control measurement ........................................................................................................................ 207
Fig. 3: Feeding .................................................................................................................................................................. 10
Fig. 30: Linearization characteristic curve ....................................................................................................................... 208
Fig. 31: The logic diagram of the link between events and ready messages .................................................................. 209
Fig. 32: Alternative inputs using the example of a weight signal for an additional bin ..................................................... 212
Fig. 33: Example of a function block link ......................................................................................................................... 213
Fig. 34: Binary function blocks ........................................................................................................................................ 215
Fig. 35: Analog function blocks ....................................................................................................................................... 217
Fig. 36: Test connector.................................................................................................................................................... 219
Fig. 4: VHM operator panel: user interface layout ............................................................................................................. 21
Fig. 5: Trend configuration ................................................................................................................................................ 32
Fig. 6: Single Unit KME Model........................................................................................................................................... 51
Fig. 7: Separated Units Control Type ................................................................................................................................ 51
Fig. 8: Filling System KME Type ....................................................................................................................................... 52
Fig. 9: External KME Type ................................................................................................................................................ 52
Filling System Control Type .............................................................................................................................................. 51
Filling Type ...................................................................................................................................................................... 127
Filter Actual Flow Rate ..................................................................................................................................................... 97
Filter Actual Flow Rate analog.......................................................................................................................................... 97
Filter Deviation ................................................................................................................................................................. 97
Filter Load ........................................................................................................................................................................ 97
Filters ................................................................................................................................................................................ 97
Finish Check Measurement............................................................................................................................................. 135
Five Safety Rules of Electrical Engineering ......................................................................................................................... 6
Fixed mode configuration ................................................................................................................................................ 118
FLOAT-Format ................................................................................................................................................................ 117
Flow Gate ........................................................................................................................................................................ 156
Flow Rate Filter ............................................................................................................................................................... 130
Flow Rate Offset.............................................................................................................................................................. 104
Flow Rate Range............................................................................................................................................................. 104
Flow rate regulation ......................................................................................................................................................... 183
Flow Rate Units ................................................................................................................................................................. 89
Flowthrough measurement zero setting ............................................................................................................................ 46
Format Data .................................................................................................................................................................... 114
Function Blocks for Analog Signals ................................................................................................................................. 216
Function Blocks for Binary Signals .................................................................................................................................. 215
Further documentation ........................................................................................................................................................ 1
Gateway .......................................................................................................................................................................... 120
General Diagram ................................................................................................................................................................. 7
Gravimetric Operation ....................................................................................................................................................... 10
Handling the Function Blocks .......................................................................................................................................... 214
Hardware Modules ............................................................................................................................................................ 84
HI01 Event LC Input > MAX .......................................................................................................................................... 175
HI02 Event Actual Flow Rate MAX ................................................................................................................................ 175
HI05 Event Deviation .................................................................................................................................................... 175
HI10 Event LC Input > MAX (Bin).................................................................................................................................. 176
HI11 Event Bin Level MAX ............................................................................................................................................ 176
HMI Value 01 .................................................................................................................................................................. 154
HMI Value 02 .................................................................................................................................................................. 154
HMI Value 03 .................................................................................................................................................................. 154
HMI Value 04 .................................................................................................................................................................. 154
HMI Value 05 .................................................................................................................................................................. 154
HMI Value 06 .................................................................................................................................................................. 154
HMI Value 07 .................................................................................................................................................................. 154
HMI Value 08 .................................................................................................................................................................. 154
HMI Value 09 .................................................................................................................................................................. 154
HMI Value 10 .................................................................................................................................................................. 154
Hourly Total Time ............................................................................................................................................................ 152
How to Acknowledge an Event Message .......................................................................................................................... 29
How to reset a totalizing counter ....................................................................................................................................... 29
How to set the clock .......................................................................................................................................................... 37
How to store ...................................................................................................................................................................... 30

Index
I-Component TN...................................................................................................................................................... 100, 128

ID Preset Value 1 ............................................................................................................................................................ 118
ID Preset Value 2 ............................................................................................................................................................ 118
ID Preset Value 3 ............................................................................................................................................................ 118
ID Preset Value 4 ............................................................................................................................................................ 118
ID Preset Value 5 ............................................................................................................................................................ 118
ID Preset Value 6 ............................................................................................................................................................ 118
ID Preset Value 7 ............................................................................................................................................................ 119
ID Preset Value 8 ............................................................................................................................................................ 119
ID Read Value 1 .............................................................................................................................................................. 119
ID Read Value 10 ............................................................................................................................................................ 119
ID Read Value 11 ............................................................................................................................................................ 119
ID Read Value 12 ............................................................................................................................................................ 119
ID Read Value 13 ............................................................................................................................................................ 119
ID Read Value 14 ............................................................................................................................................................ 119
ID Read Value 15 ............................................................................................................................................................ 119
ID Read Value 16 ............................................................................................................................................................ 120
ID Read Value 2 .............................................................................................................................................................. 119
ID Read Value 3 .............................................................................................................................................................. 119
ID Read Value 4 .............................................................................................................................................................. 119
ID Read Value 5 .............................................................................................................................................................. 119
ID Read Value 6 .............................................................................................................................................................. 119
ID Read Value 7 .............................................................................................................................................................. 119
ID Read Value 8 .............................................................................................................................................................. 119
ID Read Value 9 .............................................................................................................................................................. 119
IL01 Event Run Disabled............................................................................................................................................... 173
IL02 Event Mechanics ................................................................................................................................................... 173
IL03 Event Electricity ..................................................................................................................................................... 173
IL04 Event Mechatronics ............................................................................................................................................... 173
IL05 Event Not Ready ................................................................................................................................................... 173
IL06 Event Not Ready for Start ..................................................................................................................................... 173
IL10 Event FCB-Error .................................................................................................................................................... 174
IL11 Event Wrong System Time.................................................................................................................................... 174
Information on the system ................................................................................................................................................. 34
Information on the VHM operator panel............................................................................................................................. 44
Initialise Time Elements .................................................................................................................................................. 145
Intended Use ....................................................................................................................................................................... 3
Interlock........................................................................................................................................................................... 173
Interlocking ...................................................................................................................................................................... 145
IP Address....................................................................................................................................................................... 120
JOG enable (Block 1) ...................................................................................................................................................... 158
JOG enable (Block 2) ...................................................................................................................................................... 160
JOG enable (Block 3) ...................................................................................................................................................... 161
JOG enable (Block 4) ...................................................................................................................................................... 162
JOG enable (Block 5) ...................................................................................................................................................... 163
Keeping the Technical Documentation ................................................................................................................................ 4
Keyboard operation ........................................................................................................................................................... 33
KP Adaptation ................................................................................................................................................................. 102
Language .......................................................................................................................................................................... 86
LC Load Measurement............................................................................................................................................. 92, 122
LC Characteristic Value............................................................................................................................................. 92, 122
LC Filter..................................................................................................................................................................... 97, 122
LC Rated Capacity .................................................................................................................................................... 93, 122
Limit Actual Flow Rate MAX ............................................................................................................................................. 98
Limit Actual Flow Rate MIN .............................................................................................................................................. 98
Limit Max. Bin Error ......................................................................................................................................................... 140
Limit Values....................................................................................................................................................................... 98
Linearization.................................................................................................................................................... 154, 155, 156
Linearization I1 ................................................................................................................................................................ 155
Linearization I2 ................................................................................................................................................................ 155
Linearization I3 ................................................................................................................................................................ 155
Linearization I4 ................................................................................................................................................................ 155
Linearization ON ............................................................................................................................................................. 154
Linearization S1 .............................................................................................................................................................. 155
Linearization S2 .............................................................................................................................................................. 155
Linearization S3 .............................................................................................................................................................. 155
Linearization S4 .............................................................................................................................................................. 155
Linearizing the measurement ............................................................................................................................................ 49

Index
Links in the Parameter Block 'Interlocking' ...................................................................................................................... 209

LO01 Event LC Input < MIN .......................................................................................................................................... 176
LO02 Event Actual Flow Rate MIN ................................................................................................................................ 176
LO11 Event Bin Level MIN ............................................................................................................................................ 176
Load Cell 1 analog Input Offset ......................................................................................................................................... 93
Load Cell 1 analog Input Range ........................................................................................................................................ 93
Load Offset...................................................................................................................................................................... 104
Load Range..................................................................................................................................................................... 104
Local Mode (Gate) .......................................................................................................................................................... 164
Local Mode (Speed) ........................................................................................................................................................ 158
Local operation................................................................................................................................................................ 193
Local operation logic for rotating drives and valves......................................................................................................... 197
Logger cycle time ............................................................................................................................................................ 153
Login for Privileged Users (Login/Logout) ......................................................................................................................... 40
Lower Limit.............................................................................................................................................................. 100, 129
Maintenance and Recalibration ......................................................................................................................................... 59
Maintenance and Repair ..................................................................................................................................................... 4
Maintenance Electric ....................................................................................................................................................... 113
Maintenance Feeder Run ................................................................................................................................................ 113
Maintenance interval ....................................................................................................................................................... 113
Material Correction ............................................................................................................................................................ 99
Material Flow ................................................................................................................................................................... 174
MAX ................................................................................................................................................................................ 175
Maximum Fill Weight ....................................................................................................................................................... 136
Maximum Flow Rate Io...................................................................................................................................................... 89
Measuring principle ............................................................................................................................................................. 9
Measuring the flow rate (measure) .................................................................................................................................. 182
MF05 Event Moisture MAX ........................................................................................................................................... 174
MF06 Event Out of Tolerance ....................................................................................................................................... 174
MF07 Event Batch setpoint Limit ................................................................................................................................... 174
MIN ................................................................................................................................................................................. 176
Minimum Fill Weight ........................................................................................................................................................ 135
Modes of Operation: Normal Operation and Keyboard Operation ..................................................................................... 25
Moisture .......................................................................................................................................................................... 141
Moisture Active ................................................................................................................................................................ 141
Moisture and Humidity ......................................................................................................................................................... 4
Moisture MAX .................................................................................................................................................................. 142
Moisture Offset ................................................................................................................................................................ 141
Moisture Range ............................................................................................................................................................... 141
Moisture Select ............................................................................................................................................................... 141
Motor Select .................................................................................................................................................................... 164
Motor Select (Block 1) ..................................................................................................................................................... 158
Name of the Device ........................................................................................................................................................... 21
navigation bar.............................................................................................................................................................. 18, 19
Net Mask ......................................................................................................................................................................... 120
Nominal Moisture ............................................................................................................................................................ 141
Offset FCB_AO 1 ............................................................................................................................................................ 147
Offset FCB_AO 2 ............................................................................................................................................................ 148
Offset FCB_AO 3 ............................................................................................................................................................ 148
Offset FCB_AO 4 ............................................................................................................................................................ 149
Offset FCB_AO 5 ............................................................................................................................................................ 150
ON in Remote (Block 1) .................................................................................................................................................. 158
ON/OFF Clock ON .......................................................................................................................................................... 145
On/Off Operation ............................................................................................................................................................... 23
ON/OFF Select................................................................................................................................................................ 145
OPEN in Remote............................................................................................................................................................. 164
Operating and Control Access .......................................................................................................................................... 13
Operating Fields and Function Calls ................................................................................................................................. 24
Operating the control measurement (KME) ....................................................................................................................... 53
Operation .......................................................................................................................................................................... 13

Index
Optimizing Hopper Fill Level Regulation ........................................................................................................................... 49

Own Address................................................................................................................................................................... 114
P01 - Hardware Modules................................................................................................................................................... 84
P01.01 - Analog Channel A10 ........................................................................................................................................... 84
P01.02 - Analog Channel A11 ........................................................................................................................................... 85
P01.03 - VCU20100-Unit 2................................................................................................................................................ 85
P01.04 - VCU2 Analog Channel A10 ............................................................................................................................... 85
P01.06 - Event Communication VCU20100-Unit 2 ........................................................................................................... 85
P01.07 - VCU20100-Unit 3................................................................................................................................................ 85
P01.10 - Event Communication VCU20100-Unit 3 ........................................................................................................... 86
P01.11 - VHM RS485 Address.......................................................................................................................................... 86
P01.12 - VMO20100-Unit 1 ............................................................................................................................................... 86
P01.13 - Event Communication VMO20100-Unit 1 .......................................................................................................... 86
P01.14 - VMO20100-Unit 2 ............................................................................................................................................... 86
P01.15 - Event Communication VMO20100-Unit 2 .......................................................................................................... 86
P02 - Dialog Behaviour ..................................................................................................................................................... 86
P02.01 - Language ............................................................................................................................................................ 86
P02.02 - Units ................................................................................................................................................................... 86
P02.03 - Scale Name ........................................................................................................................................................ 86
P02.04 - Access Rights Limitation HMI ............................................................................................................................. 87
P02.05 - Remote IP Address HMI 1 .................................................................................................................................. 87
P02.06 - Event Communication HMI 1 ............................................................................................................................. 87
P02.11 - Event Communication VHM serial ..................................................................................................................... 88
P02.12 - Password ............................................................................................................................................................ 88
P02.13 - 2nd Password ..................................................................................................................................................... 88
P02.14 - Reset Counter 1.................................................................................................................................................. 88
P02.15 - Reset Counter 2.................................................................................................................................................. 88
P02.16 - Batch control ....................................................................................................................................................... 88
P02.17 - Switch Grav./Vol. command................................................................................................................................ 89
P02.18 - Switch Keyboard-/Normal Mode ......................................................................................................................... 89
P02.19 - Prefeeder start/stop ............................................................................................................................................ 89
P02.20 - Data Log ON/OFF............................................................................................................................................... 89
P02.21 - Exit Scale ............................................................................................................................................................ 89
P03 - Device Definition ...................................................................................................................................................... 89
P03.01 - Control ................................................................................................................................................................ 89
P03.02 - Maximum Flow Rate Io ....................................................................................................................................... 89
P03.03 - Flow Rate Units .................................................................................................................................................. 89
P03.04 - Counter 1 Unit .................................................................................................................................................... 89
P03.05 - Counter 2 Unit .................................................................................................................................................... 90
P03.06 - Counter 3 Unit .................................................................................................................................................... 90
P03.07 - Pulse Length Total .............................................................................................................................................. 90
P03.08 - DO Pulse Counter.............................................................................................................................................. 90
P03.09 - Totalizer Increment ............................................................................................................................................. 90
P03.10 - Counter 1 Overflow ............................................................................................................................................. 90
P04 - Control Sources ....................................................................................................................................................... 91
P04.01 - Feeder Start ........................................................................................................................................................ 91
P04.02 - Feedrate Setpoint ............................................................................................................................................... 91
P04.03 - Setpoint Range ................................................................................................................................................... 91
P04.04 - Setpoint Offset .................................................................................................................................................... 91
P04.05 - Source Run Enable............................................................................................................................................. 92
P04.06 - Event Run Disabled ........................................................................................................................................... 92
P04.07 - Source Relative Setpoint .................................................................................................................................... 92
P04.08 - Relativer Setpoint Range .................................................................................................................................... 92
P04.09 - Relative Setpoint Offset ...................................................................................................................................... 92
P05 - Rated Data .............................................................................................................................................................. 92
P05.01 - LC Load Measurement ...................................................................................................................................... 92
P05.02 - LC Characteristic Value ...................................................................................................................................... 92
P05.03 - Load Cell 1 analog Input Offset .......................................................................................................................... 93
P05.04 - Load Cell 1 analog Input Range ......................................................................................................................... 93

Index
P05.05 - LC Rated Capacity.............................................................................................................................................. 93

P05.06 - Device Constant ................................................................................................................................................. 93
P06 - Feeder control.......................................................................................................................................................... 93
P06.01 - Volumetric Start-Up ............................................................................................................................................ 93
P06.02 - Afterflow Measurement Time .............................................................................................................................. 93
P07 - Feeder Monitoring.................................................................................................................................................... 93
P07.01 - Event Stand-By .................................................................................................................................................. 94
P07.02 - Stand-By Limit Value .......................................................................................................................................... 94
P07.03 - Event Error LC Input .......................................................................................................................................... 94
P07.04 - Event LC Input < MIN ........................................................................................................................................ 94
P07.05 - Event LC Input > MAX ....................................................................................................................................... 94
P07.06 - Event Setpoint Limited ....................................................................................................................................... 95
P07.07 - Event Power Failure .......................................................................................................................................... 95
P07.08 - Time Deviation .................................................................................................................................................... 95
P07.09 - Threshold Deviation ............................................................................................................................................ 95
P07.10 - Factor Deviation.................................................................................................................................................. 95
P07.11 - Deviation abs. max ............................................................................................................................................. 95
P07.12 - Event Deviation.................................................................................................................................................. 96
P07.13 - Event Controller Limited .................................................................................................................................... 96
P07.14 - Event Memory.................................................................................................................................................... 96
P07.15 - Event Analog Input < Offset ............................................................................................................................... 96
P07.16 - Source Emergency Setpoint ............................................................................................................................... 97
P07.17 - Emergency Setpoint ........................................................................................................................................... 97
P08 - Filters ....................................................................................................................................................................... 97
P08.01 - LC Filter .............................................................................................................................................................. 97
P08.02 - Filter Actual Flow Rate ....................................................................................................................................... 97
P08.03 - Filter Actual Flow Rate analog ........................................................................................................................... 97
P08.04 - Filter Load .......................................................................................................................................................... 97
P08.05 - Filter Deviation ................................................................................................................................................... 97
P09 - Limit Values ............................................................................................................................................................. 98
P09.01 - Limit Actual Flow Rate MIN................................................................................................................................ 98
P09.02 - Event Actual Flow Rate MIN .............................................................................................................................. 98
P09.03 - Limit Actual Flow Rate MAX .............................................................................................................................. 98
P09.04 - Event Actual Flow Rate MAX ............................................................................................................................. 98
P10 - Calibration Data ....................................................................................................................................................... 98
P10.01 - Range Correction................................................................................................................................................ 98
P10.02 - Basic Tare .......................................................................................................................................................... 98
P10.03 - Tare Correction ................................................................................................................................................... 98
P10.04 - Zeroing Limit ....................................................................................................................................................... 99
P10.05 - Calibration Time.................................................................................................................................................. 99
P10.06 - Tare Correction Check ........................................................................................................................................ 99
P10.07 - Calibration Weight .............................................................................................................................................. 99
P10.08 - Material Correction ............................................................................................................................................. 99
P11 - Rate controller ......................................................................................................................................................... 99
P11.01 - Controller Type ................................................................................................................................................... 99
P11.02 - P-Component KP .............................................................................................................................................. 100
P11.03 - I-Component TN ............................................................................................................................................... 100
P11.04 - Lower Limit ....................................................................................................................................................... 100
P11.05 - Upper Limit ....................................................................................................................................................... 100
P11.06 - Controller Magnitude Offset .............................................................................................................................. 101
P11.07 - Position at STOP .............................................................................................................................................. 101
P11.08 - Bypass .............................................................................................................................................................. 101
P11.09 - Store ................................................................................................................................................................. 101
P11.10 - Setpoint Filter 1st Ord ....................................................................................................................................... 101
P11.11 - Setpoint Filter 2nd Ord ...................................................................................................................................... 102
P11.12 - KP Adaptation ................................................................................................................................................... 102
P11.13 - Setpoint Threshold ............................................................................................................................................ 102
P11.14 - S P-Component ............................................................................................................................................... 102
P11.15 - S I-Component................................................................................................................................................. 102
P11.16 - S Threshold Response .................................................................................................................................... 103
P11.17 - Compensation Element .................................................................................................................................... 103
P12 - Analog Outputs ...................................................................................................................................................... 103
P12.01 - AO Setpoint ..................................................................................................................................................... 103
P12.02 - Setpoint Offset .................................................................................................................................................. 103
P12.03 - Setpoint Range ................................................................................................................................................. 103
P12.04 - AO Actual Flow Rate ....................................................................................................................................... 103
P12.05 - Flow Rate Offset ............................................................................................................................................... 104
P12.06 - Flow Rate Range .............................................................................................................................................. 104

Index
P12.07 - AO Load........................................................................................................................................................... 104

P12.08 - Load Offset ....................................................................................................................................................... 104
P12.09 - Load Range ...................................................................................................................................................... 104
P12.10 - AO Deviation.................................................................................................................................................... 104
P12.11 - Deviation Offset ................................................................................................................................................ 104
P12.12 - Deviation Range ............................................................................................................................................... 105
P12.13 - AO Motor Speed Control ................................................................................................................................. 105
P13 - Digital Inputs .......................................................................................................................................................... 105
P13.01 - Event External Event 1 .................................................................................................................................... 105
P13.02 - DI External Event 1 .......................................................................................................................................... 105
P13.09 - Event NAMUR Error VCU1-DI6 ....................................................................................................................... 106
P13.15 - DI Acknowledge Events ................................................................................................................................... 107
P13.16 - DI Local Mode.................................................................................................................................................. 107
P13.17 - DI Volumetric Mode ......................................................................................................................................... 108
P13.18 - DI Volumetric synchron .................................................................................................................................... 108
P13.19 - DI Reset Totalizer 1 ......................................................................................................................................... 108
P13.20 - DI Reset Totalizer 2 ......................................................................................................................................... 108
P13.21 - Event NAMUR Error VMO1-DI7 ....................................................................................................................... 108
P13.22 - Event NAMUR Error VMO2-DI7 ....................................................................................................................... 108
P14 - Digital Outputs ....................................................................................................................................................... 108
P14.01 - DO Feeder Started .......................................................................................................................................... 108
P14.02 - DO Start Prefeeder .......................................................................................................................................... 109
P14.03 - DO ALARM ...................................................................................................................................................... 109
P14.04 - DO Deviation ................................................................................................................................................... 109
P14.05 - DO Actual Flow Rate MIN ................................................................................................................................ 109
P14.06 - DO Actual Flow Rate MAX .............................................................................................................................. 109
P14.07 - DO Volumetric Mode ....................................................................................................................................... 109
P14.08 - DO Local Mode ................................................................................................................................................ 109
P14.09 - DO WARNING ................................................................................................................................................. 109
P14.10 - DO Keyboard Mode ......................................................................................................................................... 109
P15 - Batch Mode ........................................................................................................................................................... 110
P15.01 - Batch Mode ...................................................................................................................................................... 110
P15.02 - Batch Setpoint Source ...................................................................................................................................... 110
P15.03 - Adaptation Mode............................................................................................................................................... 110
P15.04 - Correction Amount ............................................................................................................................................ 110
P15.05 - Adaptation Factor ............................................................................................................................................. 110
P15.06 - Batch Automatic Record ................................................................................................................................... 111
P15.07 - DI Batch Terminate .......................................................................................................................................... 111
P15.08 - DO Batch Running ........................................................................................................................................... 111
P15.09 - DO Dribble Feed .............................................................................................................................................. 111
P15.10 - DO Full Feed ................................................................................................................................................... 111
P15.12 - Analog Setpoint Relat ....................................................................................................................................... 111
P15.13 - Batch Setpoint Range ....................................................................................................................................... 111
P15.14 - Batch Setpoint Offset ........................................................................................................................................ 111
P15.15 - Adaptation Time................................................................................................................................................ 112
P15.16 - Adaption Start Value ......................................................................................................................................... 112
P15.17 - Time Dribble Feed 2 ......................................................................................................................................... 112
P15.18 - Value Dribble Feed 2 ........................................................................................................................................ 112
P15.19 - DO Dribble Feed 2 ........................................................................................................................................... 112
P15.20 - Batch Tolerance................................................................................................................................................ 112
P15.21 - Event Out of Tolerance .................................................................................................................................... 112
P15.24 - Batch Setpoint Limit .......................................................................................................................................... 113
P15.25 - Event Batch setpoint Limit ............................................................................................................................... 113
P15.26 - Batch behaviour after power down ................................................................................................................... 113
P16 - Maintenance interval.............................................................................................................................................. 113
P16.01 - Maintenance Electric ........................................................................................................................................ 113
P16.02 - Event Maint. Electric ........................................................................................................................................ 113

Index
P16.03 - Maintenance Feeder Run ................................................................................................................................. 113

P16.04 - Event Maint.Feeder Run .................................................................................................................................. 114
P16.05 - Event Wrong System Time .............................................................................................................................. 114
P17 - Communication EasyServe ................................................................................................................................... 114
P17.01 - Own Address .................................................................................................................................................... 114
P17.02 - Baud Rate ......................................................................................................................................................... 114
P17.03 - Format Data ...................................................................................................................................................... 114
P18 - Communication Fieldbus ....................................................................................................................................... 114
P18.01 - Protocol Type.................................................................................................................................................... 115
P18.02 - Timeout Host .................................................................................................................................................... 115
P18.03 - Event Cyclic Communication ........................................................................................................................... 115
P18.04 - Event Acyclic Communication.......................................................................................................................... 115
P18.05 - Check in Keyboard Mode ................................................................................................................................. 115
P18.06 - Compatibility DISOCONT Master ..................................................................................................................... 116
P18.07 - Word Sequence ................................................................................................................................................ 116
P18.08 - Byte Sequence ................................................................................................................................................. 116
P18.09 - Configuration .................................................................................................................................................... 116
P18.10 - Address ............................................................................................................................................................ 116
P18.11 - Resolution ......................................................................................................................................................... 116
P18.12 - Baud rate .......................................................................................................................................................... 116
P18.13 - Data Format ...................................................................................................................................................... 117
P18.14 - Physics ............................................................................................................................................................. 117
P18.15 - Address ............................................................................................................................................................ 117
P18.16 - FLOAT-Format.................................................................................................................................................. 117
P18.17 - Address ............................................................................................................................................................ 117
P18.18 - Baud rate .......................................................................................................................................................... 117
P18.19 - Parameter ......................................................................................................................................................... 117
P18.20 - Preset Count ..................................................................................................................................................... 117
P18.21 - READ_ID Count................................................................................................................................................ 117
P18.22 - Access Rights Limitation FB ............................................................................................................................. 118
P18.23 - Remote IP Address FB ..................................................................................................................................... 118
P18.24 - Configuration .................................................................................................................................................... 118
P19 - Fixed mode configuration ...................................................................................................................................... 118
P19.01 - ID Preset Value 1.............................................................................................................................................. 118
P19.02 - ID Preset Value 2.............................................................................................................................................. 118
P19.03 - ID Preset Value 3.............................................................................................................................................. 118
P19.04 - ID Preset Value 4.............................................................................................................................................. 118
P19.05 - ID Preset Value 5.............................................................................................................................................. 118
P19.06 - ID Preset Value 6.............................................................................................................................................. 118
P19.07 - ID Preset Value 7.............................................................................................................................................. 119
P19.08 - ID Preset Value 8.............................................................................................................................................. 119
P19.09 - ID Read Value 1 ............................................................................................................................................... 119
P19.10 - ID Read Value 2 ............................................................................................................................................... 119
P19.11 - ID Read Value 3 ............................................................................................................................................... 119
P19.12 - ID Read Value 4 ............................................................................................................................................... 119
P19.13 - ID Read Value 5 ............................................................................................................................................... 119
P19.14 - ID Read Value 6 ............................................................................................................................................... 119
P19.15 - ID Read Value 7 ............................................................................................................................................... 119
P19.16 - ID Read Value 8 ............................................................................................................................................... 119
P19.17 - ID Read Value 9 ............................................................................................................................................... 119
P19.18 - ID Read Value 10 ............................................................................................................................................. 119
P19.19 - ID Read Value 11 ............................................................................................................................................. 119
P19.20 - ID Read Value 12 ............................................................................................................................................. 119
P19.21 - ID Read Value 13 ............................................................................................................................................. 119
P19.22 - ID Read Value 14 ............................................................................................................................................. 119
P19.23 - ID Read Value 15 ............................................................................................................................................. 119
P19.24 - ID Read Value 16 ............................................................................................................................................. 120
P20 - Ethernet ................................................................................................................................................................. 120
P20.01 - IP Address ........................................................................................................................................................ 120
P20.02 - Net Mask........................................................................................................................................................... 120
P20.03 - Gateway ........................................................................................................................................................... 120
P21 - PLC Outputs .......................................................................................................................................................... 120
P21.01 - DO PLC 1 ........................................................................................................................................................ 120
P21.02 - DO PLC 2 ........................................................................................................................................................ 120
P21.03 - DO PLC 3 ........................................................................................................................................................ 120
P21.04 - DO PLC 4 ........................................................................................................................................................ 120
P21.05 - DO PLC 5 ........................................................................................................................................................ 121
P21.06 - DO PLC 6 ........................................................................................................................................................ 121

Index
P21.07 - DO PLC 7 ........................................................................................................................................................ 121

P21.08 - DO PLC 8 ........................................................................................................................................................ 121
P21.09 - AO PLC 1......................................................................................................................................................... 121
P21.10 - AO PLC 2......................................................................................................................................................... 121
P21.23 - Position at STOP .............................................................................................................................................. 121
P22 - Bin Weigher ........................................................................................................................................................... 121
P22.01 - Bin Weigher Active ........................................................................................................................................... 121
P22.02 - LC Load Measurement .................................................................................................................................... 122
P22.03 - LC Characteristic Value .................................................................................................................................... 122
P22.04 - LC Rated Capacity............................................................................................................................................ 122
P22.05 - LC Filter ............................................................................................................................................................ 122
P22.06 - Bipolar Measurement ........................................................................................................................................ 122
P22.07 - Event Error LC Input (Bin)................................................................................................................................ 123
P22.08 - Event LC Input > MAX (Bin) ............................................................................................................................. 123
P22.09 - Bin capacity ...................................................................................................................................................... 123
P22.10 - Display Format.................................................................................................................................................. 123
P22.11 - Display Filter ..................................................................................................................................................... 123
P22.12 - Control Level MIN ............................................................................................................................................. 123
P22.13 - Control Level MAX ............................................................................................................................................ 124
P22.14 - DO Bin Filling ................................................................................................................................................... 124
P22.15 - Bin Level MIN ................................................................................................................................................... 124
P22.16 - Event Bin Level MIN ........................................................................................................................................ 124
P22.17 - DO Bin Level MIN ............................................................................................................................................ 124
P22.18 - Bin Level MAX .................................................................................................................................................. 124
P22.19 - Event Bin Level MAX ....................................................................................................................................... 125
P22.20 - DO Bin Level MAX ........................................................................................................................................... 125
P22.21 - AO Bin Load .................................................................................................................................................... 125
P22.22 - AO Offset ......................................................................................................................................................... 125
P22.23 - AO Range ........................................................................................................................................................ 125
P22.24 - Range Correction.............................................................................................................................................. 125
P22.25 - Tare (Bin) .......................................................................................................................................................... 125
P22.26 - Calibration Weight ............................................................................................................................................ 125
P22.27 - Controller in OFF-Mode .................................................................................................................................... 126
P22.28 - DI Bin Load Sensor.......................................................................................................................................... 126
P22.29 - Event Bin Load MAX Sensor ........................................................................................................................... 126
P22.30 - Bin Level analog Input Offset ............................................................................................................................ 126
P22.31 - Bin Level analog Input Range ........................................................................................................................... 127
P23 - Bin Level Controller ............................................................................................................................................... 127
P23.01 - Bin Controller ON.............................................................................................................................................. 127
P23.02 - Filling Type ....................................................................................................................................................... 127
P23.03 - AO Controller Magnitude Bin Level.................................................................................................................. 127
P23.04 - DO Feeder ON................................................................................................................................................. 127
P23.05 - Setpoint Bin Level ............................................................................................................................................. 128
P23.06 - Feeder Constant ............................................................................................................................................... 128
P23.07 - Dead Time TT ................................................................................................................................................... 128
P23.08 - P-Component KP .............................................................................................................................................. 128
P23.09 - I-Component TN ............................................................................................................................................... 128
P23.10 - D Portion TV ..................................................................................................................................................... 128
P23.11 - D Filter TD ........................................................................................................................................................ 128
P23.12 - Bypass .............................................................................................................................................................. 129
P23.13 - Bypass D Portion .............................................................................................................................................. 129
P23.14 - Controller Magnitude Offset .............................................................................................................................. 129
P23.15 - Lower Limit ....................................................................................................................................................... 129
P23.16 - Upper Limit ....................................................................................................................................................... 129
P23.17 - Dead Band Deviation ........................................................................................................................................ 129
P23.18 - Dead Band Factor............................................................................................................................................. 129
P23.19 - Setpoint Filter.................................................................................................................................................... 129
P23.20 - Flow Rate Filter................................................................................................................................................. 130
P23.21 - DI Init. Controller .............................................................................................................................................. 130
P23.22 - Bin Setpoint source........................................................................................................................................... 130
P23.24 - Stepper ............................................................................................................................................................. 130
P23.25 - S P-Component ............................................................................................................................................... 130
P23.26 - S I-Component................................................................................................................................................. 130
P23.27 - S D-Component ............................................................................................................................................... 130
P23.28 - S Threshold Resp ............................................................................................................................................ 131
P23.29 - S Compensation Element ................................................................................................................................ 131
P23.30 - S DO Open Flow Gate (B) ............................................................................................................................... 131
P23.31 - S DO Close Flow Gate (B) ............................................................................................................................... 131

Index
P23.32 - AI Position Flow Gate (B)................................................................................................................................. 131

P23.33 - AI Offset (B) ..................................................................................................................................................... 131
P23.34 - AI Range (B) .................................................................................................................................................... 131
P23.35 - AO Position Flow Gate (B) ............................................................................................................................... 132
P23.36 - AO Offset (B) ................................................................................................................................................... 132
P23.37 - AO Range (B) .................................................................................................................................................. 132
P23.38 - Event MIN Flow Gate (B) ................................................................................................................................. 132
P23.39 - Position MIN Flow Gate (B) .............................................................................................................................. 132
P23.40 - Event MAX Flow Gate (B) ................................................................................................................................ 132
P23.41 - Position MAX Flow Gate(B) .............................................................................................................................. 133
P24 - Check System ....................................................................................................................................................... 133
P24.01 - Type of Check System...................................................................................................................................... 133
P24.02 - Auto Correction ................................................................................................................................................. 133
P24.03 - Cyclic Auto Start ............................................................................................................................................... 134
P24.04 - Cycle Time ........................................................................................................................................................ 134
P24.05 - Release Check System .................................................................................................................................... 134
P24.06 - Event No Check Release................................................................................................................................. 134
P24.07 - Check Start Span.............................................................................................................................................. 134
P24.08 - Check Start Tare............................................................................................................................................... 134
P24.09 - Accept Correction ............................................................................................................................................. 135
P24.10 - Finish Check Measurement .............................................................................................................................. 135
P24.11 - Check Quantity ................................................................................................................................................. 135
P24.12 - Storage Quantity ............................................................................................................................................... 135
P24.13 - Minimum Fill Weight ......................................................................................................................................... 135
P24.14 - Event Minimum Fill Weight .............................................................................................................................. 135
P24.15 - Maximum Fill Weight ........................................................................................................................................ 136
P24.16 - Event Maximum Fill Weight ............................................................................................................................. 136
P24.17 - Damping Time .................................................................................................................................................. 136
P24.18 - DO Control Started .......................................................................................................................................... 136
P24.19 - Feeder Stopped ................................................................................................................................................ 136
P24.20 - Event Feeder Not Stopped .............................................................................................................................. 136
P24.21 - Event Prepare Check Measurement ................................................................................................................ 136
P24.22 - DO Check Measurement Active....................................................................................................................... 136
P24.23 - Event Expect Acceptance ................................................................................................................................ 137
P24.24 - DO Expect Acceptance ..................................................................................................................................... 137
P24.25 - Absolute Range ................................................................................................................................................ 137
P24.26 - Relative Range ................................................................................................................................................. 137
P24.27 - Event Absolute Tare Correction Error .............................................................................................................. 137
P24.28 - Event Relative Tare Correction Error ............................................................................................................... 138
P24.29 - Event Absolute Span Correction Error ............................................................................................................. 138
P24.30 - Event Relative Span Correction Error .............................................................................................................. 138
P24.31 - Correction Evaluation ....................................................................................................................................... 138
P24.32 - Correction Speed .............................................................................................................................................. 138
P24.33 - AO Check Measurement Result ...................................................................................................................... 139
P24.34 - DO Check Gate ............................................................................................................................................... 139
P24.35 - Check Gate Feedback ...................................................................................................................................... 139
P24.36 - Check Gate Time .............................................................................................................................................. 139
P24.37 - Event Check Gate Error................................................................................................................................... 140
P24.38 - Limit Max. Bin Error .......................................................................................................................................... 140
P24.39 - Event Bin Error ................................................................................................................................................ 140
P24.40 - DO Correction Error ......................................................................................................................................... 140
P25 - Moisture ................................................................................................................................................................. 141
P25.01 - Moisture Active ................................................................................................................................................. 141
P25.02 - Moisture Select ................................................................................................................................................. 141
P25.03 - AI Moisture Measurement ................................................................................................................................ 141
P25.04 - Nominal Moisture .............................................................................................................................................. 141
P25.05 - Moisture Offset ................................................................................................................................................. 141
P25.06 - Moisture Range ................................................................................................................................................ 141
P25.07 - DO Moisture active .......................................................................................................................................... 142
P25.08 - Moisture MAX ................................................................................................................................................... 142
P25.09 - DO Moisture MAX ............................................................................................................................................ 142
P25.10 - Event Moisture MAX ........................................................................................................................................ 142
P25.11 - AO Flow Rate corrected................................................................................................................................... 142
P25.12 - AO Flow Rate Offset ........................................................................................................................................ 142
P25.13 - AO Flow Rate Range ....................................................................................................................................... 142
P25.14 - Pulse Counter corrected ................................................................................................................................... 143
P26 - Additional device............................................................................................................................................ 143, 144
P26.01 - Auto Zero Active ............................................................................................................................................... 143

Index
P26.02 - Auto Zero Limit ................................................................................................................................................. 143

P26.03 - Event Tare Correction ...................................................................................................................................... 143
P26.04 - Zero Drop-Out Active ........................................................................................................................................ 144
P26.05 - Zero Drop-Out Limit .......................................................................................................................................... 144
P26.06 - DO Agitator ON................................................................................................................................................ 144
P26.07 - START Agitator................................................................................................................................................. 144
P27 - Dead Time ............................................................................................................................................................. 144
P27.01 - Dead Time Active ............................................................................................................................................. 144
P27.02 - Dead Time ........................................................................................................................................................ 144
P27.03 - Setpoint Select.................................................................................................................................................. 145
P27.04 - Setpoint Clock ON ............................................................................................................................................ 145
P27.05 - ON/OFF Select ................................................................................................................................................. 145
P27.06 - ON/OFF Clock ON ............................................................................................................................................ 145
P27.07 - Time Elements Preassign ................................................................................................................................. 145
P27.08 - Initialise Time Elements .................................................................................................................................... 145
P27.09 - DO Dead Time Active ...................................................................................................................................... 145
P27.10 - DO Setpoint Active .......................................................................................................................................... 145
P27.11 - DO ON/OFF Active .......................................................................................................................................... 145
P28 - Interlocking ............................................................................................................................................................ 145
P28.01 - DI Event Mechanics 1 ...................................................................................................................................... 145
P28.06 - DI Event Electricity 1........................................................................................................................................ 146
P28.07 - DI Event Electricity 2 ........................................................................................................................................ 146
P28.08 - DI Event Electricity 3 ........................................................................................................................................ 146
P28.09 - DO Event Mechanics ....................................................................................................................................... 146
P28.10 - Event Mechanics ............................................................................................................................................. 146
P28.11 - DO Event Electricity ......................................................................................................................................... 146
P28.12 - Event Electricity ............................................................................................................................................... 146
P28.13 - DO Event Mechatronics 1 ................................................................................................................................ 146
P28.14 - DO Event Mechatronics 2 ................................................................................................................................ 147
P28.15 - Event Mechatronics ......................................................................................................................................... 147
P28.16 - DO Ready ........................................................................................................................................................ 147
P28.17 - Event Not Ready.............................................................................................................................................. 147
P28.18 - DO Ready for Start .......................................................................................................................................... 147
P28.19 - Event Not Ready for Start ................................................................................................................................ 147
P29 - FCB analog outputs ............................................................................................................................................... 147
P29.01 - FCB_AO 01 ...................................................................................................................................................... 147
P29.02 - Offset FCB_AO 1 .............................................................................................................................................. 147
P29.03 - Range FCB_AO 1 ............................................................................................................................................. 147
P29.04 - Reference FCB_AO 1 ....................................................................................................................................... 148
P29.05 - FCB_AO 02 ...................................................................................................................................................... 148
P29.06 - Offset FCB_AO 2 .............................................................................................................................................. 148
P29.07 - Range FCB_AO 2 ............................................................................................................................................. 148
P29.09 - FCB_AO 03 ...................................................................................................................................................... 148
P29.10 - Offset FCB_AO 3 .............................................................................................................................................. 148
P29.11 - Range FCB_AO 3 ............................................................................................................................................. 149
P29.13 - FCB_AO 04 ...................................................................................................................................................... 149
P29.14 - Offset FCB_AO 4 .............................................................................................................................................. 149
P29.15 - Range FCB_AO 4 ............................................................................................................................................. 149
P29.17 - FCB_AO 05 ...................................................................................................................................................... 149
P29.18 - Offset FCB_AO 5 .............................................................................................................................................. 150
P29.19 - Range FCB_AO 5 ............................................................................................................................................. 150
P29.21 - FCB Variant ...................................................................................................................................................... 150
P29.22 - Event FCB-Error .............................................................................................................................................. 150
P30 - FCB digital outputs ................................................................................................................................................ 150
P30.01 - FCB_DO 01 ...................................................................................................................................................... 151
P30.02 - FCB_DO 02 ...................................................................................................................................................... 151
P30.03 - FCB_DO 03 ...................................................................................................................................................... 151
P30.04 - FCB_DO 04 ...................................................................................................................................................... 151
P30.05 - FCB_DO 05 ...................................................................................................................................................... 151
P30.06 - FCB_DO 06 ...................................................................................................................................................... 151

Index
P30.07 - FCB_DO 07 ...................................................................................................................................................... 151

P30.08 - FCB_DO 08 ...................................................................................................................................................... 151
P30.09 - FCB_DO 09 ...................................................................................................................................................... 151
P30.10 - FCB_DO 10 ...................................................................................................................................................... 151
P30.11 - FCB_DO 11 ...................................................................................................................................................... 151
P30.12 - FCB_DO 12 ...................................................................................................................................................... 151
P30.13 - FCB_DO 13 ...................................................................................................................................................... 152
P30.14 - FCB_DO 14 ...................................................................................................................................................... 152
P30.15 - FCB_DO 15 ...................................................................................................................................................... 152
P30.16 - FCB_DO 16 ...................................................................................................................................................... 152
P30.17 - FCB_DO 17 ...................................................................................................................................................... 152
P30.18 - FCB_DO 18 ...................................................................................................................................................... 152
P30.19 - FCB_DO 19 ...................................................................................................................................................... 152
P30.20 - FCB_DO 20 ...................................................................................................................................................... 152
P31 - Data Logging ......................................................................................................................................................... 152
P31.01 - Hourly Total Time ............................................................................................................................................. 152
P31.02 - Daily Total Time ................................................................................................................................................ 152
P31.03 - Logger cycle time.............................................................................................................................................. 153
P31.04 - Data Log Value 1 .............................................................................................................................................. 153
P31.05 - Data Log Value 2 .............................................................................................................................................. 153
P31.06 - Data Log Value 3 .............................................................................................................................................. 153
P31.07 - Data Log Value 4 .............................................................................................................................................. 153
P31.08 - Data Log Value 5 .............................................................................................................................................. 153
P31.09 - Data Log Value 6 .............................................................................................................................................. 153
P31.10 - Data Log Value 7 .............................................................................................................................................. 153
P31.11 - Data Log Value 8 .............................................................................................................................................. 153
P31.12 - Data Log Value 9 .............................................................................................................................................. 153
P31.13 - Data Log Value 10 ............................................................................................................................................ 153
P32 - Configuration HMI Values ...................................................................................................................................... 154
P32.01 - HMI Value 01 .................................................................................................................................................... 154
P32.02 - HMI Value 02 .................................................................................................................................................... 154
P32.03 - HMI Value 03 .................................................................................................................................................... 154
P32.04 - HMI Value 04 .................................................................................................................................................... 154
P32.05 - HMI Value 05 .................................................................................................................................................... 154
P32.06 - HMI Value 06 .................................................................................................................................................... 154
P32.07 - HMI Value 07 .................................................................................................................................................... 154
P32.08 - HMI Value 08 .................................................................................................................................................... 154
P32.09 - HMI Value 09 .................................................................................................................................................... 154
P32.10 - HMI Value 10 .................................................................................................................................................... 154
P33 - Linearization .......................................................................................................................................... 154, 155, 156
P33.01 - Linearization ON ............................................................................................................................................... 154
P33.02 - Linearization S1 ................................................................................................................................................ 155
P33.03 - Linearization I1 ................................................................................................................................................. 155
P33.10 - Event Linearization Error ................................................................................................................................. 156
P34 - Flow Gate .............................................................................................................................................................. 156
P34.01 - S DO Open Flow Gate ..................................................................................................................................... 156
P34.02 - S DO Close Flow Gate .................................................................................................................................... 156
P34.03 - AI Position Flow Gate ...................................................................................................................................... 156
P34.04 - AI Offset ........................................................................................................................................................... 156
P34.05 - AI Range .......................................................................................................................................................... 156
P34.06 - AO Position Flow Gate .................................................................................................................................... 156
P34.07 - AO Offset ......................................................................................................................................................... 157
P34.08 - AO Range ........................................................................................................................................................ 157
P34.09 - Event MIN Flow Gate ....................................................................................................................................... 157
P34.10 - Position MIN Flow Gate .................................................................................................................................... 157
P34.11 - Event MAX Flow Gate ..................................................................................................................................... 157
P34.12 - Position MAX Flow Gate ................................................................................................................................... 157
P35 - Local Mode (Speed) .............................................................................................................................................. 158
P35.01 - Motor Select (Block 1) ...................................................................................................................................... 158
P35.02 - ON in Remote (Block 1) .................................................................................................................................... 158
P35.03 - Controller Magnitude (Block 1) ......................................................................................................................... 158
P35.04 - Controller Magnitude Offset (Block 1) ............................................................................................................... 158

Index
P35.05 - JOG enable (Block 1)........................................................................................................................................ 158

P35.06 - Release local Start (Block 1)............................................................................................................................. 158
P35.07 - DI External Error 1 (Block 1) ............................................................................................................................ 159
P35.10 - DO ON Motor (2nd) (Block 1) .......................................................................................................................... 159
P35.25 - JOG enable (Block 3) ....................................................................................................................................... 161
P35.45 - JOG enable (Block 5) ....................................................................................................................................... 163
P36 - Local Mode (Gate) ................................................................................................................................................. 164
P36.01 - Motor Select ..................................................................................................................................................... 164
P36.02 - OPEN in Remote .............................................................................................................................................. 164
P36.03 - DI Limit Switch OPEN ...................................................................................................................................... 164
P36.04 - CLOSE in Remote ............................................................................................................................................ 164
P36.05 - DI Limit Switch CLOSE .................................................................................................................................... 164
P36.06 - Release local Start............................................................................................................................................ 164
P36.07 - DI External Error 1 ........................................................................................................................................... 165
Parameter ....................................................................................................................................................................... 117
Parameter Block 01 - Hardware Modules .......................................................................................................................... 84
Parameter Block 02 - Dialog Behaviour............................................................................................................................. 86
Parameter Block 03 - Device Definition ............................................................................................................................. 89
Parameter Block 04 - Control Sources .............................................................................................................................. 91
Parameter Block 05 - Rated Data ..................................................................................................................................... 92
Parameter Block 06 - Feeder control................................................................................................................................. 93
Parameter Block 07 - Feeder Monitoring........................................................................................................................... 93
Parameter Block 08 - Filters .............................................................................................................................................. 97
Parameter Block 09 - Limit Values .................................................................................................................................... 97
Parameter Block 10 - Calibration Data .............................................................................................................................. 98
Parameter Block 11 - Rate controller ................................................................................................................................ 99

Index
Parameter Block 12 - Analog Outputs ............................................................................................................................. 103

Parameter Block 13 - Digital Inputs ................................................................................................................................. 105
Parameter Block 14 - Digital Outputs .............................................................................................................................. 108
Parameter Block 15 - Batch Mode .................................................................................................................................. 110
Parameter Block 16 - Maintenance interval ..................................................................................................................... 113
Parameter Block 17 - Communication EasyServe........................................................................................................... 114
Parameter Block 18 - Communication Fieldbus .............................................................................................................. 114
Parameter Block 19 - Fixed mode configuration ............................................................................................................. 118
Parameter Block 20 - Ethernet ........................................................................................................................................ 120
Parameter Block 21 - PLC Outputs ................................................................................................................................. 120
Parameter Block 22 - Bin Weigher .................................................................................................................................. 121
Parameter Block 23 - Bin Level Controller ...................................................................................................................... 127
Parameter Block 24 - Check System............................................................................................................................... 133
Parameter Block 25 - Moisture ........................................................................................................................................ 140
Parameter Block 26 - Additional device........................................................................................................................... 143
Parameter Block 27 - Dead Time .................................................................................................................................... 144
Parameter Block 28 - Interlocking ................................................................................................................................... 145
Parameter Block 29 - FCB analog outputs ...................................................................................................................... 147
Parameter Block 30 - FCB digital outputs ....................................................................................................................... 150
Parameter Block 31 - Data Logging ................................................................................................................................ 152
Parameter Block 32 - Configuration HMI Values ............................................................................................................. 153
Parameter Block 33 - Linearization ................................................................................................................................. 154
Parameter Block 34 - Flow Gate ..................................................................................................................................... 156
Parameter Block 35 - Local Mode (Speed) ..................................................................................................................... 157
Parameter Block 36 - Local Mode (Gate) ........................................................................................................................ 163
Parameter Changes ............................................................................................................................................................ 3
Parameter Details.............................................................................................................................................................. 84
Parameter List ................................................................................................................................................................... 65
Parameter Overview.......................................................................................................................................................... 65
Parameters........................................................................................................................................................................ 61
Password ...................................................................................................................................................................... 3, 88
P-Component KP .................................................................................................................................................... 100, 128
Personnel ............................................................................................................................................................................ 3
Physics ............................................................................................................................................................................ 117
PLC Functionality (Optional) ........................................................................................................................................... 213
PLC Outputs.................................................................................................................................................................... 120
Position at STOP..................................................................................................................................................... 101, 121
Position MAX Flow Gate ................................................................................................................................................. 157
Position MAX Flow Gate(B) ............................................................................................................................................. 133
Position MIN Flow Gate................................................................................................................................................... 157
Position MIN Flow Gate (B) ............................................................................................................................................. 132
Potential Sources of Danger ............................................................................................................................................... 3
Preconditions .................................................................................................................................................................... 53
Prefeeder start/stop ........................................................................................................................................................... 89
Preset Count ................................................................................................................................................................... 117
Procedure for activating data logging ................................................................................................................................ 39
Procedure for displaying the values table .......................................................................................................................... 30
Protocol Type .................................................................................................................................................................. 115
Provision of the Manual ....................................................................................................................................................... 1
Pulse Counter corrected.................................................................................................................................................. 143
Pulse Length Total ............................................................................................................................................................ 90
Pulse Output for External Totalizing Counters................................................................................................................. 218
Range Correction ...................................................................................................................................................... 98, 125
Range FCB_AO 1 ........................................................................................................................................................... 147
Range FCB_AO 2 ........................................................................................................................................................... 148
Range FCB_AO 3 ........................................................................................................................................................... 149
Range FCB_AO 4 ........................................................................................................................................................... 149
Range FCB_AO 5 ........................................................................................................................................................... 150
Rate controller ................................................................................................................................................................... 99
Rated Data ........................................................................................................................................................................ 92
READ_ID Count .............................................................................................................................................................. 117
Reading and Setting Parameters ...................................................................................................................................... 36
Reference FCB_AO 1 ..................................................................................................................................................... 148
Reference FCB_AO 2 ..................................................................................................................................................... 148
Reference FCB_AO 3 ..................................................................................................................................................... 149
Reference FCB_AO 4 ..................................................................................................................................................... 149
Reference FCB_AO 5 ..................................................................................................................................................... 150
regulated ........................................................................................................................................................................... 10

Index
Relative Range................................................................................................................................................................ 137

Relative Setpoint ............................................................................................................................................................... 28
Relative Setpoint Offset..................................................................................................................................................... 92
Relativer Setpoint Range .................................................................................................................................................. 92
Release Check System ................................................................................................................................................... 134
Release local Start .......................................................................................................................................................... 164
Release local Start (Block 1) ........................................................................................................................................... 158
Remote IP Address FB.................................................................................................................................................... 118
Remote IP Address HMI 1................................................................................................................................................. 87
Replacing Components ....................................................................................................................................................... 4
Representation of safety instructions .................................................................................................................................. 5
Reset Counter 1 ................................................................................................................................................................ 88
Reset Counter 2 ................................................................................................................................................................ 88
Reset to Factory Settings .................................................................................................................................................. 37
Resetting (zero setting) the totalizing counter ................................................................................................................... 29
Resolution ....................................................................................................................................................................... 116
Restrictions for Operating Panel with Ethernet Connection and Connection Monitoring ................................................... 26
S Compensation Element............................................................................................................................................... 131
S D-Component ............................................................................................................................................................. 130
S DO Close Flow Gate ................................................................................................................................................... 156
S DO Close Flow Gate (B) ............................................................................................................................................. 131
S DO Open Flow Gate ................................................................................................................................................... 156
S DO Open Flow Gate (B).............................................................................................................................................. 131
S I-Component ....................................................................................................................................................... 102, 130
S P-Component...................................................................................................................................................... 102, 130
S Threshold Resp. ......................................................................................................................................................... 131
S Threshold Response ................................................................................................................................................... 103
Safety notes ........................................................................................................................................................................ 3
SC01 Event Setpoint Limited ........................................................................................................................................ 176
SC02 Event Stand-By ................................................................................................................................................... 177
SC03 Event Maint.Feeder Run ..................................................................................................................................... 177
SC04 Event Maint. Electric............................................................................................................................................ 177
SC05 Event External Event 1 ........................................................................................................................................ 177
Scale Name....................................................................................................................................................................... 86
See Available Data Lists ................................................................................................................................................... 19
Selecting an Operating Page ............................................................................................................................................ 22
Selecting Asian Character Fonts ....................................................................................................................................... 41
Selecting simulation mode ................................................................................................................................................ 38
Selection and Display of the Scales (Feeder) ................................................................................................................... 40
Separated Units Control Type ........................................................................................................................................... 51
Sequence Monitoring ...................................................................................................................................................... 176
Service Functions.............................................................................................................................................................. 36
Set setpoint ....................................................................................................................................................................... 28
Set the Homepage (Config)............................................................................................................................................... 41
Setpoint and switch-on sources ...................................................................................................................................... 179
Setpoint Bin Level ........................................................................................................................................................... 128
Setpoint Clock ON........................................................................................................................................................... 145
Setpoint Filter .................................................................................................................................................................. 129
Setpoint Filter 1st Ord ..................................................................................................................................................... 101
Setpoint Filter 2nd Ord .................................................................................................................................................... 102
Setpoint Offset .......................................................................................................................................................... 91, 103
Setpoint Range ......................................................................................................................................................... 91, 103
Setpoint Select ................................................................................................................................................................ 145
Setpoint Threshold .......................................................................................................................................................... 102
Setting the Address (VHM addr.)....................................................................................................................................... 41
Setting the Clock ............................................................................................................................................................... 37
Setting the Display ............................................................................................................................................................ 42
Signal Words ....................................................................................................................................................................... 4
Signal Words for Application Notes ..................................................................................................................................... 5

Index
Signal Words for Safety Warnings ...................................................................................................................................... 4

Simulation Mode ............................................................................................................................................................... 38
Single Unit Control Type ................................................................................................................................................... 50
Some Definitions ................................................................................................................................................................. 8
Source Emergency Setpoint.............................................................................................................................................. 97
Source Relative Setpoint ................................................................................................................................................... 92
Source Run Enable ........................................................................................................................................................... 92
Special Operating Functions ............................................................................................................................................. 30
Stand-By Limit Value ......................................................................................................................................................... 94
START Agitator ............................................................................................................................................................... 144
Startup............................................................................................................................................................................... 55
Step controller ................................................................................................................................................................. 188
Stepper............................................................................................................................................................................ 130
Storage Quantity ............................................................................................................................................................. 135
Store................................................................................................................................................................................ 101
Storing Counter States ...................................................................................................................................................... 30
Switch Feeding On/Off ...................................................................................................................................................... 27
Switch Grav./Vol. command .............................................................................................................................................. 89
Switch Keyboard-/Normal Mode........................................................................................................................................ 89
Switch on........................................................................................................................................................................... 13
Switch scales on/off........................................................................................................................................................... 27
Switching feeding off ......................................................................................................................................................... 27
Switching Keyboard Mode On ........................................................................................................................................... 33
SY01 Event Memory ..................................................................................................................................................... 177
SY02 Event Communication VCU20100-Unit 2 ............................................................................................................ 177
SY03 Event Communication VCU20100-Unit 3 ............................................................................................................ 178
SY04 Event Communication HMI 1 ............................................................................................................................... 178
SY07 Event Communication VHM serial ....................................................................................................................... 178
SY08 Event Cyclic Communication ............................................................................................................................... 178
SY10 Event Acyclic Communication ............................................................................................................................. 178
SY15 Event Communication VMO20100-Unit 1 ............................................................................................................ 178
SY16 Event Communication VMO20100-Unit 2 ............................................................................................................ 178
Symbol for Running Operation .......................................................................................................................................... 23
System Message ............................................................................................................................................................. 177
Tab.01: Definition for formula symbols ................................................................................................................................ 8
Tab.02: Operating access ................................................................................................................................................. 14
Tab.03: Data lists and information from the scale control system ..................................................................................... 20
Tab.04: Work areas and functions..................................................................................................................................... 25
Tab.05: Source parameters that have an effect in normal operation ................................................................................. 26
Tab.06: Control keys ......................................................................................................................................................... 31
Tab.07: Meaning of the identifier (ID) ................................................................................................................................ 33
Tab.08: Bin weigher parameters ....................................................................................................................................... 35
Tab.09: Operating keys for controlling hopper fill level ...................................................................................................... 36
Tab.10: Parameter sets: use and activation ...................................................................................................................... 38
Tab.11: Operating keys for adjustment programs ............................................................................................................. 39
Tab.12: Keys in the list of scales ....................................................................................................................................... 40
Tab.13: Fields for setting the address ............................................................................................................................... 41
Tab.14: Setting the startup routine .................................................................................................................................... 42
Tab.15: Settings for the display ......................................................................................................................................... 42
Tab.16: Keys in the VHM configuration dialog .................................................................................................................. 43
Tab.17: Alternatives .......................................................................................................................................................... 44
Tab.18: Details and procedure .......................................................................................................................................... 46
Tab.21: The details and process of taring for the bin weigher........................................................................................... 48
Tab.22: The details and procedure for checking the weight of the bin weigher................................................................. 48
Tab.23: The details and process of improving bin level regulation.................................................................................... 49
Tab.24: Basic parameters ................................................................................................................................................. 55
Tab.25: Carrying out calibration ........................................................................................................................................ 56
Tab.26: Suggested actions................................................................................................................................................ 59
Tab.27: Using parameter sets in the DISOCONT Tersus.................................................................................................. 61
Tab.28: Abbreviations frequently used in parameters ....................................................................................................... 62
Tab.29: Step-by-step specification of signal links.............................................................................................................. 63
Tab.30: Signal sources and their descriptions................................................................................................................... 63
Tab.31: What the columns mean ...................................................................................................................................... 64
Tab.32: The meaning of the Level parameter segment for an internal True signal ........................................................... 64

Index
Tab.33: Example of how a binary input channel is assigned to a physical input channel .................................................. 64
Tab.34: Event classes ....................................................................................................................................................... 64
Tab.35: Event groups ...................................................................................................................................................... 167
Tab.36: The states and points in time in the flow chart ................................................................................................... 181
Tab.37: Relevant parameters .......................................................................................................................................... 181
Tab.39: Controller models and how they are used .......................................................................................................... 183
Tab.41: Special cases for KP and TN parameters .......................................................................................................... 186
Tab.42: Set-up notes for parameters in the constant controller ....................................................................................... 187
Tab.43: Characteristics in special operational states ...................................................................................................... 187
Tab.44: The control parameters for the step controller.................................................................................................... 189
Tab.45: Switching and operational states........................................................................................................................ 190
Tab.46: Some signals of the control logic........................................................................................................................ 191
Tab.47: Process: discharge weighing with regulating loss-in-weight feeder.................................................................... 192
Tab.48: The meaning of the abbreviations in the block diagram ..................................................................................... 206
Tab.49: Blocks available for processing binary signals ................................................................................................... 216
Tab.50: Long counting pulse ........................................................................................................................................... 219
Tab.51: Counting pulse weight ........................................................................................................................................ 219
Tare (Bin) ........................................................................................................................................................................ 125
Tare Correction ................................................................................................................................................................. 98
Tare Correction Check ...................................................................................................................................................... 99
Taring the bin weigher ....................................................................................................................................................... 47
Taring the flowthrough measurement ................................................................................................................................ 45
Terminology ........................................................................................................................................................................ 8
Test that the Control is Functioning ................................................................................................................................... 55
The logic for position-controlled feed gates ..................................................................................................................... 200
Threshold Deviation .......................................................................................................................................................... 95
Time Deviation .................................................................................................................................................................. 95
Time Dribble Feed 2 ........................................................................................................................................................ 112
Time Elements Preassign ............................................................................................................................................... 145
Timeout Host ................................................................................................................................................................... 115
TIP ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 6
Totalizer Increment ........................................................................................................................................................... 90
Trend ................................................................................................................................................................................. 31
Trend display..................................................................................................................................................................... 31
Turning on Feeding ........................................................................................................................................................... 27
Type of Check System .................................................................................................................................................... 133
Types of control measurement .......................................................................................................................................... 50
Units .................................................................................................................................................................................. 86
unregulated ....................................................................................................................................................................... 10
Upper Limit.............................................................................................................................................................. 100, 129
Using alternative signals (such as analog or fieldbus) for DMS inputs ............................................................................ 211
Using the Adjustment Programs ........................................................................................................................................ 39
Value Dribble Feed 2....................................................................................................................................................... 112
Values and Graphics ......................................................................................................................................................... 23
VCU2 Analog Channel A10 .............................................................................................................................................. 85
VCU20100-Unit 2 .............................................................................................................................................................. 85
VCU20100-Unit 3 .............................................................................................................................................................. 85
VHM Operator Panel (optional) ......................................................................................................................................... 20
VHM RS485 Address ........................................................................................................................................................ 86
VHM System Information and Cleaning the Screen .......................................................................................................... 44
VHM/Scale System Information and Cleaning the Screen ................................................................................................ 34
VMO20100-Unit 1 ............................................................................................................................................................. 86
VMO20100-Unit 2 ............................................................................................................................................................. 86
Volumetric Operation ........................................................................................................................................................ 10
Volumetric Start-Up ........................................................................................................................................................... 93
Volumetric Synchronous Operation ................................................................................................................................... 10
Warning ............................................................................................................................................................................... 5
Ways to Establish a Connection: ....................................................................................................................................... 18
WE01 Event Power Failure ........................................................................................................................................... 172
WE02 Event NAMUR Error VCU1-DI6 .......................................................................................................................... 172

Index

WE08 Event Analog Input < Offset ................................................................................................................................ 173
WE13 Event NAMUR Error VMO1-DI7 ......................................................................................................................... 173
WE14 Event NAMUR Error VMO2-DI7 ......................................................................................................................... 173
web server homepage ....................................................................................................................................................... 18
Weight check flowthrough meter ....................................................................................................................................... 46
What is the DISOCONT Tersus?......................................................................................................................................... 7
Word Sequence .............................................................................................................................................................. 116
Zero Drop-Out Active ...................................................................................................................................................... 144
Zero Drop-Out Limit......................................................................................................................................................... 144
Zeroing Limit ..................................................................................................................................................................... 99


BVH2414GB

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

BVH2414GB

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

DISOCONT® Tersus MULTISTREAM

Heavy Advisory Service about Spare Parts, Maintenance

Logistical and Industrial Scales

24h Hotline: +49 172 650 1700

Individual phone consulting - fee required

© by Schenck Process GmbH, Pallaswiesenstraße 100, 64293 Darmstadt, Germany

Note: The original manual is in German. This is a translation.

(9007199753939851 V2, 19/11/2014)

1 About This Manual ............................................................................................................... 1

2 Safety notes .......................................................................................................................... 3

3 General Diagram ................................................................................................................... 7

DISOCONT® Tersus MULTISTREAM, Instruction Manual BV-H2414GB, V2

4.3.4.4 Resetting (zero setting) the totalizing counter ..............................................................................29

6 Maintenance and Recalibration ............................................................................................................ 59

BV-H2414GB, V2 DISOCONT® Tersus MULTISTREAM, Instruction Manual

8 Event Messages.................................................................................................................................... 167

DISOCONT® Tersus MULTISTREAM, Instruction Manual BV-H2414GB, V2

8.1.9 Event Group: Sequence Monitoring .......................................................................................... 176

9 Appendix ............................................................................................................................................... 179

Index ...................................................................................................................................................... 220

BV-H2414GB, V2 DISOCONT® Tersus MULTISTREAM, Instruction Manual

1 About This Manual

Provision of the Manual

BV-H2406 DISOCONT® Tersus – System manual

DISOCONT® Tersus MULTISTREAM, Instruction Manual BV-H2414GB, V2

Potential Sources of Danger

DISOCONT® Tersus MULTISTREAM, Instruction Manual BV-H2414GB, V2

Acknowledging Event Messages

Maintenance and Repair

Moisture and Humidity

Keeping the Technical Documentation

2.1 Signal Words

2.1.1 Signal Words for Safety Warnings

BV-H2414GB, V2 DISOCONT® Tersus MULTISTREAM, Instruction Manual

Representation of safety instructions

Fig. 1: Components Safety Instruction

1 Symbol 2 Signal word

5 Possible measures for preventing the danger.

2.1.2 Signal Words for Application Notes

DISOCONT® Tersus MULTISTREAM, Instruction Manual BV-H2414GB, V2

2.2 Five Safety Rules of Electrical Engineering

2.3 Damaged/Defective Electrical Components

BV-H2414GB, V2 DISOCONT® Tersus MULTISTREAM, Instruction Manual

3.1 What is the DISOCONT Tersus?

DISOCONT, MULTICOR and MULTISTREAM are registered trademarks of

DISOCONT® Tersus MULTISTREAM, Instruction Manual BV-H2414GB, V2

3.2 Some Definitions

Abbreviation Meaning Explanation Dimension Example

Z Totalized amount of The material quantity conveyed calculated Weight kg, t

Y Controller actuating Conveyor element setpoint Amperage mA

Xd Deviation The difference between the setpoint and the Percent %

Tab. 1 : Definition for formula symbols

BV-H2414GB, V2 DISOCONT® Tersus MULTISTREAM, Instruction Manual

3.3 Measuring principle

Fig. 2: The MULTISTREAM measuring principle

3.4 Automatic control

DISOCONT® Tersus MULTISTREAM, Instruction Manual BV-H2414GB, V2

3.5 Control operating modes

The feed unit can be operated in the following modes of operation.

The segments shown in the figure mean the following:

BV-H2414GB, V2 DISOCONT® Tersus MULTISTREAM, Instruction Manual

3.7 Additional Bin Weighers

DISOCONT® Tersus MULTISTREAM, Instruction Manual BV-H2414GB, V2

4.1 Behavior after Connecting the Power